JP7629119B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine that issues a right-hit instruction during the execution of the jackpot start performance, encouraging the player to shoot the gaming ball to the right by operating the ball launching handle (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2014-147575 A

However, there is still room for improvement in the instructions that prompt the player to shoot the ball in such a specific direction.

The present invention was made in consideration of the above-mentioned circumstances, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can optimally execute instructions that prompt the player to launch a gaming ball in a specific direction.

The gaming machine of means A is
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A launching means capable of launching game media in response to an operation by a player,
The display means is
A guidance display can be displayed to prompt the player to launch the game medium toward the second area out of the first area and the second area;
When power supply to the gaming machine is started, a recovery display can be displayed.
The game device further includes a guide light emitting means for illuminating a guide light to prompt a player to launch the game medium toward the second area by moving a light emitting portion of the light emitting means,
the guidance display includes a first guidance display and a second guidance display,
The display means is
The second guidance display is displayed during a first period during a predetermined period in which a start performance related to the start of control of the advantageous state is being executed,
performing the first guidance display and the second guidance display in a second period that is within the predetermined period and that is subsequent to the first period;
In a period after the predetermined period, the first guidance display is ended while the second guidance display is performed;
In a special state after the control of the advantageous state is ended, the second guidance display is performed;
The guide light emitting means is
During the first period, the light-emitting means can emit light in a manner different from a light-emitting manner of the light-emitting means during the guidance light emission,
turning off the light emitting means before the second period begins;
When the second period starts, the guidance light is emitted in conjunction with the first guidance display;
In either case where a power interruption occurs while the first guidance display and the second guidance display are being displayed during the second period, or where a power interruption occurs while the second guidance display is being displayed during a period after the specified period, when power supply to the gaming machine is subsequently started, the recovery display is displayed and the second guidance display is displayed in common during the display of the recovery display;
The display means includes:
A background display corresponding to the advantageous state can be displayed;
A display of an amount of the game value to be awarded can be displayed on the front side of the background display,
a first notification display that is displayed when the amount of the game value awarded reaches a first predetermined amount, and a second notification display that is displayed when the amount of the game value awarded reaches a second predetermined amount, on the front side of the background display;
The notification display is a display that ends after a specific period of time has elapsed since the display was started,
The character display included in the notification display is larger in display size than the character display included in the provided amount display,
The character display included in the provision amount display and the notification display includes a specific character display in which a specific area is formed surrounded by lines forming the character display.
It is characterized by:
With this configuration, instructions urging the player can be executed in an optimal manner.
The gaming machine according to the first embodiment includes:
The gaming machine can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player based on the display result of a variable display becoming a specific display result (e.g., the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state, etc.), and is equipped with a display means (e.g., the pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with an image display device 5, etc.), and the display area of the display means includes a first display area and a second display area that is an area around the first display area and is narrower than the first display area (e.g., the display area of the image display device 5 is a first display area 20SH51 and an area around the first display area 20SH51, and a second display area 20SH52 narrower than the first display area 20SH51, etc.), the display means is capable of displaying a background image corresponding to the advantageous state in the first display area and the second display area (for example, the image display device 5 is capable of displaying a background image corresponding to a jackpot gaming state in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52, etc.), and is capable of displaying an amount indication regarding the amount of the gaming value that has been granted in front of the background image in the second display area (for example, the image display device 5 is capable of displaying a second display area 20SH52, etc.). In at least the first display area 20SH52, in front of the background image, an acquired number display 20SHK relating to the number of awarded prize balls can be displayed, as an announcement display for notifying that the awarded amount of gaming value has reached a predetermined amount, a first announcement display for notifying that the awarded amount of gaming value has reached a first predetermined amount, and a second announcement display for notifying that the awarded amount of gaming value has reached a second predetermined amount (for example, the image display device 5 can display, in front of the background image at least in the first display area 20SH51, On the face side, as an acquisition number notification display 20SHKH for notifying that the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state has reached the number of "round numbers", an acquisition number notification display of "over 1000" can be displayed when the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state reaches "1000 balls", and an acquisition number notification display of "over 2000" can be displayed when the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state reaches "2000 balls", etc.), the award amount display is updated every time a gaming value is awarded in the advantageous state (for example, the acquisition number display 20SHK is updated every time a game ball is paid out as a prize ball in a jackpot game state, etc.), the notification display ends when a specific period has elapsed since the start of its display (for example, the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH ends when a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of its display, etc.), the characters used in the notification display are larger in size than the characters used in the award amount display (for example, the characters used in the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH are larger in size than the characters used in the acquisition number display 20SHK, etc.), The characters used in the award amount display and the notification display include specific characters in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters (for example, the characters used in the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH include specific characters in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters, etc.), the specific characters used in the award amount display are such that the background image cannot be seen from the specific area (for example, the specific characters used in the acquisition number display 20SHK are such that the background image cannot be seen from the specific area, etc.), and the specific characters used in the notification display are such that the background image cannot be seen from the specific area The background image of the character is visible from the specific area (for example, the specific character used in the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH is visible from the specific area), and further includes a launching means capable of launching the game medium into the game area in response to the player's operation, and a guidance display means for displaying a guidance message by using an image display on the display means to prompt the player to launch the game medium toward the second flow-down path out of a first flow-down path and a second flow-down path along which the game medium can flow in the game area, and the guidance display includes a first guidance display and a second guidance display. The guidance display means is characterized in that, during a predetermined period after the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, it displays the second guidance display before the display of the name of the advantageous state, which is part of the start performance that notifies the start of control of the advantageous state, is completed, it displays the first guidance display after the display of the name of the advantageous state is completed and continues the second guidance display, during a period after the predetermined period, it terminates the first guidance display while continuing the second guidance display, and in a special state after the control of the advantageous state is completed, it continues the second guidance display.

This configuration allows the display including the specific text to be displayed appropriately in relation to the background image. Also, instructions encouraging the player to launch the game ball in a specific direction can be executed appropriately.

In addition, the embodiments for implementing the invention described below include the invention relating to the gaming machine of Means 2 below. Conventionally, some gaming machines, such as those shown in JP Patent Publication No. 2014-147575, have been configured to issue a right-hit instruction that prompts the player to launch the gaming ball to the right by operating the ball launching handle during the execution of the jackpot start performance. However, there is still room for improvement in such instructions that prompt the player to launch the gaming ball in a specific direction, and in light of this, there is a demand for a gaming machine that can suitably execute instructions that prompt the player to launch the gaming ball in a specific direction.

The gaming machine according to the second aspect of the present invention is
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player based on the display result of a variable display becoming a specific display result, comprising: a launching means that can launch a gaming medium into a gaming area in response to operation by the player; and a guidance display means that uses image displays to display guidance to encourage the player to launch the gaming medium toward the second flow-down path out of a first flow-down path and a second flow-down path along which the gaming medium can flow in the gaming area, the guidance display including a first guidance display and a second guidance display, and the guidance display means is characterized in that, during a predetermined period after the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, before the name display of the advantageous state, which is part of a start performance that notifies the start of control of the advantageous state, is completed, the guidance display means performs the second guidance display after the name display of the advantageous state is completed and continues the second guidance display, and during a period after the predetermined period, the first guidance display is terminated while continuing the second guidance display, and in a special state after the control of the advantageous state is terminated, the second guidance display is continued. According to this feature, an instruction to prompt the player to launch the game ball in a predetermined direction can be preferably executed.

FIG. 2 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine according to this embodiment. 1 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in a pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a game control main process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a timer interrupt process for game control. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol process. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control main process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control process. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of lighting of a game effect lamp. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol stopping process. A flowchart showing an example of processing before a jackpot is released. A flowchart showing an example of processing during opening of a jackpot. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of various display processes. This is a timing chart showing the timing of the opening of the large prize opening and the timing of various displays. A figure showing an example of the performance operation display on the image display device, the open/closed state of the large prize opening, and the lighting status of various lamps. A figure showing an example of the performance operation display on the image display device, the open/closed state of the large prize opening, and the lighting status of various lamps. A figure showing an example of the performance operation display on the image display device, the open/closed state of the large prize opening, and the lighting status of various lamps. A figure showing an example of the performance operation display on the image display device, the open/closed state of the large prize opening, and the lighting status of various lamps. A figure showing an example of the performance operation display on the image display device, the open/closed state of the large prize opening, and the lighting status of various lamps. A figure showing an example of the performance operation display on the image display device, the open/closed state of the large prize opening, and the lighting status of various lamps. A figure showing an example of the performance operation display on the image display device, the open/closed state of the large prize opening, and the lighting status of various lamps. A figure showing an example of the performance operation display on the image display device, the open/closed state of the large prize opening, and the lighting status of various lamps. A figure showing an example of a state in which a game ball is caught in a special variable winning ball device. A figure showing an example of the performance operation display on the image display device, the open/closed state of the large prize opening, and the lighting status of various lamps. This is a timing chart showing the timing of the opening of the large prize opening and the timing of various displays. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of various display processes. A figure showing an example of the performance operation display on the image display device, the open/closed state of the large prize opening, and the lighting status of various lamps. A figure showing an example of the performance operation display on the image display device, the open/closed state of the large prize opening, and the lighting status of various lamps. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of an effect display. A figure showing background art related to a first form of the characteristic portion 20SH. A figure showing an example of the display form of Arabic numerals used to display the number of acquisitions, etc. in the first form of the feature part 20SH. A figure showing how the acquisition number display appears in the first form of the feature part 20SH. A figure showing an example of the presentation operation of the acquisition number display and acquisition number notification display in the first form of the feature part 20SH. A figure showing an example of the display form of Arabic numerals used to display the number of acquisitions in the second form of the feature part 20SH. A figure showing a modified example 1 of the display mode of Arabic numerals used to display the number of acquisitions in the second form of the feature portion 20SH. A figure showing a second modified example of the display mode of Arabic numerals used to display the number of acquisitions in the second form of the feature portion 20SH. A figure showing an example of the display form of Arabic numerals used to display the result in the third form of the feature portion 20SH. A figure showing an example of the presentation period of various presentations in a jackpot gaming state in the third form of the feature unit 20SH. A figure showing examples of the presentation operation of various presentations in a jackpot gaming state in the third form of the feature unit 20SH. A figure showing an example of a setting suggestion provided by an ending background image in the third form of feature section 20SH. A figure showing background art related to the fourth form of the characteristic portion 20SH. A figure showing an example of the display form of Arabic numerals used to display the remaining number of times in the fourth form of characteristic portion 20SH. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a display form of Arabic numerals used to display the remaining number of times in the fourth form of the characteristic portion 20SH. A figure showing how the remaining number of times display appears in the fourth form of characteristic part 20SH. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the relationship between the variable display and the change in the display mode of the remaining number notification display in the fourth form of the characteristic portion 20SH. FIG. A figure showing an example of the remaining number of times display and remaining number of times notification display presentation operation in the first form of the characteristic part 20SH. A figure showing an example of a presentation action when a winning occurs during a round in feature portion 19SH. A figure showing an example of the positional relationship between multiple display layers on which various displays are displayed in the characteristic portion 19SH. A figure showing an example of a presentation operation when an over-winning occurs in feature portion 19SH. A figure showing an example of the positional relationship between multiple display layers on which various displays are displayed in the characteristic portion 19SH. A figure showing an example of a setting suggestion by the over winning effect in feature section 19SH. This figure shows an example of a presentation operation when there is a round in which the specified number of winning balls are not won in the characteristic part 19SH and a round in which an over winning ball occurs. A figure showing another example of the presentation action when there is a round in which the specified number of winning balls are not won and a round in which an over-winning ball occurs in the characteristic portion 19SH. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine relating to a characteristic portion of this embodiment. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing a frame lamp. An explanatory diagram showing the special pattern LED board and the fourth pattern unit. 1 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in a pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 2 is a front view of the image display device. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a winning type table. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. An explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table and a jackpot type determination table. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of a performance control command. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of normal special symbol processing. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a variation pattern setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special pattern change process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol stopping process. A flowchart showing an example of processing before a jackpot is released. A flowchart showing an example of processing during opening of a jackpot. A flowchart showing an example of processing after a jackpot is released. A flowchart showing an example of a jackpot end process. A flowchart showing an example of a performance processing during a jackpot. 13 is a timing chart showing an example of processing during a winning fluctuation. This is a timing chart showing an example of processing during a jackpot. This is a timing chart showing an example of processing after a jackpot has ended. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing a lighting state of a lamp. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine during play. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine during play. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine during play. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine during play. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine during play. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine during play. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine during play. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine during play. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine during play. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine during play. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine during play. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a parent table in a lighting data table; FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a child table in the lighting data table; FIG. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a grandchild table in the lighting data table. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a grandchild table in the lighting data table. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine during play. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine during play. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine during play. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine during play. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine during play. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine during play. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine during play. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine during play. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine during play. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine during play. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine during play. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine during play. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine during play. FIG. This is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine when power is restored after a power outage during the fanfare presentation due to a special chart 1 hit. This is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine when power is restored from a power outage during one round of a jackpot when special chart 1 is hit. This is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine when power is restored after a power outage between rounds after one round of a jackpot when special chart 1 is hit. This is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine when power is restored after a power outage during the second round of a jackpot when special chart 1 is hit. This is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine when power is restored after a power outage between two rounds after a jackpot when special chart 1 is hit. This is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine when power is restored after a power outage between rounds three rounds after a jackpot when special chart 1 is hit. This is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine when power is restored after a power outage during the 4th round of a jackpot when special chart 1 is hit. This is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine when power is restored after a power outage between rounds four rounds after a jackpot when special chart 1 is hit. This is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine when power is restored from a power outage during the final round of a jackpot when special chart 1 is hit. This is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine when power is restored after a power outage during the ending presentation when special chart 1 is hit.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (which is also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of Pachinko Game Machine 1, etc.)
1 is a front view of a pachinko game machine 1, showing the layout of the main components. The pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is broadly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes the game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and game balls as game media are shot into this game area by a predetermined ball shooting device.

Note that the "variable display" of special symbols refers to, for example, the display of multiple types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described below). The variations include updating the display of multiple symbols, scrolling the display of multiple symbols, transforming one or more symbols, and enlarging/reducing one or more symbols. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols described below, multiple types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative symbols described below, multiple types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative symbols are transformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that variations also include a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed flashing. At the end of the variable display, a specified special symbol is displayed stationary (also called derived or derived display) as the display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described below). Note that the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or a variation.

The special pattern variably displayed on the first special pattern display device 4A is also called the "first special pattern," and the special pattern variably displayed on the second special pattern display device 4B is also called the "second special pattern." A special pattern game using the first special pattern is also called the "first special pattern game," and a special pattern game using the second special pattern is also called the "second special pattern game." There may be only one type of special pattern display device that variably displays the special patterns.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the play area on the play board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or an organic EL (electro luminescence) device, and displays various presentation images. The image display device 5 may also be composed of a projector and a screen. Various presentation images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, multiple types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) that are different from the special patterns are variably displayed as decorative identification information. Here, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, decorative patterns are variably displayed (for example, scrolled up and down or updated) in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. The special game and the variable display of decorative patterns that are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

The screen of the image display device 5 may be provided with a display area for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display corresponding to a variable display that is being executed. The pending display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display-compatible display corresponding to the variable display.

The number of reserved variable displays is also referred to as the reserved memory number. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also referred to as the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also referred to as the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is also referred to as the total reserved memory number.

A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B, each of which includes a plurality of LEDs, are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. The first hold indicator 25A displays the first hold memory number by the number of lit LEDs. The second hold indicator 25B displays the second hold memory number by the number of lit LEDs.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided to the right of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first start winning hole that is always kept in a constant open state so that game balls can enter, for example, by a specified ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a specified number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (normal electric device) forms a second start winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by the solenoid 81 (see FIG. 3). The variable winning ball device 6B is, for example, an electric tulip-type device having a pair of movable wings, and when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, the movable wings are in a vertical position, so that the tip of the movable wings approaches the winning ball device 6A, and the second start winning hole is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter (also referred to as the second start winning hole being in a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the on state, the movable wings of the variable winning ball device 6B are in a tilted position, so that the second start winning hole is in an open state in which the game ball can enter (also referred to as the second start winning hole being in an open state). When a game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the second special game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that can change between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to devices that include an electric tulip-type device.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, three locations are provided at the lower left of the game area and one location is provided above the variable winning ball device 6B), general winning openings 10 are provided which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when a game ball enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., three balls) are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 has a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see Figure 3), and the large winning opening door forms the large winning opening as a specific area that can be switched between an open state and a closed state.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door (for the special electric device) is in the OFF state, the large prize opening door closes the large prize opening, and game balls cannot enter (pass through) the large prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door is in the ON state, the large prize opening door opens the large prize opening, and game balls can easily enter the large prize opening.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 15 balls) are paid out as prize balls. When a game ball enters the large prize opening, more prize balls are paid out than when a game ball enters the first start prize opening, the second start prize opening, or the general prize opening 10, for example.

The entry of a game ball into each winning port, including the general winning port 10, is also referred to as a "winning". In particular, a winning ball into the starting port (first starting winning port, second starting winning port) is also referred to as a starting winning port.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (the lower left of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is made up of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs a variable display of normal symbols as multiple types of normal identification information different from the special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers showing "0" to "9" or lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbols may also include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal symbols is also called a normal symbol game.

A pass gate 41 through which the game ball can pass is provided to the right of the image display device 5. When the game ball passes through the pass gate 41, a regular game is executed.

A regular symbol pending display 25C is provided below the regular symbol display 20. The regular symbol pending display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the regular symbol pending memory count, which is the number of regular symbol games that are pending execution, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above features, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with windmills that change the direction and speed of the game balls, as well as numerous obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an outlet that takes in game balls that do not enter any of the winning holes.

Speakers 8L and 8R for playing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 in the gaming machine frame 3, and frame lamps 9b are provided on the left and right of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the game area. As shown in the figure, the frame lamps 9b include a lower left lamp 9bL1 in the lower left part, an upper left lamp 9bL2 in the upper left part, a lower right lamp 9bR1 in the lower right part, and an upper right lamp 9bR2 in the upper right part. Furthermore, an attacca lamp 9c is provided in the vicinity of the special variable winning ball device 7 on the gaming board 2. In addition, speaker lamps 9eL and 9eR are provided in the speakers 8L and 8R parts corresponding to each other. A display device lower lamp 9f is provided below the image display device 5 on the gaming board 2, and the display device lower lamp 9f includes a left display device lower lamp 9fL and a right display device lower lamp 9fR as shown in the figure. In addition, general prize opening vicinity lamps 9g are provided near the three general prize openings 10 located at the lower left of the game area.

At a predetermined position on the game board 2 (above the image display device 5 in FIG. 1), a movable body 32 that operates according to the presentation is provided. The movable body 32 is also provided with a movable body lamp 9d. The movable body lamp 9d and the aforementioned main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, speaker lamps 9eL and 9eR, lamp below the display device 9f, and lamp near the general winning opening 9g may be collectively referred to as the game effect lamps 9. Note that the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d, speaker lamps 9eL and 9eR, lamp below the display device 9f, and lamp near the general winning opening 9g are each configured to include an LED.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided, which is operated by the player or the like to launch the gaming ball toward the gaming area using the ball-hitting device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area, a ball supply tray (upper tray) is provided to hold (store) gaming balls dispensed as prize balls or gaming balls loaned from a predetermined ball loaning machine so that they can be supplied to the ball launching device. Below the upper tray, a ball supply tray (lower tray) is provided from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by a player. Operations on the stick controller 31A are detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 3).

At a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area, a push button 31B is provided that the player can press to give a predetermined command. The operation of the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 3).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the player's actions (operations, etc.), but other detection means may also be provided.

Figure 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The main board 11, housed in a board case 201, is mounted on the rear of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The main board 11 is provided with a setting key 51 and a setting change switch 52. The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting change switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing settings such as the probability of winning a jackpot and the payout rate in the setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting change switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11, for example, at a predetermined position on the power supply board 17.

A display monitor 29 is disposed in the center of the back surface of the main board 11, and a display changeover switch 31 is disposed to the side of the display monitor 29. The display monitor 29 may be configured, for example, using a seven-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 31 are disposed directly in front of the main board 11 when the back surface of the game board 2 is viewed with the game machine frame 3 open.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as consecutive win ratio, winning combination ratio, and base. The consecutive win ratio is the ratio of the number of winning balls that have entered the large winning port (attacker) to the total number of winning balls. The winning combination ratio is the ratio of the number of winning balls that have entered the second start winning port (electric chute) and the number of winning balls that have entered the large winning port (attacker) to the total number of winning balls. The base is the ratio of the total number of winning balls to the number of game balls shot out. When in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the display monitor 29 can display the setting values in the pachinko game machine 1. When in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the display monitor 29 only needs to be able to display the setting values to be changed or confirmed.

When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The gaming machine frame 3 is provided with a rotatable glass door frame 3a having a glass window, and is configured so that the gaming area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the gaming area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a security cover 500A is attached to the right end of the outer frame 1a, which is formed in a vertically long rectangular frame shape. When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the security cover 500A covers the right side of the board case 201, including the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52, from the rear side. The security cover 500A is a roughly L-shaped member including a short piece 500Aa and a long piece 500Ab, and may be made of a transparent synthetic resin.

(Outline of game progress)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the player rotating the ball hitting operation handle 30 provided on the pachinko game machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, a normal game is started by the normal symbol display 20. If the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during which the previous normal game is being played (if the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 but the normal game based on the passing cannot be played immediately), the normal game based on the passing is put on hold up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this normal game, if a specific normal symbol (a normal winning symbol) is displayed as a fixed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol will be "normal winning". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal winning symbol (a normal losing symbol) is displayed as a fixed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol will be "normal losing". When a "normal winning" occurs, an opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B in an open state for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning port is opened).

When a game ball enters the first start winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game is started by the first special symbol display device 4A.

When a game ball enters the second start winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, a second special game is started by the second special pattern display device 4B.

In addition, if the game ball enters (wins) the start winning hole during the period when the special game is being played or during the period when the game is controlled to a big win game state or a small win game state (when a start winning occurs but the special game based on the start winning cannot be played immediately), the special game based on that entry will be put on hold until a specified upper limit number (for example, 4).

In special game, if a specific special symbol (a big win symbol, for example, "7"; the actual symbol varies depending on the type of big win, as described below) is displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it is a "big win", and if a specific special symbol different from the big win symbol (a small win symbol, for example, "2") is displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it is a "small win". Also, if a special symbol different from the big win or small win symbol (a losing symbol, for example, "-") is displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it is a "losing".

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game state is controlled to a big win game state, which is advantageous for the player. After the display result in the special game becomes "small win", the game state is controlled to a small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the large prize opening formed by the special variable prize ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. This open state continues until either a predetermined period of time (e.g., 29.5 seconds or 1.8 seconds) has elapsed, or the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 10), whichever comes first. The predetermined period is the maximum period during which the large prize opening can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as the maximum opening period. This cycle in which the large prize opening is open is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeated until the predetermined maximum number of times (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the jackpot game state, the player can obtain prize balls by making the game ball enter the large prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot game state is an advantageous state for the player. The more rounds there are in the jackpot game state, and the longer the upper limit opening period, the more advantageous it is for the player. In the jackpot game state, a so-called right hit is performed, in which the game ball is shot into the right-side game area so that the game ball enters the large prize opening formed by the special variable prize ball device 7.

The "jackpot" has a set type of jackpot. For example, there are multiple types of opening modes of the jackpot opening (number of rounds or maximum opening period) and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time-saving state, special state, etc.), and the jackpot type is set according to these. There may be jackpot types that offer many prize balls, jackpot types that offer few prize balls, or jackpot types that offer almost no prize balls.

In the small win game state, the large prize opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening state. For example, in the small win game state, the large prize opening is opened in the same opening state as the large prize opening in the large prize game state for some large prize types (the number of times the large prize opening is opened is the same as the number of rounds, and the timing of closing the large prize opening is also the same, etc.). Note that, like the large prize types, small prize types may also be set for "small wins".

After the jackpot game state ends, the game may be controlled to a time-saving state or a special state depending on the type of jackpot mentioned above.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol fluctuation time (period during which the special symbol fluctuates) more than in the normal state. In the time-saving state, control (high opening control, high base control) is also executed to make it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning hole by shortening the average regular symbol fluctuation time (period during which the regular symbol fluctuates) more than in the normal state and by improving the probability of a "regular symbol hit" in the regular symbol game more than in the normal state. The time-saving state is an advantageous state for the player because it is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved.

In the probability variable state (probability fluctuating state), in addition to time-saving control, probability variable control is executed, which increases the probability that the display result will be a "jackpot" compared to the normal state. The probability variable state is an even more advantageous state for the player, as it not only improves the efficiency of special symbol fluctuation, but also makes it easier to get a "jackpot."

The time-saving state or the probability of a special bonus state will continue until one of the end conditions is met first, such as the specified number of special games being played or the start of the next big win game state. The end condition of the state in which the specified number of special games have been played is also called a count-cut (count-cut time-saving state, count-cut probability of a special bonus state, etc.).

The normal state refers to a game state other than advantageous states such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, and special states such as a time-saving state and a probability-varying state, and is a state in which the pachinko game machine 1, such as the probability that the display result in the normal game will be a "normal hit" and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", is controlled in the same way as the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed and the specified return process is not executed after the power is turned on).

The state in which probability variable control is being executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not being executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which time-saving control is being executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which time-saving control is not being executed is also called a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low probability high base state, the probability variable state is a high probability high base state, and the normal state is a low probability low base state. The high probability state and low base state are also called a high probability low base state.

After the small win game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special game becomes "small win" is continued (however, if the special game when the "small win" occurs is the special game of the specified number of times in the number cut, the game state will naturally change). Note that the display result of the special game does not have to be "small win".

The game state may change based on the game ball passing through a specific area (e.g., a specific area in a big prize hole) during the big win game state. For example, when the game ball passes through the specific area, the game state may be controlled to a probability variable state after the big win game state.
(Progression of the performance, etc.)

In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects that notify the progress of the game or liven up the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The effects are described below. The effects are performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or instead of the display, the effects may be audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamp 9 turning on and off, the movement of the movable body 32, or any other effect device that includes some or all of these.

As an effect that is executed according to the progress of the game, in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R provided on the image display device 5, a variable display of decorative patterns begins in response to the start of the first or second special pattern game. At the timing when the display result (also called the determined special pattern) in the first or second special pattern game is displayed statically, the determined decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns is also displayed statically (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts to when it ends, the state of the variable display of the decorative symbols may become a predetermined reach state (a reach is achieved). Here, a reach state refers to a state in which the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 continue to be variable displayed when the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed form part of a jackpot combination, which will be described later.

In addition, when the above-mentioned reach state occurs during the variable display of the decorative symbols, a reach effect is executed. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, multiple types of reach effects are executed, which have different rates of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" (also called the jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation rate) depending on the performance state. Reach effects include, for example, a normal reach and a super reach, which has a higher jackpot reliability than a normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "jackpot", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative patterns (for example, "7") are displayed stopped in line on a predetermined effective line in the "left", "center", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

In the case of a "probability jackpot" that is controlled to a probability jackpot state after the end of the jackpot game state, odd decorative symbols (e.g., "7") may be displayed in a line, and in the case of a "non-probability jackpot (normal jackpot)" that is not controlled to a probability jackpot state after the end of the jackpot game state, even decorative symbols (e.g., "6") may be displayed in a line. In this case, odd decorative symbols are also called probability jackpot symbols, and even decorative symbols are also called non-probability jackpot symbols (normal symbols). After a reach state is reached with non-probability jackpot symbols, a promotion effect may be executed that ultimately results in a "probability jackpot".

When the display result of the special game is a "small win", a fixed decorative pattern (such as "1 3 5") that is a predetermined small win combination is derived on the screen of the image display device 5 as a display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a "small win"). As an example, decorative patterns that constitute chance eyes are displayed stationary on a predetermined effective line in the "left", "center", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Note that a common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed when the display result of the special game is a "big win" of some big win types (big win types in a big win game state that are the same as a small win game state) and when it is a "small win".

When the display result of the special game is a "miss," the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern does not become a reach state, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may display a fixed decorative pattern of a non-reach combination (also called a "non-reach miss") as a "non-reach miss" (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be a "non-reach miss"). Also, when the display result is a "miss," after the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a reach state, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may display a fixed decorative pattern of a predetermined reach combination (also called a "reach miss") that is not a jackpot combination as a "reach miss" (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be a "reach miss").

The effects that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute include displaying the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) described above. In addition, as other effects, for example, a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern. Preview effects include a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display currently being executed, and a pre-reading preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is on hold). As a pre-reading preview effect, an effect that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

In addition, in the image display device 5, a pseudo consecutive performance may be executed in which a single variable display appears to be multiple variable displays by temporarily pausing the decorative pattern during the variable display and then restarting the variable display.

During a big win game state, a big win performance is executed to notify the player of the big win game state. As a big win performance, a performance to notify the number of rounds or a promotion performance to indicate that the value of the big win game state will increase may be executed. Also, during a small win game state, a small win performance to notify the player of the small win game state is executed. In addition, a common performance may be executed during a small win game state and a big win game state for some big win types (a big win type of a big win game state in the same manner as a small win game state, for example, a big win type in which the game state after that is a high probability state), so that the player cannot know whether he is currently in a small win game state or a big win game state. In such a case, a common performance may be executed after the end of the small win game state and after the end of the big win game state, so that it is not possible to distinguish whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state.

In addition, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo performance is executed).

(Board configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, a performance control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like, as shown in Fig. 3. In addition, various boards, such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, and a launch control board, are arranged on the back of the pachinko game machine 1. Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also equipped. The various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductor patterns are formed and on which electrical components can be mounted, but also electronic circuit mounting boards configured to realize specific electrical functions by mounting electrical components on the electronic circuit board.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, power from an AC power source, such as an external power source of 100V AC, such as a commercial power source, can be supplied to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the performance control board 12, via the power supply board 17. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) to direct current (DC), and a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined DC voltage to a specific DC voltage (for example, 12V DC or 5V DC).

The main board 11 is the main control board, and has the function of controlling the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of the special game (including management of reserved balls), execution of the regular game (including management of reserved balls), big win game state, small win game state, game state, etc.). The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, etc.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, a random number circuit 104, and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 executes the programs stored in the ROM 101 to perform processes that control the progress of the game (processes that realize the functions of the main board 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (such as data on fluctuation patterns, performance control commands, and tables referenced when making various decisions) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are preserved for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the programs stored in the ROM 101 may be deployed to the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 is configured to include, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described below) are input, and an output port for transmitting various signals (signals for controlling (driving) the first special pattern display device 4A, the second special pattern display device 4B, the normal pattern display device 20, the first hold display device 25A, the second hold display device 25B, the normal hold display device 25C, etc., solenoid drive signals).

The switch circuit 110 takes in detection signals (such as a detection signal indicating that a game ball has passed or entered and the switch has been turned on) from various switches for detecting game balls (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23), and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal indicates that the game ball has passed or entered.

The switch circuit 110 receives a reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of control circuits such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either a power supply monitoring circuit, an IC with a built-in watchdog timer, or a system reset IC. The power-off signal is turned off when the specified power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a specified value, and is turned on when the period during which the specified power supply voltage remains below the specified value continues for longer than the power-off reference time. The clear signal is turned on in response to, for example, pressing a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits solenoid drive signals (such as signals to turn on solenoid 81 and solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric device and the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door.

The main board 11 is connected to a display monitor 29, a display changeover switch 31, a setting key 51, a setting changeover switch 52, and a door open sensor 90. The door open sensor 90 detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 3, including the glass door frame 3a.

As part of controlling the progress of the game, the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) supplies presentation control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) to the presentation control board 12 according to the progress of the game. The presentation control commands output from the main board 11 are relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the presentation control board 12. The presentation control commands include, for example, commands that specify various determination results in the main board 11 (for example, the display results of the special game (including the type of jackpot), the variable pattern used when executing the special game (described in detail later)), the game status (for example, the start or end of the variable display, the opening status of the jackpot opening, the occurrence of a win, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the occurrence of an error, etc.

The performance control board 12 is a sub-control board independent of the main board 11, and has the function of receiving performance control commands and executing performances (various performances according to the progress of the game, including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, notifying errors, and notifying of power outage recovery) based on the received performance control commands.

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The performance control CPU 120 executes the programs stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing for executing performances together with the display control unit 123 (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the performance control board 12, including determining the performance to be executed). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The presentation control CPU 120 may instruct the display control unit 123 to execute a presentation based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (signals that are output when an operation by the player is detected and that appropriately indicate the content of the operation).

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes the performance based on instructions to execute the performance from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 displays a performance image on the image display unit 5 by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display unit 5 based on an instruction to execute the performance from the performance control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 and a lamp signal (a signal designating the on/off state of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the performance image and to turn on/off the game effect lamp 9. The display control unit 123 also supplies a signal to operate the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or to a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, causing the speakers 8L and 8R to output the sound designated by the sound designation signal.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamp 9, and drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, turning the game effect lamp 9 on and off in the manner specified by the lamp signal. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the sound output and the turning on and off of the lamp.

The performance control CPU 120 may be configured to execute control of audio output, turning on/off the lamp (such as supplying a sound designation signal or a lamp signal), and controlling the movable body 32 (such as supplying a signal to operate the movable body 32).

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for performance) used to execute various performances. The random numbers for performance may be updated by the performance control CPU 120 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the performance control board 12 includes an input port for taking in performance control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and an output port for transmitting various signals (video signals, sound designation signals, lamp signals).

The boards other than the main board 11, such as the performance control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. As with the pachinko game machine 1, multiple sub-boards may be provided for different functions, or one sub-board may be configured to have multiple functions.

(Operation)
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main Operations of Main Board 11)
First, a description will be given of the main operations of the main board 11. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and a game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. Fig. 4 is a flowchart showing the game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 4, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S1). Then, it performs the necessary initial settings (step S2). The initial settings include setting the stack pointer, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), and setting the RAM 102 to be accessible.

Next, it is determined whether the recovery condition is met (step S3). The recovery condition can be met when the clear signal is off, backup data is present, and the backup RAM is normal. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, if a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, for example, an on-state clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100. If such an on-state clear signal is input, it is determined in step S3 that the recovery condition is not met. The backup data only needs to be capable of being stored in the RAM 102, which serves as the backup RAM for game control. In step S3, it is determined whether the recovery condition can be met by checking or inspecting the presence or absence of backup data and the presence or absence of data errors.

If the recovery condition is met (step S3; Yes), recovery processing (step S4) is executed, followed by setting confirmation processing (step S5). The recovery processing in step S4 sets a working area based on the contents stored in RAM 102. By setting the working area using the backup data stored in RAM 102, the game state when the power supply was stopped is restored, and if, for example, a special symbol was changing, it is sufficient if the change of the special symbol can be resumed from the state before the stoppage.

If the recovery condition is not met (step S3; No), an initialization process (step S6) is executed, and then a setting change process (step S7) is executed. The initialization process in step S6 includes a clearing process that clears flags, counters, and buffers stored in RAM 102, and the execution of the clearing process sets initial values in the working area.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether a predetermined setting confirmation condition is met. The setting confirmation condition is met, for example, when power supply is started, the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is in the ON state and the setting key 51 is turned ON. The setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed when the recovery condition is met in step S3, including the clear signal being in the OFF state. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be met when the clear signal is in the OFF state, the clear signal being in the OFF state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

If the setting confirmation condition is met in the setting confirmation process of step S5, the pachinko gaming machine 1 enters a setting confirmation state in which the setting values set therein can be confirmed, and a setting confirmation start command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. In the setting confirmation state, the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed by viewing them on the display monitor 29. When the setting confirmation state is to end, a setting confirmation end command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, it may be in a game stop state in which the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. In the game stop state, the launch of game balls by operating the ball-hitting handle, the detection of game balls by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol display device 20 may be controlled to stop displaying a losing symbol or the like, or to display a symbol corresponding to a game stop state other than a losing symbol. When the setting confirmation state ends, the game stop state associated with it may also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, it is determined whether a predetermined setting change condition is met. The setting change condition is met, for example, when power supply is started, the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is in the ON state and the setting key 51 is turned ON. The setting change condition may also include the clear signal being in the ON state.

When the setting change condition is met in the setting change process of step S7, the pachinko gaming machine 1 enters a setting change state in which the setting value set therein can be changed, and a setting change start command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. In the setting change state, the setting value is displayed on the display monitor 29, and the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 29 is updated and displayed sequentially each time the setting change switch 52 is operated. After that, when the setting key 51 is turned off by an attendant at the game center or the like, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated and stored) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the display monitor 29 is turned off. When the setting change state is to be ended, a setting change end command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be in a play stop state, just as when it is in the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the associated play stop state may also end.

When the performance control board 12 receives a setting check start command or a setting change start command, it may perform control to notify the user that the setting is being checked or changed. For example, it may display a specific image on the image display device 5, output a specific sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, or cause a light-emitting component such as the game effect lamp 9 to emit light in a specific manner.

The clear signal is turned on by, for example, pressing a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17. Therefore, when power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on, if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 and the setting change process of step S7 are executed, making it possible to control the device to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery process of step S4 and the setting confirmation process of step S5 are executed, making it possible to control the device to the setting confirmation state. When power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is off or the setting key 51 is off, if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 is executed but the device is not controlled to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery process of step S4 is executed but the device is not controlled to the setting confirmation state.

After executing the setting confirmation process or setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the register of the CTC built into the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt occurs periodically at a predetermined time (e.g., every 2 ms) (step S9), and the interrupt is permitted (step S10). After that, a loop process is entered. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (e.g., every 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can execute the timer interrupt process periodically.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. 5. When the game control timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 5 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch processing to determine whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 via the switch circuit 110 (step S21). Next, by executing a predetermined main side error processing, it diagnoses abnormalities in the pachinko game machine 1, and can issue a warning if necessary depending on the diagnosis result (step S22). After this, by executing a predetermined information output processing, it outputs data such as jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpots), start information (information indicating the number of start winnings), and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the probability fluctuation state has occurred) that are supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko game machine 1 (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process is executed to update at least a portion of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process (step S25). By the CPU 103 executing the special symbol process process at each timer interrupt, management of the execution and reservation of the special symbol game, control of the big win game state and small win game state, control of the game state, etc. are realized.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process at each timer interrupt, enabling the execution and reservation management of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passing gate 41), and the opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on a "normal symbol hit". The normal symbol game is executed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of reserved normal symbols is displayed by lighting the normal symbol reservation display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed. Then, the CPU 103 executes a command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set a performance control command for transmission in each of the above processes. In the command control processing of step S27, a process is performed to transmit the performance control command set for transmission to a sub-side control board such as the performance control board 12. After executing the command control processing, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt processing is terminated.

Figure 6 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol process executed in step S25 shown in Figure 5. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning judgment process, a process is executed to detect the occurrence of a start winning, store the reserved information in a specified area of the RAM 102, and update the reserved memory number. When a start winning occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of big win) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as reserved information. In addition, a process for predicting and judging the display result and the variation pattern based on the extracted random number value may be executed. After the reserved information and the reserved memory number are stored, a transmission setting is performed to transmit a performance control command to the performance control board 12 to specify the judgment results such as the occurrence of a start winning, the reserved memory number, and the predictive judgment. The performance control command at the time of the start winning that has been transmitted and set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, after the special pattern process is completed, by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 4.

After executing the start winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S110 to S120 depending on the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102. Note that in each step of the special symbol process (steps S110 to S120), a transmission setting is made to transmit a performance control command corresponding to each step to the performance control board 12.

The normal special pattern processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "0" (initial value). In this normal special pattern processing, a determination is made as to whether or not to start the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game based on the presence or absence of reserved information. In addition, in the normal special pattern processing, based on a random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special pattern or the decorative pattern is to be a "big win" or a "small win", and if it is a "big win", the type of big win is determined (pre-determined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the normal special pattern processing, a determined special pattern (either a big win pattern, a small win pattern, or a miss pattern) to be stopped and displayed in the special pattern game is set in response to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "1", and the normal special pattern processing is terminated. Note that the special pattern game using the second special pattern may be executed in priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern (also called special pattern 2 priority consumption). Also, the order in which the game balls enter the first start winning slot and the second start winning slot may be stored, and the conditions for starting the special game may be met in the order in which the balls enter (also called winning order consumption).

When making various decisions based on random number values, various tables stored in ROM 101 (tables in which decision values compared with random number values are assigned to decision results) are referenced. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the performance control board 12. On the performance control board 12, various tables are stored in ROM 121.

The fluctuation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "1". This fluctuation pattern setting process includes a process of determining the fluctuation pattern to one of multiple types using a random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on a pre-determined result of whether the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". In the fluctuation pattern setting process, when the fluctuation pattern is determined, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "2" and the fluctuation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern specifies the execution time of the special game (special game variation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbols), the manner of the variable display of the decorative symbols (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the content of the presentation during the variable display of the decorative symbols (type of reach presentation, etc.), and is also called the variable display pattern.

The special pattern change process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "2". This special pattern change process includes a process for making settings to change the special pattern in the first special pattern display device 4A and the second special pattern display device 4B, and a process for measuring the elapsed time since the special pattern started to change. It also determines whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special pattern change time corresponding to the change pattern. Then, when the elapsed time since the special pattern started to change reaches the special pattern change time, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "3", and the special pattern change process ends.

The special pattern stop process of step S113 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "3". This special pattern stop process includes a process for setting the first special pattern display device 4A or the second special pattern display device 4B to stop the fluctuation of the special pattern and to stop displaying (deriving) the confirmed special pattern that is the display result of the special pattern. If the display result is a "big win", the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, if the big win flag is off and the display result is a "small win", the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is a "miss", the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "0". If the display result is a "small win" or "miss", when the time-saving state or the probability change state is controlled and the end of the number of times is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special pattern process flag is updated, the special pattern stop process ends.

The pre-opening process for the jackpot in step S114 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "4". This pre-opening process for the jackpot includes a process for setting the jackpot opening port to open by starting the execution of a round in the jackpot game state based on the display result being "jackpot". When the jackpot opening port is opened, a process for supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening port is executed. At this time, for example, depending on the type of jackpot, the maximum open period for the jackpot opening port and the maximum number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5" and the pre-opening process for the jackpot is completed.

The jackpot opening process of step S115 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes a process for measuring the time that has elapsed since the jackpot opening was opened, and a process for determining whether or not it is time to return the jackpot opening from an open state to a closed state based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23. When the jackpot opening is to be returned to a closed state, a process for stopping the supply of a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening door is executed, and then the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "6", and the jackpot opening process is terminated.

The post-jackpot release process of step S116 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "6". This post-jackpot release process includes a process for determining whether the number of times the round that opens the big prize opening has been executed has reached a set upper limit, and a process for making settings to end the jackpot game state when the upper limit has been reached. When the number of times the round has been executed has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5", whereas when the number of times the round has been executed has reached the upper limit, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "7". When the value of the special chart process flag is updated, the post-jackpot release process ends.

The jackpot end process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "7". This jackpot end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period during which an ending presentation is executed as a presentation operation that notifies the end of the jackpot game state has elapsed, and a process of making various settings for starting special rate control or time-saving control in response to the end of the jackpot game state. When such settings are made, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end process ends.

The small win pre-opening process in step S118 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "8". This small win pre-opening process includes a process for setting the large prize opening to an open state in the small win game state based on the display result being "small win". At this time, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "9", and the small win pre-opening process ends.

The small win open processing of step S119 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "9". This small win open processing includes a process for measuring the time that has elapsed since the large prize opening was opened, and a process for determining whether or not it is time to return the large prize opening from an open state to a closed state based on the measured elapsed time. When the large prize opening is returned to a closed state and it is time to end the small win game state, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "10" and the small win open processing ends.

The small win end process of step S120 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "10". This small win end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period during which the presentation operation that notifies the end of the small win game state is executed has elapsed. Here, when the small win game state ends, the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 before the small win game state is entered is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small win game state has elapsed, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "0", and the small win end process ends.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured so that the winning probability of a jackpot and the ball payout rate change according to the setting value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the winning probability of a jackpot and the ball payout rate change by using a display result judgment table (winning probability) according to the setting value. For example, the setting value is made up of six levels from 1 to 6, with 6 being the highest winning probability of a jackpot, and the winning probability of a jackpot decreasing as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. In this example, when the setting value is set to 6, the player has the highest advantage, and the advantage decreases stepwise as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. If the winning probability of a jackpot changes according to the setting value, the ball payout rate may also change according to the setting value. The winning probability of a jackpot is constant regardless of the setting value, while the number of rounds in the jackpot game state may change according to the setting value. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be configured to be able to set one of a number of setting values that have different degrees of advantage for the player. The setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is notified by sending a setting value designation command from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

Figure 7 shows an example of the configuration of a display result judgment table. Figure 7 (A) shows an example of the configuration of a display result judgment table for the first special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, and Figure 7 (B) shows an example of the configuration of a display result judgment table for the second special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the second special symbol. The display result judgment table is a collection of data stored in ROM 101. In the display result judgment table, a winning judgment value compared with the random number value MR1 according to a set value is assigned to the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol. The random number value MR1 is a random number value for determining the display result, and the value is updated randomly within the range of 0 to 65535. As the display result judgment table, a display result judgment table common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be used.

In the display result judgment table, when the game state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more judgment values are assigned to the special chart display result of "jackpot" than when the game state is a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state). As a result, when the pachinko game machine 1 is in a high probability state such as a probability variable state in which probability variable control is performed, the probability of determining that the game state will be controlled to a jackpot game state is higher than when the game state is a low probability state such as a normal state or a time-saving state.

In the first special chart display result judgment table, judgment values are assigned so that the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "small hit" and controlled to a small hit game state is the same regardless of the game state or the setting value. In the second special chart display result judgment table, judgment values are assigned so that the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "small hit" and controlled to a small hit game state is the same value different from that in the first special chart display result judgment table, regardless of the game state or the setting value. Note that the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "small hit" and controlled to a small hit game state may be different depending on the setting value. The probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "small hit" and controlled to a small hit game state may be the same regardless of the variable special chart.

In the first special chart display result judgment table and the second special chart display result judgment table, when the game state is normal or time-saving, the range of hit judgment values from 1020 to 1237 is set as the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for determining a jackpot regardless of the setting value. When the setting value is 1, 1020 to 1237 is assigned to "jackpot" and only the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for determining a jackpot is set, while when the setting value is 2 to 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value from 1238 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value.

In the first special chart display result judgment table and the second special chart display result judgment table, when the game state is a probability variable state, the hit judgment value range from 1020 to 1346 is set as the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for determining a jackpot regardless of the setting value. When the setting value is 1, 1020 to 1346 is assigned to "jackpot", and only the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for determining a jackpot is set, while when the setting value is 2 to 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value from 1346 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value.

In the display result judgment table for the first special chart, when the game state is normal or time-saving, the range of hit judgment values from 32767 to 33094 is set as the common numerical range of small hit judgment values for determining small hits regardless of the set value. The small hit judgment value is set to a numerical range that is different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value regardless of whether the set value is 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit judgment value from overlapping with the range of the big hit judgment value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result judgment table for the first special chart, when the game state is a special probability state, the range of 32767 to 33094 among the hit judgment values is set as a common numerical range of small hit judgment values for determining small hits regardless of the set value, just as when the game state is a normal state or a time-saving state. The small hit judgment value is set to a numerical range that is different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value regardless of whether the set value is 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit judgment value from overlapping with the range of the big hit judgment value that changes according to each set value.

In the second special chart display result judgment table, when the game state is normal or time-saving, the range of hit judgment values from 32767 to 33421 is set as the common numerical range of small hit judgment values for determining small hits regardless of the set value. The small hit judgment value is set to a numerical range that is different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value regardless of whether the set value is 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit judgment value from overlapping with the range of big hit judgment values that changes depending on each set value.

In the second special chart display result judgment table, when the game state is a special probability state, the range of 32767 to 33421 among the hit judgment values is set as a common numerical range of small hit judgment values for determining small hits regardless of the set value, just as when the game state is a normal state or a time-saving state. The small hit judgment value is set to a numerical range that is different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value regardless of whether the set value is 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit judgment value from overlapping with the range of the big hit judgment value that changes according to each set value.

The set values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be five or less or seven or more. The smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it may be for the player. The game characteristics may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the game characteristics are such that the probability of a jackpot in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability of ... On the other hand, the game may be of a type in which the rate at which the game ball passes through a predetermined switch during a jackpot game varies depending on the variable special chart (so-called V-type), and when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the probability of a jackpot is 1/320 and the probability of a small jackpot is 1/50, and the game may be of a type in which the game ball passes through a predetermined switch provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 during a high base (during time-saving control) (so-called one-type two-type mixed type). When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any of 1 to 3, the game is the same, but a setting may be provided in which the probability of a jackpot or small jackpot is higher than when these set values are any of 1 to 3, but the number of prize balls that can be obtained during a jackpot game is smaller (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any of 4 to 6). When the game is changed depending on the set value, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, when the setting value is 1 to 3, a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as a presentation switch (a switch for executing a predetermined presentation each time the game ball passes through a predetermined area), and when the setting value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch may be used as a game switch (a switch for controlling the game state to a special bonus state or a jackpot game state based on the game ball passing through the predetermined switch).

The jackpot type may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of judgment values in the jackpot type judgment table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The fluctuation pattern may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of judgment values in the fluctuation pattern judgment table. Alternatively, the fluctuation pattern may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The execution rate of normal reaches and super reaches may differ depending on the set value, so that the setting value may be suggested by the frequency at which normal reaches and super reaches are executed. Alternatively, the execution rate of normal reaches and super reaches may be common regardless of the set value. In addition, any setting suggestion performance may be possible at different rates depending on the set value.

(Main operations of the performance control board 12)
Next, the main operations of the performance control board 12 will be described. When the performance control board 12 receives a power supply voltage from a power supply board or the like, the performance control CPU 120 starts up and executes the performance control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 8. When the performance control main process shown in FIG. 8 starts, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and sets the registers of the CTC (counter/timer circuit) mounted on the performance control board 12. In addition, it executes an initial operation control process (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control is executed to perform the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control to drive the movable body 32 to return it to its initial position and control to perform a predetermined operation check.

Then, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on or not (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the on state every time a predetermined time (e.g., 2 milliseconds) elapses, for example based on the register setting of the CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the system waits.

In addition, on the performance control board 12 side, an interrupt occurs to receive a performance control command from the main board 11, in addition to a timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time has elapsed. This interrupt occurs, for example, when the performance control INT signal from the main board 11 becomes ON. When an interrupt occurs due to the performance control INT signal becoming ON, the performance control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt to be prohibited, but if a CPU that does not automatically become interrupt prohibited is used, it is desirable to issue an interrupt prohibition command (DI command). In response to an interrupt due to the performance control INT signal becoming ON, the performance control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process. In this command reception interrupt process, a performance control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, among the input ports included in the I/O 125. The performance control command taken in at this time is stored in a performance control command reception buffer provided in, for example, the RAM 122. The performance control CPU 120 then sets the interrupt to permitted and ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to an off state (step S74), and a command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, various presentation control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the presentation control command reception buffer are read, and then settings and controls corresponding to the read presentation control commands are performed. For example, the read presentation control command is stored in a specified area of the RAM 122, or a reception flag provided in the RAM 122 is turned on so that which presentation control command was received and the contents specified by the presentation control command can be confirmed in the presentation control process process, etc. In addition, if the presentation control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the performance control process is executed (step S76). In the performance control process, for example, control is performed to operate various performance devices, such as the display operation of the performance image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light-emitting elements such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LEDs, and the driving operation of the movable body 32. In addition, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. are made regarding the control contents of the performance operations using the various performance devices in accordance with the performance control commands, etc. transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process processing of step S76, a performance random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 side is updated by software. Then, the process returns to step S73. Before returning to step S73, other processes may be executed.

Figure 9 is a flow chart showing an example of the processing executed in step S76 of Figure 8 as the performance control process processing. In the performance control process processing shown in Figure 9, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a look-ahead preview setting process (step S161). In the look-ahead preview setting process, for example, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. for executing the look-ahead preview performance are made based on the performance control command at the time of the start winning transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, processing is executed to display the hold display based on the number of hold memories identified from the performance control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the performance control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S170 to S177 as described below, depending on the value of a performance process flag provided in, for example, RAM 122.

The variable display start waiting process of step S170 is a process that is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process includes a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. If it is determined that the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 should be started, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "1" and the variable display start waiting process ends.

The variable display start setting process of step S171 is a process executed when the value of the performance process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of the variable display of the decorative pattern, whether or not various performances such as reach performances and various advance notice performances are executed, and the mode and execution start timing are determined based on the display result and the change pattern specified by the performance control command. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute a performance) that reflects the determined result is set. After that, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. In response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5.

The variable display performance process of step S172 is a process executed when the performance process flag is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5, to drive the movable body 32, to output voice and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and to turn on/off/blink the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14, thereby executing various performance controls during the variable display of the decorative pattern. After performing such performance control, for example, in response to the reading of an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern from the performance control pattern, or the reception of a command specifying the stop display of the fixed decorative pattern from the main board 11, the fixed decorative pattern, which is the display result of the decorative pattern, is stopped. When the final decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "3" and the performance process during variable display ends.

The special winning waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the performance process flag is "3". In this special winning waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 judges whether or not a performance control command specifying the start of a big win game state or a small win game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when a performance control command specifying the start of a big win game state or a small win game state is received, if the command specifies the start of a big win game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "6". On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of a small win game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small win performance process. Also, when a command specifying the start of a big win game state or a small win game state is not received and the waiting time for receiving the command has elapsed, it is judged that the display result in the special game was "miss", and the value of the performance process flag is updated to the initial value "0". Once the value of the performance process flag is updated, the special drawing hit waiting process ends.

The small win presentation process of step S174 is a process executed when the presentation process flag value is "4". In this small win presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets, for example, a presentation control pattern corresponding to the presentation content in the small win game state, and executes various presentation controls in the small win game state based on the set content. In addition, in the small win presentation process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying that the small win game state is to be ended, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "5", which is a value corresponding to the small win end presentation, and the small win presentation process is ended.

The small win end presentation process in step S175 is executed when the presentation process flag value is "5". In this small win end presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of a small win game state, and executes various presentation controls at the end of the small win game state based on the settings. After that, the presentation process flag value is updated to the initial value "0", and the small win end presentation process ends.

The jackpot performance process of step S176 is executed when the performance process flag value is "6". In this jackpot performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot gaming state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot gaming state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot performance process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying that the jackpot gaming state is to end, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "7", which is a value corresponding to the ending performance process, and the jackpot performance process ends.

The ending presentation process of step S177 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "7". In this ending presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of a jackpot gaming state, and executes various presentation controls for the ending presentation at the end of the jackpot gaming state based on the settings. After that, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending presentation process is terminated.

(Modification of the basic explanation)
This invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described above is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes when a prize is won, but it may also be an enclosed type gaming machine that encloses gaming media and awards points when a prize is won.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol showing "- ") may be displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be achieved by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the pattern. Furthermore, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the display result may not include the symbol showing "- ").

In the above basic explanation, a pachinko gaming machine 1 was shown as the gaming machine, but the present invention can also be applied to slot machines (e.g., slot machines equipped with one or more of big bonus, regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.)) that can play a game in which medals are inserted and a predetermined bet amount is set, multiple types of symbols are rotated in response to the player's operation of the control lever, and when the symbols are stopped in response to the player's operation of the stop button, a specific combination of symbols is formed, and a predetermined number of medals is paid out to the player.

The programs and data for implementing the present invention are not limited to being distributed or provided to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by a removable recording medium, but may be distributed by being pre-installed in a storage device of the computer device or the like. Furthermore, the programs and data for implementing the present invention may be distributed by being downloaded from another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communications processing unit.

The game can be executed not only by inserting a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory, or by directly executing the game using the hardware resources of another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions of comparison of various percentages such as the execution percentage of a performance (such as "high", "low", "different", etc.) may include one being a percentage of "0%". For example, it also includes one being a percentage of "0%" and the other being a percentage of "100%" or a percentage less than "100%".

(Explanation regarding characteristic part 042AK)
Next, the gaming machine in the characteristic part 042AK of this embodiment will be described with reference to Figs. 10-1 to 10-21. The pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic part 042AK of this embodiment starts displaying the number of winning balls after a predetermined period when the attacker is open in the first round of play, and if the attacker is not won within the predetermined period, a predetermined display is made to indicate that the number of winning balls has not increased, and if the attacker is won within the predetermined period, a specific display different from the predetermined display is made. Below, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic part 042AK having such characteristics will be described. Note that the description of the same parts as those explained in the basic explanation above will be omitted.

Figure 10-1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1, and shows an example of the lighting when all of the game effect lamps 9, such as the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b (lower left lamp 9bL1, upper left lamp 9bL2, lower right lamp 9bR1, upper right lamp 9bR2), attacca lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d, speaker lamps 9eL, 9eR, display device lower lamp 9f (left display device lower lamp 9fL, right display device lower lamp 9fR), and general winning opening vicinity lamp 9g, are lit. In the feature part 042AK of this embodiment, which will be described in detail later, the game effect lamps 9, such as the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b (lower left lamp 9bL1, upper left lamp 9bL2, lower right lamp 9bR1, upper right lamp 9bR2), attacca lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d, speaker lamps 9eL, 9eR, display bottom lamp 9f (left display bottom lamp 9fL, right display bottom lamp 9fR), and general winning hole vicinity lamp 9g, are lit in sequence from the lower left to the lower right, suggesting to the player that he should hit to the right.

Figure 10-2 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S113 of Figure 6 as the special symbol stop process. In the special symbol stop process shown in Figure 10-2, the CPU 103 first determines whether the jackpot flag is on or not (step 042AKS001). At this time, if the jackpot flag is on (step 042AKS001; Yes), a jackpot start presentation waiting time is set (step 042AKS002). For example, in the process of step 042AKS002, a timer initial value predetermined corresponding to the jackpot start presentation waiting time may be set in a game control process timer provided in RAM 102.

Following the processing of step 042AKS002, settings are made to send the winning start designation command from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 (step 042AKS003). For example, in the processing of step 042AKS003, setting data indicating the storage address in ROM 101 of the winning start designation command table prepared in advance for sending the winning start designation command may be stored in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. After that, the big win flag is cleared to the off state (step 042AKS004). Also, settings are made to end the probability change state and the time-saving state (step 042AKS005). For example, in step 042AKS005, a process of clearing the probability change flag and the time-saving flag to the off state, a process of clearing the special chart change count counter for counting the number of times the special chart game is executed in the probability change state and the time-saving state, and the like may be executed. Then, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "4", which corresponds to the pre-opening process of the large prize opening (step 042AKS006), and the special pattern stop process is terminated.

If the big win flag is off in step 042AKS001 (step 042AKS001; No), it is determined whether the small win flag is on or not (step 042AKS007). At this time, if the small win flag is on (step 042AKS007; No), the waiting time for the small win start presentation is set (step 042AKS008). For example, in the processing of step 042AKS008, a timer initial value that is predetermined corresponding to the waiting time for the small win start presentation may be set in the game control process timer.

Following the processing of step 042AKS008, similar to the processing of step 042AKS003, settings are made to send a win start designation command from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 (step 042AKS009). After that, the small win flag is cleared to the off state (step 042AKS010). Then, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "8", which is the value corresponding to the small win opening pre-processing (step 042AKS011).

Also, if the small hit flag is off in step 042AKS007 (step 042AKS007; No), the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "0", which is a value corresponding to the normal processing of the special pattern (step 042AKS012). After executing either the processing of step 042AKS011 or step 042AKS012, a judgment is made as to whether or not to end the special pattern state or the time-saving state (step 042AKS013). For example, in the processing of step 042AKS003, the value of the special pattern change count counter (special pattern change count value) is updated, for example, by subtracting or adding 1, and a judgment is made as to whether or not the updated special pattern change count value matches a predetermined special game state end judgment value. At this time, if it matches the special game state end judgment value, the special pattern state or the time-saving state may be ended and controlled to the normal state by clearing the special pattern state flag or the time-saving flag to the off state, etc. On the other hand, if it does not match the special game state end judgment value, the state of the special game state flag or time-saving flag is maintained, and the processing of step 042AKS013 is terminated. After such a judgment of the end of the special game state or time-saving state is executed, the special symbol stop processing is terminated. The end judgment based on the special symbol change count value may be performed only when the time-saving state is in effect, and the special game state may be continued until the next variable display result becomes a "jackpot." Alternatively, for example, numerical data indicating a random number value for judging the end of the special game state may be extracted from a random counter provided in RAM 102, and a judgment of whether or not to end the special game state may be made by referring to a table for deciding the end of the special game state previously stored in ROM 101 or the like.

Figure 10-3 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in step S114 of Figure 6 as a jackpot opening pre-processing. In the jackpot opening pre-processing shown in Figure 10-3, the CPU 103 first determines whether the jackpot start flag is on or not (step 042AKS021). Here, the jackpot start flag is set to the on state in response to the jackpot flag being on in the special pattern stop processing of step S113 shown in Figure 6. If the jackpot start flag is on in step 042AKS021 (step 042AKS021; Yes), it is determined whether the jackpot start performance is waiting (step 042AKS022). As an example, in the special pattern stop processing of step S113 shown in Figure 3, when the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "4", a timer initial value previously determined corresponding to the jackpot start performance waiting time is set in the game control process timer. In this case, in the processing of step S312, if the game control process timer value does not match a predetermined waiting time elapsed judgment value (such as "0"), it is determined that the jackpot start presentation is currently waiting, and if it does match, it is determined that the jackpot start presentation is not currently waiting.

If the jackpot start time performance is on standby in step 042AKS022 (step 042AKS022; Yes), the game control process timer value is updated, for example by subtracting 1 (step 042AKS023), and the jackpot opening pre-processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the jackpot start time performance is not on standby in step 042AKS022 (step 042AKS022; No), the jackpot start time flag is cleared (step 042AKS024), the large prize opening count counter is cleared (step 042AKS025), the jackpot type buffer value stored in RAM 102 is read (step 042AKS026), and the opening control pattern corresponding to the jackpot type buffer value is set. In the feature section 042AK of this embodiment, a common opening control pattern is set regardless of the type of jackpot, but for example, if there is a "sudden" jackpot type, it may be set to a different opening control pattern than the "probable" or "non-probable" jackpot types. Also, even if the jackpot type is "probable" or "non-probable", it may be set to a different opening control pattern depending on the jackpot type, for example, different opening control patterns may be set for the "probable" and "non-probable" jackpot types.

After executing the process of step 042AKS026, it is determined whether or not the game is waiting to open the big prize opening in the next round (waiting for the next opening) (step 042AKS027). As an example, in the process of step 042AKS027, it is determined whether or not the game control process timer value matches the next opening wait end judgment value, and if they do not match, it is determined that the game is waiting for the next opening, while if they match, it is determined that the game is not waiting for the next opening. If the game is waiting for the next opening in step 042AKS027 (step 042AKS027; Yes), proceed to step 042AKS023 to update the game control process timer value. Note that the game control process timer value updated in step 042AKS023 is the time set as the waiting time at the start of the big prize in step 042AKS002 shown in FIG. 10-2, or the time set as the interval time between each round in the post-big prize opening process in step S116 in FIG. 6.

If it is determined in step 042AKS027 that the machine is not waiting for the next opening (step 042AKS027; No), the machine performs settings to open the large prize opening in accordance with the set opening control pattern and the count value in the large prize opening number counter (step 042AKS028). As an example, in the processing of step 042AKS028, a timer initial value determined in advance in accordance with the large prize opening opening time is set in the game control process timer, and the large prize opening opening time, which is the upper limit of the time for which the large prize opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is in an open state, is set. In addition, the large prize opening door solenoid is set to an on state in order to open the large prize opening, for example, by starting to output a solenoid drive signal to a specified large prize opening door solenoid via a specified solenoid circuit.

At this time, for example, regardless of whether the count value of the special prize opening counter is between "1" and "15," the timer initial value corresponding to a special prize opening opening time of 29.5 seconds is set in the game control process timer.

Then, the CPU 103 performs settings to send a command to specify that the large prize opening is in progress to the performance control board 12 (step 042AKS029). After executing the processing of step 042AKS029, the large prize opening count value is updated by adding 1 (step 042AKS030), and the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5", which corresponds to the processing during the large prize opening (step 042AKS031), and the processing before the large prize opening is terminated.

Figure 10-4 is a flow chart showing an example of the processing executed in step S115 of Figure 6 as the jackpot opening processing. In the jackpot opening processing shown in Figure 10-4, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not a game ball has entered the jackpot opening (step 042AKS041), for example, by determining whether the count switch 23 has been turned on. If no game ball has entered the jackpot opening in step 042AKS041 (step 042AKS041; No), the process proceeds to step 042AKS044.

On the other hand, if a game ball enters the big prize opening in step 042AKS041 (step 042AKS041; Yes), the CPU 103 updates the winning ball count value by adding 1, and sets the main board 11 to send a winning designation command indicating that the game ball has entered the big prize opening to the performance control board 12 (step 042AKS042).The CPU 103 then determines whether the updated winning ball count value has reached a predetermined number (e.g., 10 balls) (step 042AKS043). If the winning number count value has not reached the predetermined number (step 042AKS043; No), the game control process timer value is updated by subtracting 1 (step 042AKS044), and then it is determined whether 29.5 seconds have passed since the large prize opening was opened (step 042AKS045), for example, depending on whether the game control process timer value matches the timer value corresponding to 29.5 seconds. At this time, if 29.5 seconds have not passed (step 042AKS045; No), the large prize opening process is terminated.

If it is determined in step 042AKS043 that the updated winning number count value has reached a predetermined number (step 042AKS043; Yes), or if it is determined in step 042AKS045 that 29.5 seconds have passed since the large prize opening was opened (step 042AKS043; Yes), the solenoid for the large prize opening door is set to an off state to close the large prize opening, for example by stopping the output of a solenoid drive signal to a specified large prize opening door solenoid via a specified solenoid circuit (step 042AKS046), and the winning number count value is cleared (step 042AKS047).

After executing the processing of step 042AKS047, settings are made to send a command to the performance control board 12 to specify the process to be performed after the large prize opening (step 042AKS048), and the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "6", which corresponds to the process to be performed after the large prize opening (step 042AKS049), and the process during the large prize opening is terminated.

In this way, the special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 10-2, the pre-jackpot opening process shown in FIG. 10-3, the jackpot opening process shown in FIG. 10-4 (including post-jackpot opening process and jackpot end process) are executed, and various performance control commands such as a win start command, a large prize opening open command, a prize winning command, and a large prize opening after opening command are set for transmission. Then, the command control process of step S27 in FIG. 5 is executed, and the set performance control commands are transmitted to the sub-side control board such as the performance control board 12, so that the performance control board 12 is aware of each timing such as the start of the jackpot, the opening (start of a round) and closing (end of a round) of the large prize opening, winning the large prize opening, and the end of the jackpot.

Figure 10-5 is a flow chart showing an example of various display processes performed in the jackpot performance process of step S176 in Figure 9. In the various display processes shown in Figure 10-5, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether or not a jackpot end command has been received (step 042AKS051). The jackpot end command is a command sent from the main board 11 when it is determined in the jackpot opening post-processing of step S116 in Figure 6 that the number of rounds in which the jackpot opening is open has reached the set upper limit number of times, and is a command to end the jackpot performance and execute the ending performance.

When it is determined that the winning end designation command has not been received (step 042AKS051; No), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the nth round (nth round predetermined period has elapsed) (step 042AKS052). Note that n is a variable indicating the number of rounds, and with an initial value of "1", it is incremented by one in the processing of step 042AKS066 described later, and is cleared to "1" in step 042AKS068. The predetermined period is 0.6 seconds, and is set as a timer value when the round play starts, and when the timer value becomes "0", it is determined that the predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the nth round. More specifically, in response to the large prize winning port being completely opened (detection that the large prize winning port door has moved to a position where it is completely open), a large prize winning port open designation command is transmitted from the main board 11 side, and the timer value starts counting for the predetermined period from the timing when the command is received.

In the characteristic part 042AK of this embodiment, as described below, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the first round of round play, the winning number display, which is a display of the number of balls won, and the round display, which shows the number of rounds, are performed. On the performance control board 12 side, during the period from the big win to the end of the game (the period from the fanfare to the ending), the process of adding 15 to the winning number is continuously performed each time a winning command indicating that a game ball has entered the big winning port is received. On the performance control board 12 side, when the winning command is received, a series of processes must first be performed, which are to analyze the command, add the winning number, and display the added winning number, and a predetermined period of time is required from the winning to the display. Therefore, if the predetermined period is too short, the series of processes may not be completed in time for winnings from the start of the first round of round play until the predetermined period has elapsed, and the process of displaying "0000" as the winning number display may not be able to keep up with the winning number display, and "0015" may not be displayed even if the winning number has been won ("0000" is displayed and then "0015", which gives the player a sense of incongruity). Therefore, in the characteristic part 042AK of this embodiment, a predetermined period of 0.6 seconds is set, and if a game ball that is present at the top of the large winning port at the time of opening wins a prize from the opening to the display of the number of rounds, a period is secured in which "0015" is displayed directly without "0000" being displayed as the winning number display. On the other hand, in the characteristic part 042AK of this embodiment, the predetermined period is set to 0.6 seconds, which is the same as the firing interval when consecutively fired, and even if the period from firing to winning the large winning port is taken into consideration, the time interval required for consecutively fired game balls to win the large winning port is the firing interval. Therefore, the number of winning balls that enter the large prize winning opening from the time the winning number display is started until the winning number display is started will be one. Therefore, by increasing the number of winning balls before the winning number display or the number of rounds display is started, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the winning number display is increased at the timing when the round number display starts, causing a sense of discomfort to the player. Note that, in the example shown, the predetermined period in the characteristic section 042AK of this embodiment is 0.6 seconds, which is the same as the firing interval, but the predetermined period is not limited to 0.6 seconds and may be changed as appropriate.

If it is determined that a predetermined period of time has not elapsed since the start of the nth round (step 042AKS052; No), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether n=1, i.e., whether it is the first round (step 042AKS053). n is a variable indicating the number of rounds, and is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122. As described above, the initial value is "1", and is incremented by one in the processing of step 042AKS066, and is cleared to "1" in step 042AKS068. In the processing of step 042AKS053, the value of n is checked to determine whether n=1.

If it is determined that n = 1 (step 042AKS053; Yes), the presentation control CPU 120 performs a right-hit presentation that suggests to the player that he should hit the right, and controls the operation of a fanfare presentation that suggests that the jackpot game state has been reached (step 042AKS054). On the other hand, if it is determined that n ≠ 1 (step 042AKS053; No), the presentation control CPU 120 displays the round number corresponding to the n-1R and the number of wins, and controls the operation of the jackpot presentation for that n-1R (step 042AKS055). In the processing of step 042AKS055, for example, if n = 2, the round display indicating that it is the first round and the number of wins are displayed, and the operation of the jackpot presentation corresponding to the first round is controlled. In the processing of step 042AKS055, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5 as a jackpot performance, the game effect lamp 9 may be illuminated in a pattern corresponding to the jackpot performance, and predetermined music or sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R. The illumination pattern of the game effect lamp 9 during the jackpot performance may be preset.

After executing the processing of step 042AKS054 or step 042AKS055, the presentation control CPU 120 judges whether or not a winning designation command has been received, i.e., whether or not the game ball has entered the large winning port (step 042AKS056). Note that the processing of step 042AKS056 judges whether or not a winning has occurred from the start of the nth round up to a predetermined period of time. If a winning designation command has not been received (step 042AKS056; No), the presentation control CPU 120 simply ends the various display processes.

When a winning command is received, that is, when a winning is entered into the big winning slot within a predetermined period from the start of the nth round (step 042AKS056; Yes), the CPU 120 for controlling the performance adds "15" to the count value of the number of winning balls (step 042AKS057). The count value of the number of winning balls is pre-stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 with the initial value set to "0", and is added by the processing of step 042AKS057 and the processing of step 042AKS063 described later. The number of winning balls is counted continuously during the so-called consecutive wins, and is cleared to "0" at the timing when the time-saving control ends without the variable display result becoming a "jackpot", that is, at the timing when the consecutive wins end. After executing the processing of step 042AKS057, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance lights up the attacca lamp 9c and outputs a winning sound corresponding to the winning (step 042AKS058). In addition, the illumination of the attacca lamp 9c in the processing of step 042AKS058 (similar to step 042AKS064) is performed in a manner (a manner in which a winning is notified) that is greater than the number of illuminations per unit time of the game effect lamps 9 other than the attacca lamp 9c that is illuminated during the performance during a big win. Therefore, it is easier to visually recognize that the game ball has entered the big winning hole, and interest in the game can be improved. In addition, the illumination of the attacca lamp 9c may also be performed in a manner that the number of illuminations per unit time during the winning hole is greater than that during the performance during a big win. In addition, when a game ball enters the big winning hole, the attacca lamp 9c is illuminated and a winning sound is output regardless of whether the winning occurs within a predetermined period. Therefore, it is easier to recognize that the game ball has entered the big winning hole, and interest in the game can be improved.

After executing the processing of step 042AKS058, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance judges whether n=1, i.e., whether it is the first round (1R), as in step 042AKS053 (step 042AKS059). If n=1, i.e., if it is the first round (step 042AKS059; Yes), the various display processes are terminated. On the other hand, if n≠1, i.e., if it is not the first round (step 042AKS059; No), the count value of the number of balls won added in step 042AKS057 is displayed (the number of balls won is displayed), the number of balls won is updated and displayed (step 042AKS060), and the various display processes are terminated. In addition, in the characteristic part 042AK of this embodiment, when updating the number of balls won in the process of step 042AKS060, the count value of the number of balls won added in step 042AKS057 is not displayed as is, but rather a count-up display (announcement display of an increase in the number of balls won) is displayed as shown in FIG. 10-12 (a-23) before the number of balls won is displayed. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the number of balls won is increasing, which can increase the player's interest in the game.

If it is determined in step 042AKS052 of FIG. 10-5 that a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the nth round (step 042AKS052; Yes), the presentation control CPU 120 displays the number of rounds and the number of wins corresponding to the nth round, and controls the operation of the presentation during the jackpot of that nth round (step 042AKS061). If n=1, i.e., if it is the first round, the number of rounds and the number of wins are displayed for the first time in step 042AKS061. In this case, if there is a win before the predetermined period has elapsed, the number of wins is updated and displayed in step 042AKS061. Specifically, if a game ball enters the large prize opening before the specified period has elapsed, the number of winnings is increased by "15" in step 042AKS057, so in step 042AKS061, a count-up display (announcement display indicating an increase in the number of winnings) is displayed as shown in Figure 10-11 (a-20), and then, as shown in Figure 10-11 (a-21), a winning number display (as a specific display) (display of "0015") other than the specified display indicating that the number of winnings has not increased in this jackpot (if the jackpot is in a winning streak, a display of "15" added to the number of winnings from the previous jackpot can be displayed after the count-up). On the other hand, if no game ball has entered the big winning hole before the predetermined period has elapsed, the number of winnings remains "0" and the number of winnings has not increased in the current big win, so as shown in FIG. 10-11 (a-22), a winning number display (display of "0000") indicating that the number of winnings has not increased is performed as a predetermined display (if the game is in a streak, the number of winnings at the previous big win may be displayed as is). In addition to "0000", the winning number display (predetermined display) indicating that the number of winnings has not increased may be displayed as a non-numeric display, such as "---" or "not increased". In addition, in step 042AKS061, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5 as a big win performance, and the game effect lamp 9 may be illuminated in a pattern corresponding to the big win performance, and a performance may be performed in which a predetermined song or sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. The light-emitting pattern of the game effect lamp 9 during the big win performance may be set in advance. In this way, during the specified period after the big prize opening is opened, i.e., when the winning number display is not being performed, the attacca lamp 9c only lights up when the game ball enters the big prize opening. However, when the winning number display is being performed after the specified period has elapsed, the performance effect lamp 9 provided on the multi-game machine frame 3 and the performance effect lamp 9 provided on the game board 2 are alternately lit, and the performance effect lamp 9 is illuminated more than during the specified period. Therefore, since a specific display is performed when a prize is won within the specified period, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game without giving the player a sense of anxiety, and it is possible to enhance the performance after the winning number display after the specified period, thereby improving the interest in the game. In addition, since the performance effect lamp 9 is illuminated at the same timing as the execution timing of the big prize performance, the performance can be enhanced all at once at the timing when the big prize performance is executed, thereby improving the interest in the game.

After executing the process of step 042AKS061, the CPU 120 for controlling the presentation judges whether or not it has received a winning command, i.e., whether or not a game ball has entered the large winning slot (step 042AKS062). If it has received a winning command, i.e., if there has been a winning in the large winning slot (step 042AKS062; Yes), the CPU 120 for controlling the presentation adds "15" to the count value of the number of balls won (step 042AKS063), lights up the Attacker Trump 9c, outputs a winning sound corresponding to the winning, and performs a count-up display (notification display of an increase in the number of winnings) and then performs a winning number update display that displays the number of winnings (step 042AKS064).

After executing the processing of step 042AKS064, or if the winning designation command has not been received in step 042AKS062 (step 042AKS062; No), the performance control CPU 120 judges whether the next round after the nth round, the nth+1th round, has started (step 042AKS065). In step 042AKS065, for example, it may be judged by whether the large prize opening designation command indicating the start of the nth+1th round has been received from the main board 11. If the nth+1th round has not started, that is, if the large prize opening designation command has not been received and it remains in the nth round (step 042AKS065; No), the performance control CPU 120 ends various display processes as they are. On the other hand, when the n+1R has started, that is, when a command indicating the start of the n+1R has been received (step 042AKS065; Yes), n is incremented by "1" (step 042AKS066) and various display processes are terminated. For example, when n=1, that is, the first round, n=2 in step 042AKS066. Note that even though n=2 and it is the second round, until a predetermined period has elapsed, steps 042AKS052 and 053 are judged as No, and in step 042AKS055, a round display corresponding to the first round, which is the n-1R, is performed, and after the predetermined period has elapsed, a round display corresponding to the second round, which is the nR, is performed (after step 042AKS052 is judged as Yes, it is displayed in the processing of step 042AKS061).

If it is determined in step 042AKS051 that a win end command has been received (step 042AKS051; Yes), the presentation control CPU 120 sets the end of the jackpot presentation corresponding to the round in order to perform an ending presentation (step 042AKS067), clears n to 1 (step 042AKS068), and ends various display processes.

Next, the display timing and presentation operation examples of the round number display and the number of wins display will be specifically explained with reference to Figs. 10-6 to 10-14. Note that the illustrated example shows the case of the so-called first win (first big win), not during a consecutive win.

Figure 10-6 is a timing chart showing the timing of opening the big prize opening and the timing of various displays. Figures 10-7 to 10-14 are diagrams showing examples of the performance operation display on the image display device 5, the open/closed state of the big prize opening, and the lighting status of various lamps. As shown in Figures 10-6 and 10-7 (a-1), when the combination of decorative patterns that constitute a big prize is displayed in a stopped state, the big prize game state is entered. At this stage, as shown in Figure 10-7 (b-1), the big prize opening is closed. In addition, in order to inform the player that a big prize has been won, various performance effect lamps 9 such as the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d, speaker lamps 9eL and 9eR, display device lower lamp 9f, and general prize opening vicinity lamp 9g are lit as shown in Figure 10-7 (c-1). In the illustrated example, the upper row is the performance effect lamp 9 provided on the gaming machine frame 3, and the lower row is the performance effect lamp 9 provided on the gaming board 2.

When a jackpot is hit, as shown in FIG. 10-6, a right-hit effect and a fanfare effect are performed to inform the player that he or she should hit the right until the end of the specified period of the first round (step 042AKS054 in FIG. 10-5). Note that the period from the jackpot to the start of the first round shown in FIG. 10-6 is sufficiently longer than the specified period. Specifically, first, as shown in FIG. 10-7(a-2), a fanfare effect image is displayed on the image display device 5, and at the same time, as shown in FIG. 10-7(c-2), all the effect lamps 9 are turned off. Then, the effect lamps 9 are turned on in the order of the lower left, upper left, center, upper right, and lower right, and a right-hit effect is performed in which "right hit" is displayed in large on the image display device. Note that the small right-hit display displayed in the upper right part of the image display device 5 shown in FIG. 10-7(a-2) may be continuously displayed during the jackpot game state.

Specifically, in the right-hit performance, as shown in Fig. 10-7 (a-3) to Fig. 10-10 (a-19), the image display device 5 continues to display "right hit" superimposed on the fanfare image. Therefore, the following will explain the order in which the performance effect lamps 9 light up. When the right-hit performance starts, as shown in Fig. 10-7 (c-3), the general winning entrance vicinity lamp 9g located at the lower left of the play area lights up first, and then the lower left lamp 9bL1, which is the frame lamp 9 in the lower left part, lights up as shown in Fig. 10-7 (c-4). Next, as shown in Fig. 10-7 (c-5), the left display device lower lamp 9fL of the display device lower lamps 9f located at the lower position of the image display device 5 on the play board 2 lights up, and then the upper left lamp 9bL2, which is the frame lamp 9 in the upper left part, lights up as shown in Fig. 10-7 (c-6), and the speaker lamp 9eL corresponding to the speaker 8L part lights up as shown in Fig. 10-8 (c-7). In this way, the performance effect lamps 9 light up in order from the lower left to the upper left of the pachinko gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG. 10-8(b-7), the large prize opening is closed, so the launched game medium will not enter the large prize opening at this stage. The example shown in FIG. 10-8(b-7) shows the launched game ball passing through the second path above the large prize opening door and being guided to the discharge path.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (c-8), the movable body lamp 9d corresponding to the movable body 32 located in the upper center of the game board 2 lights up, and as shown in FIG. 10-8 (c-9), the main lamp 9 located above the image display device 5 in the game machine frame 3 lights up, causing the performance effect lamp 9 located in the upper center of the pachinko game machine 1 to light up.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (c-10), the speaker lamp 9eR corresponding to the speaker 8R lights up, and then, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (c-11), the upper right lamp 9bR2, which is the frame lamp 9 in the upper right part, lights up, and as shown in FIG. 10-8 (c-12), the right display device lower lamp 9fR, one of the display device lower lamps 9f provided below the image display device 5 on the game board 2, lights up. Next, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (c-13), the lower right lamp 9bR1, which is the frame lamp 9 in the lower right part, lights up, and the attacca lamp 9c provided near the special variable winning ball device 7 lights up. In this way, the performance effect lamps 9 light up in order from the upper right side to the lower right side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. As a result, the performance effect lamps 9 light up in sequence from the lower left to the upper left, then the center, then the upper right to the lower right of the pachinko game machine 1, and the performance effect lamps 9 perform a right-hit performance that suggests to the player to hit right. In this example, both the performance effect lamps 9 on the game machine frame 3 and the performance effect lamps 9 on the game board 2 are used to suggest a right hit, but either one may be used. In addition, the performance effect lamps 9 on the game machine frame 3 may be lit only from the lower left to the center to the lower right, and the performance effect lamps 9 on the game board 2 may be lit only from the lower left to the center to the lower right, and both may be lit independently, simultaneously or with a time lag.

After the right-hit effect on the effect effect lamps 9 has ended, all effect effect lamps 9 are turned off as shown in FIG. 10-9 (c-15). Note that, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (a-15), the right-hit display on the image display device 5 continues (the right-hit effect itself is being executed).

Next, when the timing for opening the large prize opening comes as shown in FIG. 10-6, the first round starts, and the large prize opening is opened as shown in FIG. 10-10 (b-16). At this stage, the right-hit display on the image display device 5 continues as shown in FIG. 10-10 (a-16), and all the performance effect lamps 9 remain off as shown in FIG. 10-10 (c-16) until a predetermined period has elapsed (similar to FIG. 10-10 (a-19) and (c-19)). Even if all the performance effect lamps 9 are not turned off, any of the indicators such as luminosity, brightness, and illuminance may be lower than normal. In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-10 (b-16), even after the large prize opening is opened, the performance effect lamps 9 may be sequentially lit as shown in FIG. 10-7 (c-3) to FIG. 10-9 (c-13) until a predetermined period has elapsed to suggest a right hit. In this case, the lighting speed of each effect lamp may be faster than before the large prize opening is opened (the lighting period may be shortened and the transition speed may be faster). Also, if the effect lamps 9 are lit in sequence after the large prize opening is opened to suggest a right hit, after the last to light up, the attacca lamp 9c, is lit, it may be left lit as is, instead of being turned off, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (c-15). This makes it possible to make the player aware that the large prize opening has been opened.

When the large prize opening is completely opened as shown in FIG. 10-10(b-17), a count of 0.6 seconds is started as a predetermined period corresponding to the first round, and when the game ball enters the large prize opening as shown in FIG. 10-10(b-18), the game ball is detected by the count switch 23, and a winning designation command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. Note that even if a game ball (a game ball that has been hit quickly) is launched by a right-hit performance before the first round starts (before the large prize opening is opened), it can still win within the predetermined period corresponding to the first round if it is located above the large prize opening at the time the large prize opening is opened. On the side of the performance control board 12, the process of step 042AKS058 in FIG. 10-5 outputs a winning sound as shown in FIG. 10-10(b-18), and the attacca lamp 9c lights up in a manner to notify the player that a prize has been won as shown in FIG. 10-10(c-18). As described above, the attacca lamp 9c emits light in a manner that is greater than the number of times per unit time that the game effect lamps 9 other than the attacca lamp 9c emit light during the performance during a big win. In the example shown in FIG. 10-10(b-18), the launched game ball passes through the first path, which is the path toward the big winning hole, and is guided to the winning path in which the count switch 23 is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 is configured so that the time until the game ball present in the big winning hole door portion is detected by the count switch 23 is less than 0.6 seconds, which is a predetermined period. This increases the likelihood that a game ball present above the large prize opening will be detected by the count switch 23 within a specified period of time after the large prize opening is opened, preventing a decline in the player's interest in the game without causing anxiety to the player.

After the game ball enters the big prize slot as shown in FIG. 10-10 (b-18), or after time has passed without a prize from the state shown in FIG. 10-10 (b-17), and a predetermined period has passed as shown in FIG. 10-10 (a-19), (b-19), and (c-19), it is time to display the number of rounds corresponding to the first round and the big win performance, as well as to display the number of wins, as shown in FIG. 10-6, so the processing of step 042AKS061 in FIG. 10-5 is executed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-10 (b-18), if the game ball enters the big prize hole before the specified period has elapsed, the round number display of "1R" indicating that it is the first round is performed, and a count-up display is performed, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (a-20). At the same time as these displays, as a big win performance (first round performance), as shown in FIG. 10-11 (a-20), the display of the decorative symbols that constitute the big win, the display of "BOUNUS", and characters are displayed. Note that the decorative symbols that constitute the big win and the display of "BOUNUS" that are displayed as the big win performance (first round performance) are not shown (the same applies to FIG. 10-20 described later), but are displayed in a manner that suggests that the player should hit to the right, as shown in FIG. 10-21. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-21 (A-1), when a fanfare or right-hit effect is performed and a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the opening of the big prize opening, as shown in FIG. 10-21 (A-2), the "7" decorative symbol constituting the big win is displayed facing forward, and a star-shaped image is displayed above the "B" in the "BOUNUS" display, as a big win effect. Next, as shown in FIG. 10-21 (A-3), the "7" decorative symbol constituting the big win is tilted toward the right back, and a star-shaped image is moved to the top of the "O" in the "BOUNUS" display. Next, as shown in FIG. 10-21 (A-4), the "7" decorative symbol constituting the big win faces forward, and a star-shaped image is moved to the top of the "N" in the "BOUNUS" display. After that, as shown in FIG. 10-21 (A-5), the "7" symbol, which is a decorative symbol constituting the jackpot, tilts toward the left rear, and a star-shaped image moves to the top of the "U" in the "BOUNUS" display. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-21 (A-6), the "7" symbol, which is a decorative symbol constituting the jackpot, faces forward again, and a star-shaped image moves to the top of the "S" in the "BOUNUS" display, and the display returns to FIG. 10-21 (A-2). In this way, in the jackpot performance, the decorative symbol constituting the jackpot is moved toward the right rear, the front, and the left rear, and the star-shaped image is moved from the left character in the "BOUNUS" display to the right, suggesting to the player that he should hit to the right. The display of the movement of the decorative symbol constituting the jackpot and the shifting display of the star-shaped image are called effect displays, and effect displays also include, for example, a clockwise rotation of a specified image and a character gradually turning to the right. In other words, the effect display should be displayed in a manner that suggests a right hit. In this way, the effect display suggests that a right hit should be made, making it easier to recognize a right hit.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (c-20), in the big win performance, the performance effect lamp 9 lights up according to a preset lighting pattern according to the big win performance. In this example, it is assumed that a lighting pattern is set to alternately light up the performance effect lamp 9 provided on the gaming machine frame 3 and the performance effect lamp 9 provided on the gaming board 2. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (a-21), "0015" is displayed as the winning number display. In this way, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (c-16) to (c-19), the performance effect lamp 9 does not light up until the big win opening is opened and a predetermined period has passed, and as shown in FIG. 10-11 (c-20) and (c-22), the performance effect lamp 9 lights up after the winning number display after the predetermined period has passed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the player from quickly drawing and to promote the timing of firing.

On the other hand, if a certain period of time has passed without the game ball entering the big prize slot, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (a-22), the count-up display is not performed and "0000" is displayed as the number of wins. Note that the following are common regardless of whether or not a prize is won: the round number display "1R" is displayed to indicate one round, the decorative symbols that make up the big prize are displayed as a big prize performance (first round performance), "BOUNUS in progress" is displayed, and a character is displayed, and the performance effect lamp 9 lights up according to a preset light pattern according to the big prize performance.

Next, as time passes, as shown in FIG. 10-12 (b-23), when the tenth game ball enters the big prize opening in the first round, the upper limit period during which the big prize opening can be opened is reached. In addition, with this winning, the processing of step 042AKS064 shown in FIG. 10-5 is executed, a count-up display is performed as shown in FIG. 10-12 (a-23), and the number of winnings is displayed as "0150" as shown in FIG. 10-12 (a-24). In addition, with this winning, a winning sound is output as shown in FIG. 10-12 (b-23), and in addition to the lighting of the performance effect lamp 9 corresponding to the big win performance, the attacca lamp 9c is lit in a manner to notify the winning as shown in FIG. 10-12 (c-23). In addition, the upper limit period during which the big prize opening can be opened is a period that is sufficient to count from a predetermined period after 10 game balls have entered. Specifically, the upper limit period is 29.5 seconds after release, and 28.9 seconds even after the specified period has passed. Since the interval between successive shots is 0.6 seconds, this period is sufficient to allow 10 wins. Therefore, players can feel at ease knowing that there is enough time to win.

When the tenth game ball enters the big prize opening in the first round, this is the upper limit of the time period during which the big prize opening can be opened, and so the big prize opening is controlled to be closed as shown in FIG. 10-12 (b-24). After that, until the second round shown in FIG. 10-6 begins, the big prize opening is controlled to be completely closed as shown in FIG. 10-12 (b-25). Meanwhile, until the predetermined period of the second round has elapsed (until the predetermined period has elapsed since n=2), as shown in FIG. 10-12 (a-25), the round number display and big prize performance corresponding to the first round continue to be performed (the number of wins display is updated according to the wins), and the performance effect lamp 9 lights up in response to the big prize performance as shown in FIG. 10-12 (c-25).

In addition, when the tenth game ball enters the large prize opening in the first round and the upper limit period is reached, the large prize opening is controlled to be in a closed state. At this time, the so-called over-winning may occur, in which the eleventh game ball enters the large prize opening following the tenth game ball. Even in the case of the over-winning, the count-up display is performed as shown in FIG. 10-12 (a-23), and the winning number display of "0165" is displayed. In this case, the count-up display and winning number display corresponding to the over-winning are performed after the count-up display and winning number display corresponding to the tenth winning, but as shown in FIG. 10-12 (b-25), the count-up display and winning number display corresponding to the over-winning are completed within the period from when the large prize opening is completely closed to when it becomes open corresponding to the second round. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that an over-winning has occurred in the first round, which can increase the interest in the game. Furthermore, since the update of the winning number display in the opening corresponding to the first round does not overlap with the update of the winning number display in the opening corresponding to the second round, it is easy to determine which round the winning corresponds to. The winning sound corresponding to an over winning may be a sound (over winning sound) different from the normal winning sound. In this case, the over winning sound may be output when the count value exceeds the upper limit of "10". The attacca lamp 9c may also be illuminated in a manner corresponding to an over winning, different from the illumination in the normal winning mode.

Then, the timing comes for the large prize opening to be opened again in response to the second round, as shown in FIG. 10-6, and the large prize opening is controlled to be opened again, as shown in FIG. 10-13 (b-26). At this time, step 042AKS065 in FIG. 10-5 is judged as Yes, that is, a large prize opening open command indicating the start of the n+1th round is received, and the processing of 042AKS066 is executed, resulting in n=2. At this stage, the processing of step 042AKS055 in FIG. 10-5 is executed, so that the large prize opening performance and round number display corresponding to the first round are performed, as shown in FIG. 10-13 (a-26) and (c-26) (see also FIG. 10-6).

Next, when the big prize opening is completely open and the game ball enters the big prize opening as shown in FIG. 10-13 (b-27), unlike in the first round, in the processing of step 042AKS060 in FIG. 10-5, a count-up display is performed as shown in FIG. 10-13 (a-27), and the number of winning balls is displayed as "0165" as shown in FIG. 10-13 (a-28). In addition, in response to the winning, a winning sound is output as shown in FIG. 10-13 (b-27), and in addition to the lighting of the performance effect lamp 9 corresponding to the big win performance, the attacca lamp 9c is lit as shown in FIG. 10-13 (c-27). In this way, in rounds other than the first round, even if the winning occurs during a predetermined period, the number of winning balls is updated and displayed during the predetermined period. Then, when the predetermined period of the second round has elapsed, the process of step 042AKS061 in FIG. 10-5 is executed, so that, as shown in FIG. 10-14 (a-30), the round number display of "2R" indicating that it is the second round is performed, and the big win performance corresponding to the second round is executed. In this case, the number "1" in the round number display of "1R", which is the first round, is changed to "2". That is, "R" is continuously displayed from the first round. Also, the display of "1R" is continuously displayed until the predetermined period of the second round has elapsed. Also, in the characteristic part 042AK of this embodiment, an example is shown in which a common big win performance is executed regardless of the number of rounds (the same applies to the lighting control of the performance effect lamp 9), but the big win performance executed in each round may be different. The same applies to the lighting of the performance effect lamp 9. In this way, the big prize opening is opened before the round number display indicating the second round is displayed, so the game balls of the player who has been continuously shot from the first round can be placed in the big prize opening at an early stage. Therefore, in each round of a multiple round game, it is possible to increase the possibility of the game balls shot in succession being placed in the big prize opening that was opened earlier than the round display.

On the other hand, as shown in Fig. 10-13 (a-26), (b-26), and (c-26), the large prize opening is controlled to open in response to the second round, and as shown in Fig. 10-13 (a-29), (b-29), and (c-29), if a predetermined period of time has passed since the large prize opening was completely opened without a game ball winning, as shown in Fig. 10-13 (a-31), (b-31), and (c-31), the number of winnings won in the first round will continue to be displayed as is, as shown in Fig. 10-14 (a-31), (b-31), and (c-31). From then on, the same process is performed until the predetermined final round, and when it is determined that a winning end designation command has been received in step 042AKS051 of Fig. 10-5, a setting is made to end the large prize presentation corresponding to the round in order to perform the ending presentation. In this way, from the second round onwards, if no prize is won within the specified period, the number of balls won displayed in the previous round will continue to be displayed, whereas if a prize is won within the specified period, the number of balls won will be added to the number of balls won displayed in the previous round. Therefore, it is easy to recognize a prize in the large prize slot even in the second round onwards.

For example, in the final round, when the tenth game ball enters the large prize opening and the upper limit period is reached, the large prize opening is controlled to be closed, but in this case, the big win game state may end with the eleventh game ball stuck in the special variable prize ball device 7 (more specifically, between the large prize door and the glass door frame 3a) as shown in FIG. 10-15. In this case, the game ball will enter the large prize opening at the start of the first round in the next big win (when the large prize opening corresponding to the first round is opened), and the game ball will win during the specified period of the first round. In this case, too, the attacca lamp 9c is turned on in a manner to notify the player that a prize has been won, as shown in FIG. 10-10 (c-18), and after the specified period has elapsed, a count-up display is performed and then "0015" is displayed as the number of wins, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (a-20) and (a-21). In such a case, there is a possibility that the launched game ball will win again during the specified period (the second ball may win), and in that case, after the specified period has elapsed, as shown in Figures 10-11 (a-20) and (a-21), a count-up display is performed, and then the winning number display directly shows "0030" instead of "0000" or "0015". This can provide a sense of surprise to the player, and increase the interest in the game.

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 with characteristic part 042AK in this embodiment can achieve the following effects.

The presentation control CPU 120 displays the number of winnings in the processing of step 042AKS061 in FIG. 10-5 a predetermined period of time after the large prize opening is opened and the first round is started. If a game ball does not enter the large prize opening within the predetermined period of time after the first round is started, a predetermined display is displayed after the predetermined period indicating that the number of winnings has not increased, and if a game ball enters the large prize opening within the predetermined period of time after the first round is started, a specific display of the number of winnings different from the predetermined display is displayed after the predetermined period of time. This makes it possible to prevent a decline in the player's interest in the game by displaying a specific display if a prize is won within the predetermined period of time, without giving the player a sense of anxiety.

In addition, if a game ball enters the big prize slot within a predetermined period of time after the start of the first round, the presentation control CPU 120 will not display the number of balls won as the predetermined display of "0000", but will directly display the number of balls won as the specific display of "0015". This will prevent confusion for the player and a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, if a game ball enters the big prize slot within a predetermined period of time after the start of the first round, the presentation control CPU 120 displays a count-up display as a notification display that the number of prizes has increased, and then displays the number of prizes displayed as a special display: "0015." This makes it easier to recognize that a prize has been won and that the number of prizes is increasing.

The performance control CPU 120 also starts counting the timer value for a specified period from the timing when it receives a command to specify that the large prize opening is open, sent from the main board 11 in response to the large prize opening being opened, and displays the number of winnings after the specified period has elapsed. This allows the specified period to be counted appropriately, and a specific display to be made if a prize is won within the specified period, preventing a decline in the player's interest in the game without causing anxiety to the player.

In addition, by closing the large prize opening door, the pachinko game machine 1 guides the launched game ball through the second path above the large prize opening door to the discharge path, while by opening the large prize opening door, the launched game ball is guided through the first path to the large prize opening and detected by the count switch 23. The special variable prize ball device 7 is configured so that the time it takes for a game ball present in the large prize opening door portion to be detected by the count switch 23 is a predetermined period of 0.6 seconds or less. This increases the likelihood that a game ball present above the large prize opening will be detected by the count switch 23 within the predetermined period from the opening of the large prize opening, and prevents a decline in the player's interest in the game without causing anxiety to the player.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-6, the presentation control CPU 120 displays to the player that he should hit to the right by performing a right-hit presentation as shown in FIG. 10-7 (a-3) during the period from when the jackpot is hit until the jackpot opening is opened. This makes it easier to recognize the playing method and increases the player's interest in the game, as the playing area to be launched during the jackpot is suggested.

The open state of the large prize opening is when the large prize opening is completely open, that is, when the large prize opening door has moved to a position where it is completely open. In response to detecting that the large prize opening door has moved to a position where it is completely open, a large prize opening open command is sent from the main board 11. This counts the specified period from when the large prize opening is completely open, preventing a decline in the player's interest in the game without causing anxiety to the player.

In addition, even if a game ball (a game ball that has been thrown quickly) is released by performing a right-hand hit effect before the start of the first round (before the large prize opening is open), if it is above the large prize opening when the large prize opening is opened, it can win within a specified period corresponding to the first round, and if a prize is won within the specified period, the effect control CPU 120 will display the number of balls won as a special display after the specified period. This prevents game balls that have been thrown quickly from going to waste.

For example, in the final round, when the tenth game ball enters the large prize opening and the upper limit period is reached, the large prize opening is controlled to be closed, but in this case, as shown in FIG. 10-15, the jackpot game state may end with the eleventh game ball stuck in the special variable prize ball device 7 (more specifically, between the large prize door and the glass door frame 3a). In this case, the game ball will enter the large prize opening at the start of the first round in the next jackpot (when the large prize opening corresponding to the first round is opened), and the entry of game balls during the specified period of the first round occurs, and the performance control CPU 120 displays the number of winning balls as a specific display after the specified period has elapsed. This can prevent players from feeling dissatisfied when an irregular event occurs.

The presentation control CPU 120 can also execute a fanfare presentation to suggest that a jackpot game state has been reached during the time when the jackpot opening changes from a closed state to an open state. After the jackpot opening is opened and a specified period of time has passed, the number of rounds played can be displayed along with the number of wins, and a jackpot presentation corresponding to round play can be executed. This can add variety to the presentation and increase interest in the game.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-10(b-18), if a game ball enters the large prize opening during a specified period after the large prize opening is opened, the presentation control CPU 120 lights up the attacca lamp 9c as shown in FIG. 10-10(c-18). Also, as shown in FIG. 10-12(b-23), if a game ball enters the large prize opening outside the specified period, the presentation control CPU 120 lights up the attacca lamp 9c as shown in FIG. 10-12(c-23). This makes it possible to prevent a decline in the player's interest in the game without causing anxiety to the player, and makes it easier to visually confirm that a prize has been won within the specified period.

The performance control CPU 120 also causes the attacca lamp 9c in the processing of step 042AKS058 in FIG. 10-5 (similar to step 042AKS064) to light up in a manner (a manner in which a prize has been won) that is greater than the number of times per unit time that game effect lamps 9 other than the attacca lamp 9c that light up during a jackpot performance light up, for example. This makes it easier to visually confirm that the game ball has entered the jackpot opening, improving interest in the game.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-10 (b-18), if a game ball enters the large prize opening during a specified period after the large prize opening is opened, the presentation control CPU 120 outputs a winning sound corresponding to the winning. Also, as shown in FIG. 10-12 (b-23), if a game ball enters the large prize opening outside the specified period, the presentation control CPU 120 outputs a winning sound corresponding to the winning. This makes it easier to recognize that a game ball has entered the large prize opening, which can increase interest in the game.

In addition, for rounds after the first round, the presentation control CPU 120 displays the round number corresponding to the round in the processing of step 042AKS061 in FIG. 10-5 after a predetermined period of time has passed since the start of the round. This makes it possible to prevent a decline in the player's interest in the game without causing anxiety to the player, as a specific display is made if a prize is won within the predetermined period of time, and also increases the possibility of consecutively launched game balls winning a prize in a large prize slot that opens earlier than the round display in each round of multiple round play.

In addition, when a round of play from the second round onwards is being played, if the gaming medium does not enter the large prize opening within a specified period of time after the large prize opening is opened, the presentation control CPU 120 continues to display the number of balls won that was displayed in the previous round of play, as shown in FIG. 10-14 (a-31), while if the gaming medium enters the large prize opening within the specified period of time, the presentation control CPU 120 adds the number of balls won that were awarded in response to the winning to the number of balls displayed in the previous round of play, as shown in FIG. 10-14 (a-30). This makes it easier to recognize a winning entry into the large prize opening even in the second round onwards.

In addition, even if an over-winning occurs, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance displays the count-up display as shown in FIG. 10-12 (a-23) and displays the number of winnings of "0165". In this case, after the count-up display and the number of winnings display corresponding to the 10th winning, the count-up display and the number of winnings display corresponding to the over-winning are displayed next, but as shown in FIG. 10-12 (b-25), the count-up display and the number of winnings display corresponding to the over-winning are completed within the period from when the large winning opening is completely closed to when it is opened corresponding to the second round. This makes it easy to determine which opening the winning corresponds to, since the update of the number of winnings display at the time of one opening does not overlap with the update of the number of winnings display at the time of the next opening.

In addition, during a specified period after the large prize opening is opened, i.e., when the number of winning balls is not displayed, the presentation control CPU 120 only lights up the attacca lamp 9c when the game ball enters the large prize opening, as shown in FIG. 10-10 (c-18). However, when the number of winning balls is displayed after the specified period has elapsed, the presentation effect lamp 9 on the multi-game machine frame 3 and the presentation effect lamp 9 on the game board 2 are alternately lit, as shown in, for example, FIG. 10-11 (c-20) and (c-21), and the presentation effect lamp 9 is illuminated more than during the specified period. This makes it possible to prevent a decline in the player's interest in the game without giving the player a sense of anxiety, and to enhance the presentation after the number of winning balls is displayed after the specified period, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Also, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a right-hit performance and a fanfare performance before the start of the first round as shown in FIG. 10-6, and even after the big prize opening is opened, the performance effect lamps 9 may be sequentially lit to suggest a right hit as shown in FIG. 10-7 (c-3) to FIG. 10-9 (c-13) until a predetermined period has elapsed, and after the predetermined period has elapsed, the performance effect lamps 9 provided on the multi-game machine frame 3 and the performance effect lamps 9 provided on the game board 2 are alternately lit as shown in, for example, FIG. 10-11 (c-20) and (c-21). This allows the performance effect lamps 9 to be used to suggest a right hit. Also, when the performance effect lamps 9 are sequentially lit after the big prize opening is opened to suggest a right hit, after the last lit attakka lamp 9c is lit, it may be left lit as it is without being turned off as shown in FIG. 10-9 (c-15), and this allows the player to be aware that the big prize opening has been opened.

In addition, the maximum period for which the big prize opening can be opened is set to a period long enough for 10 game balls to win, even if it is counted from the end of a certain period. This gives players a sense of security because they are guaranteed a sufficient amount of time for a prize to be won.

In addition, the presentation control CPU 120 does not light up the presentation effect lamp 9 as shown in Fig. 10-9 (c-16) to (c-19) until the large prize opening is opened and a predetermined period of time has elapsed, i.e., until the number of winnings is displayed, but instead lights up the presentation effect lamp 9 after the number of winnings after the predetermined period of time has elapsed, as shown in Fig. 10-11 (c-20) and (c-22). This makes it possible to restrain the player from firing too quickly and to encourage the timing of firing.

The presentation control CPU 120 also illuminates the presentation effect lamp 9 at the same timing as the execution of the jackpot presentation after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, as shown in Fig. 10-11 (c-20) and (c-22). This allows the presentation to be instantly livened up at the timing when the jackpot presentation is executed, thereby increasing interest in the game.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-21, when the number of winning symbols is displayed, the CPU 120 for controlling the presentation displays a transitional effect display of decorative symbols and star-shaped images that constitute a jackpot in a manner that suggests hitting to the right. This makes it possible for the player to easily recognize that they should hit to the right, as the effect display suggests that they should hit to the right.

(Modification of characteristic part 042AK)
In the above embodiment, as shown in Fig. 10-9 (a-15), (b-15), and (c-15), after the right-hit effect by the effect effect lamps 9, which indicate that the player should hit the right by lighting up the effect effect lamps 9 in sequence, is completed, all the effect effect lamps 9 are turned off, but this is only one example. For example, after the state shown in Fig. 10-9 (a-15), (b-15), and (c-15), the state shown in Fig. 10-16 (a-16A), (b-16A), and (c-16A) may be transitioned to, and at the timing when the large prize winning hole is opened (Fig. 10-16 (b-16A)), the attacca lamp 9c provided in the vicinity of the special variable winning ball device 7 may be turned on as shown in Fig. 10-16 (c-16A). According to this, it is possible to easily make the player visually recognize that the large prize winning hole is opened. The attacca lamp 9c may be continuously turned on until a predetermined period has elapsed or during the opening period.

In the above embodiment, when updating the round display from the first round to the second round, the number "1" in the round number display of "1R" which is the first round is changed to "2", and "R" is continuously displayed from the first round and "1R" is continuously displayed until the specified period of the second round has elapsed. However, this is only an example. For example, as shown in FIG. 10-17, when the open state corresponding to the first round ends, that is, when the big prize winning port becomes closed, the "1" in the "1R" display may be erased and only "R" may be displayed. Then, when the specified period of the second round has elapsed, "2" may be displayed, and the round display of "2R" indicating the second round may be displayed. The same applies to the second round and onwards. This allows the end of each round to be visually confirmed, and adds variety to the game.

In addition, in the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the maximum number of winning balls during the period in which the large winning port can be opened is 10 (the maximum number of winning balls is 10), but for example, the maximum number of winning balls may be set to 1, and if 2 balls are won during the specified period before the number of rounds is displayed, it may be considered an over winning ball. In this case, a sound different from the normal winning sound may be output as the winning sound for an over winning ball during the specified period, and the attacca lamp 9c may be illuminated in a manner indicating the occurrence of an over winning ball.

In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the winning number display counted the number of game balls entering the jackpot, but in addition to this, winnings into the general winning port 10 during a jackpot may also be counted. Note that since right-handed shots are performed during a jackpot, the general winning port into which the winning ball is entered is the general winning port 10 located above the variable winning ball device 6B. Figure 10-18 is a flowchart showing an example of various display processes in which winnings into the general winning port 10 during a jackpot are also counted. Note that explanations of parts similar to those in Figure 10-5 will be omitted.

In the various display processes shown in FIG. 10-18, if it is determined in step 042AKS056 that a winning designation command has not been received (step 042AKS056; No), it is further determined whether or not a general winning designation command indicating that a game ball has won the general winning port 10 has been received (step 042AKS081). Then, if a general winning designation command has been received, i.e., if there has been a winning at the general winning port 10 (step 042AKS081; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 adds "3" to the count value of the number of balls won (step 042AKS082). After executing the process of step 042AKS082, or if a general winning designation command has not been received, i.e., there has been no winning at the general winning port 10 (step 042AKS081; No), the process proceeds to step 042AKS059. In addition, when a ball wins at the general winning port 10, a winning sound (a winning sound different from the winning sound when a ball wins at the large winning port) may be output to indicate that the game ball has won at the general winning port 10.

In addition, in the various display processes shown in FIG. 10-18, if it is determined in step 042AKS062 that a winning designation command has not been received (step 042AKS062; No), it is further determined whether or not a general winning designation command indicating that a game ball has won into the general winning port 10 has been received (step 042AKS083). Then, if a general winning designation command has been received, i.e., if there has been a winning into the general winning port 10 (step 042AKS083; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 adds "3" to the count value of the number of balls won (step 042AKS083) and updates and displays the number of balls won (step 042AKS085). Even when updating and displaying the number of balls won in step 042AKS085, a count-up display (announcement display indicating that the number of balls won is increasing) is performed before the number of balls won is displayed. After executing the processing of step 042AKS085, or if the general winning designation command has not been received, i.e., if there has been no winning in the general winning port 10 (step 042AKS083; No), the processing proceeds to step 042AKS065. In addition, when a game ball wins in the general winning port 10, a winning sound (a winning sound different from the winning sound when a game ball wins in the large winning port) may be output to indicate that the game ball has won in the general winning port 10.

Next, an example of the performance operation when the winning of the general winning opening 10 is also counted will be described with reference to Fig. 10-19 and Fig. 10-20. Fig. 10-19 and Fig. 10-20 are diagrams showing an example of the performance operation display on the image display device 5, the open/closed state of the large winning opening, and the lighting state of various lamps. (a-16), (b-16), (c-16), (a-17), (b-17), and (c-17) shown in Fig. 10-19 are the same as (a-16), (b-16), (c-16), (a-17), (b-17), and (c-17) shown in Fig. 10-10. As shown in the figure, when the large winning opening is in the open state, a count of 0.6 seconds as a predetermined period is started. When a game ball enters the general winning opening 10, the state transitions to the state shown in Fig. 10-19 (a-18A), (b-18A), and (c-18A). Then, after the game ball has entered the general prize opening 10 as shown in FIG. 10-19 (b-18A), or after time has passed from the state shown in FIG. 10-19 (b-17) without the game ball entering either the large prize opening or the general prize opening 10, and a predetermined period of time has passed as shown in FIG. 10-19 (a-19A), (b-19A) and (c-19A), if the game ball has entered the general prize opening 10, the state transitions to that shown in FIG. 10-20 (a-20A), (b-20A) and (c-20A), and as shown in FIG. 10-20 (a-20A), the round number "1R" is displayed to indicate that this is the first round, and a count-up display is also displayed. At the same time as these displays, the jackpot performance (first round performance) is displayed as shown in FIG. 10-20 (a-20A), which includes the decorative symbols that make up the jackpot, the message "BOUNUS in progress," and characters. During the jackpot performance, as shown in FIG. 10-20 (c-20A), the performance effect lamp 9 lights up according to a preset lighting pattern for the jackpot performance. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-20 (a-21A), "0003" is displayed as the number of wins.

On the other hand, if a predetermined period of time has passed without a game ball winning the general winning slot 10, as shown in FIG. 10-20 (a-22A), no count-up display is performed, and "0000" is displayed as the winning number display. Note that the following are common regardless of whether or not a prize is won: the round number display "1R" is performed to indicate that it is one round, the decorative symbols that make up the jackpot are displayed, "BOUNUS in progress" is displayed, and characters are displayed as part of the jackpot performance (first round performance), and the performance effect lamp 9 lights up according to a preset lighting pattern according to the jackpot performance.

In this way, even if a game ball enters the general winning port 10 during the specified period after the big winning port is opened at the start of the first round, the number of winning balls displayed will be "0003" corresponding to the winning ball entering the general winning port 10 after the specified period has elapsed, as in the above embodiment. Also, if no game balls enter the general winning port 10 during the specified period, the specified display "0000" is displayed indicating that no prize balls have been awarded. Therefore, the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning balls that have entered the general winning port 10 during the specified period is also displayed, preventing players from feeling anxious.

(Explanation of Means Related to Characteristic Part 042AK)
(1) The gaming machine according to the characteristic part 042AK is a gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.) that can be controlled to an advantageous state for a player, and includes a display means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120 that instructs the display content on the image display device 5, etc.), a variable winning means (e.g., a special variable winning ball device 7, etc.) that can change the gaming medium to a first state in which it is easy to win a prize and a second state in which it is difficult or impossible for the gaming medium to win a prize, and a control means (e.g., a CPU 103 that performs a round game) that can execute a round game multiple times when the variable winning means is controlled to the advantageous state, in which the variable winning means is changed from the second state to the first state and then changed to the second state, and the display means is capable of displaying an amount of the gaming value awarded as a result of the gaming medium winning the variable winning means (e.g., a display of the number of winnings, etc.). and the like), when the first of the multiple rounds of play is played, the award amount display is displayed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the variable winning means has changed from the second state to the first state (for example, in the first round, the winning number display is displayed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the large winning port has been opened), and if the gaming medium does not win a prize in the variable winning means within the predetermined period of time, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the gaming value has not been awarded is displayed as the award amount display after the predetermined period of time has elapsed (for example, "0000" is displayed as the winning number display), and if the gaming medium wins a prize in the variable winning means within the predetermined period of time, a specific display different from the predetermined display is displayed as the award amount display after the predetermined period of time has elapsed (for example, "0015" is displayed as the winning number display).

With this configuration, if a win occurs within a specified period, a specific display is displayed, preventing a decline in the player's interest in the game without causing anxiety to the player.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, the display means may be configured to display the specific display without displaying the predetermined display when the gaming medium wins the variable winning means within the predetermined period (for example, displaying "0015" instead of "0000").

This configuration can prevent players from becoming confused and losing interest in the game.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above, when a gaming medium wins in the variable winning means within the specified period, the display means may display a count-up indication indicating that the gaming value has been awarded, and then display the specific indication according to the awarded gaming value (for example, displaying a count-up indication as a notification indication that the number of winnings is increasing, and then displaying "0015").

This configuration makes it easier for players to recognize that they have won a prize and the number of prizes they have won increases.

(4) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (3) above, the display means may start displaying the award amount display after the predetermined period of time has elapsed after receiving a command indicating that the variable winning means has changed from the second state to the first state (for example, by starting counting the timer value for a predetermined period of time from the timing of receiving a command to specify that the large winning port is open, transmitted from the main board 11).

With this configuration, the specified period is counted appropriately, and if a win occurs within the specified period, a specific display is made, preventing a decline in the player's interest in the game without causing anxiety to the player.

(5) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (4) above, the variable winning means may include a path forming means including a first path that leads the gaming medium to the winning path when the first state is reached (for example, by opening the large prize opening door, the launched gaming ball is led through the first path to the large prize opening), and a second path that leads the gaming medium to the discharge path when the second state is reached (for example, by closing the large prize opening door, the launched gaming ball is led through the second path above the large prize opening door to the discharge path), and a detection means (for example, a count switch 23, etc.) that is formed within the winning path and detects the winning of the gaming medium, and the time that the gaming medium travels from the path forming means to the detection means may be within the specified period (for example, the special variable winning ball device 7 is configured so that the time until the gaming ball present at the large prize opening door is detected by the count switch 23 is less than the specified period of 0.6 seconds).

This configuration increases the likelihood that a gaming ball present above the large prize opening will be detected within a specified period of time after the large prize opening is opened, preventing a decline in the player's interest in the game without causing anxiety to the player.

(6) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (5) above, after the machine is controlled to the advantageous state and before the variable winning means enters the first state, an operation prompting display may be displayed to encourage the player to perform an operation (for example, during the period from when a jackpot is hit until the jackpot opening is opened, a right-hit display may be displayed to inform the player that he or she should hit the right, as shown in FIG. 10-7(a-3)).

This configuration suggests the operations that should be performed while in an advantageous state, making it easier to understand how to play and increasing interest in the game.

(7) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (6) above, the first state may be a state in which the variable prize door included in the variable prize means is completely open (for example, the open state of the large prize opening is a state in which the large prize opening is completely open, that is, the large prize opening door has moved to a position in which it is completely open, and a large prize opening open command is sent from the main board 11 in response to detecting that the large prize opening door has moved to a position in which it is completely open).

With this configuration, the specified period is counted from the time the big prize opening is fully open, preventing a decline in the player's interest in the game without causing anxiety to the player.

(8) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (7) above, if the gaming medium launched by the operation prompting display before the start of the first round of play in the advantageous state wins in the variable winning means, the specific display may be displayed after the predetermined period has elapsed (for example, a gaming ball launched by a right-hit performance before the start of the first round may win at the timing when the large winning opening is opened, and if the gaming medium wins within the predetermined period, the number of winnings may be displayed as a specific display after the predetermined period).

This configuration can prevent game media that are released before a round of play begins from going to waste.

(9) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (8) above, when the advantageous state ends in a state where a gaming medium is sandwiched when the variable winning means changes from the first state to the second state in the last round of the multiple rounds in the advantageous state (for example, the big win game state ends with the eleventh gaming ball sandwiched between the special variable winning ball device 7 (more specifically, between the big win door and the glass door frame 3a) as shown in FIG. 10-15 in the final round), and the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state in the first round when the advantageous state is again controlled, the specific display may be displayed after the predetermined period has elapsed (for example, when the next big win occurs, the gaming ball enters the big win port at the start of the first round, and the number of winnings is displayed as a specific display after the predetermined period has elapsed).

This configuration can prevent players from feeling dissatisfied when an irregular event occurs.

(10) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (9) above, when the machine is controlled to the advantageous state, during the time when the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state, it is possible to execute a suggestive effect that suggests that the machine has been controlled to the advantageous state (for example, during the time when the large prize opening changes from a closed state to an open state, it is possible to execute a fanfare effect that suggests that the large prize game state has been entered), and when the display of the amount of prize awarded starts after the specified period has elapsed, it is possible to execute a round game display that can identify the round game being played and a round-in-progress effect corresponding to the round game (for example, after the large prize opening is opened and a specified period has elapsed, it is possible to display the number of rounds together with the number of prizes won, and execute a large prize-in-progress effect corresponding to the round game).

This type of configuration can add variety to the presentation and increase interest in the game.

(Explanation of Means Related to Characteristic Part 043AK)
The characteristic part 042AK includes the following characteristic part 043AK. (1) The gaming machine according to the characteristic part 043AK is a gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.) that can be controlled to an advantageous state for a player, and includes a display means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120 that instructs the display content on the image display device 5, etc.), a variable winning means (e.g., a special variable winning ball device 7, etc.) that can change between a first state in which the gaming medium is easy to win a prize and a second state in which the gaming medium is impossible or difficult to win a prize,
and a control means (e.g., a CPU 103 that performs a round game, etc.) capable of executing a round game multiple times in which, when controlled to the advantageous state, the variable winning means is changed from the second state to the first state and then changed back to the second state, and the display means is capable of displaying an amount of granted relating to the amount of gaming value granted as a result of a gaming medium winning in the variable winning means (e.g., displaying the number of winnings), and when the first of the multiple round games is played, the amount of granted is displayed after a predetermined period has elapsed after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state (e.g., in the first round, displaying the number of winnings after a predetermined period has elapsed after a large winning opening is opened), and if a gaming medium does not win in the variable winning means within the predetermined period, the gaming value is granted as the amount of granted display after the predetermined period has elapsed. the predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the game medium has not won (for example, displaying "0000" as the number of winnings display), and if the game medium wins in the variable winning means within the predetermined period, a specific display different from the predetermined display is displayed as the amount of award display after the predetermined period has elapsed (for example, displaying "0015" as the number of winnings display), and further comprises a light-emitting means (for example, a performance effect lamp 9, etc.) and a light-emitting control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120, etc.) for controlling the light-emitting means, and the light-emitting control means controls the light-emitting means with a light-emitting pattern corresponding to the game medium winning in a case where the game medium wins in the variable winning means after the predetermined period has elapsed and a case where the game medium wins in the variable winning means before the predetermined period has elapsed (for example, when a game ball wins in a large winning port, the attacca lamp 9c is illuminated regardless of whether the winning occurs within the predetermined period).

With this configuration, if a prize is won within a specified period of time, a specific display is made, which prevents a decline in the player's interest in the game without causing anxiety to the player, and also makes it easier for the player to visually confirm that a prize has been won within the specified period of time.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, the light emitting means may include a specific light emitting means (such as an attacca lamp 9c) located near the variable winning means that emits light when a gaming medium enters the variable winning means, and a predetermined light emitting means other than the specific light emitting means (such as a performance effect lamp 9 other than the attacca lamp 9c), and the light emitted by the specific light emitting means when a gaming medium enters the variable winning means may be emitted more times per unit time than the light emitted by the predetermined light emitting means (for example, the light emitted by the attacca lamp 9c in the processing of step 042AKS058 (similarly in step 042AKS064) may be emitted in a manner (indicating a win) that is greater than the light emitted per unit time by the gaming effect lamp 9 other than the attacca lamp 9c that emits light during the performance during a jackpot).

This configuration makes it easier to visually confirm that the game ball has entered the big prize slot, increasing interest in the game.

(3) The gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above may further include a sound output means (e.g., speakers 8L, 8R, etc.), which outputs a winning sound corresponding to a winning when the gaming medium enters the variable winning means, and which outputs the winning sound both when the gaming medium enters the variable winning means after the specified period has elapsed and when the gaming medium enters the variable winning means before the specified period has elapsed (for example, when a gaming ball enters a large winning port, the winning sound may be output regardless of whether the winning occurs within the specified period).

This configuration makes it easier to recognize when a game ball has entered the big prize slot, increasing interest in the game.

(Explanation of Means Related to Characteristic Part 044AK)
The characteristic part 042AK includes the following characteristic part 044AK. (1) The gaming machine according to the characteristic part 044AK is a gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.) that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player, and includes a display means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120 that instructs the display content on the image display device 5, etc.), a variable winning means (e.g., a special variable winning ball device 7, etc.) that can change the gaming medium between a first state in which it is easy to win a prize and a second state in which it is difficult or impossible to win a prize, and a round game that changes the variable winning means from the second state to the first state and then to the second state when the gaming machine is controlled to the advantageous state. and a control means (e.g., a CPU 103 for performing a round game, etc.) that can be executed a plurality of times, the display means being capable of displaying an amount of granted relating to the amount of granted gaming value granted as a result of a gaming medium winning at the variable winning means (e.g., displaying the number of winnings), and being capable of displaying a round game display that can identify the round game being played (e.g., displaying the number of rounds), and displaying a predetermined period of time after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state when the first of the plurality of round games is played. and when a second or subsequent round game is played among a plurality of round games, the round game display corresponding to the second or subsequent round game is displayed after the predetermined period has elapsed after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state (for example, in the second round, the round number display is displayed after a predetermined period has elapsed after the large winning opening is opened). If a gaming medium does not win a prize in the variable winning means within the predetermined period, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the gaming value has not been awarded is displayed as the awarded amount display after the predetermined period has elapsed (for example, "0000" is displayed as the winning number display). If a gaming medium wins a prize in the variable winning means within the predetermined period, a specific display different from the predetermined display is displayed as the awarded amount display after the predetermined period has elapsed (for example, "0015" is displayed as the winning number display).

With this configuration, a specific display is made if a prize is won within a specified period of time, which prevents a decline in the player's interest in the game without causing anxiety to the player, and increases the chances that consecutively shot game balls will win a prize in a large prize slot that opens earlier than the round display in each round of multiple rounds of play.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, when the second or subsequent round of play is played, if the gaming medium does not enter the variable winning means within a predetermined period of time after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state, the award amount display displayed in the previous round of play continues to be displayed (for example, when the second or subsequent round of play is played, if the gaming medium does not enter the large winning port within a predetermined period of time after the large winning port is opened, the winning number display displayed in the previous round of play continues to be displayed, as shown in Figure 10-14 (a-31)). When the second or subsequent round of play is played, if the gaming medium wins in the variable winning means within a predetermined period of time after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state, the amount of the winning amount according to the gaming value awarded in response to the winning may be added to the amount of the winning amount displayed in the previous round of play and displayed (for example, if the gaming medium wins in the large winning slot within a predetermined period of time, the number of winning balls awarded in response to the winning may be added to the winning number display displayed in the previous round of play and displayed, as shown in FIG. 10-14 (a-30)).

This configuration makes it easier to recognize when a jackpot has been won in the big prize slot even during the second or subsequent rounds of play.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above, the display means may be capable of updating the displayed display of the amount of prize awarded in response to a gaming medium winning in the variable prize winning means, and the updating of the display of the amount of prize awarded may be completed once the variable prize winning means has changed from the first state to the second state, and before it returns to the first state (for example, the count-up display and the display of the number of prizes won corresponding to the over prize may be completed within the period from when the large prize winning port is completely closed to when it becomes an open state corresponding to the second round).

With this configuration, the update of the winning number display when one opening occurs does not overlap with the update of the winning number display when the next opening occurs, making it easy to determine which opening corresponds to the winning prize.

(Explanation of Means Related to Characteristic Part 045AK)
The characteristic part 042AK includes the following characteristic part 045AK. (1) The gaming machine according to the characteristic part 045AK is a gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.) that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player, and includes a display means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120 that instructs the display content on the image display device 5, etc.), a variable winning means (e.g., a special variable winning ball device 7, etc.) that can change the gaming medium to a first state in which it is easy to win a prize and a second state in which it is difficult or impossible to win a prize, and a control means (e.g., a CPU 103 that performs a round game, etc.) that can execute a round game multiple times to change the variable winning means from the second state to the first state and then to the second state when the gaming machine is controlled to the advantageous state, The display means is capable of displaying a grant amount display relating to the amount of gaming value granted as a result of the gaming medium winning at the variable winning means (for example, by displaying the number of wins), and when the first of the multiple rounds of play is played, displays the grant amount display after a predetermined period has elapsed after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state (for example, in the first round, displays the number of wins after a predetermined period has elapsed after the large winning opening is opened), and if the gaming medium does not win at the variable winning means within the predetermined period, displays the grant amount display corresponding to the fact that the gaming value has not been granted after the predetermined period has elapsed. a predetermined display (for example, displaying "0000" as the number of winnings), and if a gaming medium wins in the variable winning means within the predetermined period, a specific display different from the predetermined display is displayed as the amount of award after the predetermined period has elapsed (for example, displaying "0015" as the number of winnings), and the game machine further comprises a plurality of light-emitting means (for example, performance effect lamps 9, etc.) and a light-emitting control means (for example, performance control CPU 120, etc.) for controlling the light-emitting means, wherein the light-emitting control means is more likely to display a specific display when the variable winning means is in the first state and the amount of award after the predetermined period has elapsed than a specific display when the variable winning means is in the first state and the amount of award after the predetermined period has elapsed. The present invention is characterized in that it controls the light-emitting means to emit more light than when the award amount display is not displayed before the period has elapsed (for example, during a specified period, i.e., when the number of winnings is not displayed, only the attacca lamp 9c is lit when the game ball enters the large winning hole, as shown in Figure 10-10 (c-18), but when the number of winnings is displayed after the specified period has elapsed, the performance effect lamp 9 provided on the multi-game machine frame 3 and the performance effect lamp 9 provided on the game board 2 are alternately lit, as shown in Figures 10-11 (c-20) and (c-21), and the performance effect lamp 9 is emitted more than during the specified period).

With this configuration, if a win is made within a specified period, a specific display is made, which prevents a decline in interest in the game without causing anxiety to the player, and also enhances the presentation after the number of wins is displayed after the specified period, thereby increasing interest in the game.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, after being controlled to the advantageous state, before the variable winning means is in the first state, an operation prompting display for encouraging the player to perform an operation can be displayed (for example, by displaying a right-hit display), and the light-emitting means includes a specific light-emitting means (for example, an attacca lamp 9c, etc.) located in the vicinity of the variable winning means that emits light when a gaming medium is won by the variable winning means, and a predetermined light-emitting means other than the specific light-emitting means (for example, a performance effect lamp 9 other than the attacca lamp 9c, etc.), and when the variable winning means is in the first state, if the award amount display before the predetermined period has elapsed is not displayed, the specific light-emitting means is illuminated while the predetermined light-emitting means is illuminated in a light-emitting pattern corresponding to the operation prompting display, and when the award amount display after the predetermined period has elapsed is displayed, When this is indicated, the specific light emitting means and the predetermined light emitting means are illuminated in a light emitting pattern corresponding to the round game (for example, after the big prize opening is opened, the performance effect lamps 9 are sequentially lit as shown in Fig. 10-7 (c-3) to Fig. 10-9 (c-13) until a predetermined period has elapsed to suggest a right hit, and after the predetermined period has elapsed, the performance effect lamps 9 provided on the frame 3 for the multi-game machine and the performance effect lamps 9 provided on the game board 2 are alternately lit as shown in Fig. 10-11 (c-20) and (c-21), and when the performance effect lamps 9 are sequentially lit after the big prize opening is opened to suggest a right hit, after the last lit up attacca lamp 9c is lit, it is not turned off as shown in Fig. 10-9 (c-15), but is left lit).

This configuration can encourage operation using the specified light emitting means, and can also make the player aware that the variable winning means has entered the first state.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above, the round of play may be terminated when a specific number of gaming media are won, and transition to the next round of play (for example, the winning of 10 gaming balls is the upper limit of the period during which the large prize opening can be opened), and the time from the lapse of the specified period until the variable prize winning means enters the second state may be a sufficient time for the gaming media to win the specific number of games (for example, the upper limit of the period during which the large prize opening can be opened may be a sufficient period even if counted from the lapse of the specified period for 10 gaming balls to win).

This configuration gives players a sense of security because it guarantees them sufficient time to win.

(4) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, one round of play ends when a specific number of game balls win and transitions to the next round of play (for example, the maximum period during which a large prize opening can be opened is reached when 10 game balls win), and the time from the end of the specified period until the variable prize winning means enters the second state is sufficient for game media to win the specific number of games (for example, the maximum period during which a large prize opening can be opened is sufficient for 10 game balls to win, even if counted from the end of the specified period), and the variable prize winning When the prize means is in the first state, if the display of the amount of prize awarded before the predetermined period has elapsed is not displayed, the light emission of the light emitting means may be restricted, and the light emitting means may be made to emit light only after the display of the amount of prize awarded after the predetermined period has elapsed is displayed (for example, as shown in Figures 10-9 (c-16) to (c-19), the performance effect lamp 9 may not be made to emit light until the large prize opening is opened and the predetermined period has elapsed, i.e., until the number of prizes won is displayed, and as shown in Figures 10-11 (c-20) and (c-22), the performance effect lamp 9 may be made to emit light only after the display of the number of prizes won after the predetermined period has elapsed is displayed).

This configuration discourages players from firing too quickly and encourages them to fire at the right time.

(5) In the gaming machine described in (4) above, when the machine is controlled to the advantageous state, during the time when the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state, it is possible to execute a suggestive effect that suggests that the machine has been controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a fanfare effect can be executed), and when the display of the award amount display starts after the predetermined period has elapsed, it is possible to execute a round game display that can identify the round game being played and a mid-round effect corresponding to the round game (for example, a round number display, a number of wins display, and a jackpot mid-performance are executed after a predetermined period has elapsed), and the light-emitting means may be illuminated at the same timing as the execution timing of the mid-round performance (for example, as shown in Figures 10-11 (c-20) and (c-22), the performance effect lamp 9 may be illuminated at the same timing as the execution timing of the jackpot mid-performance).

This configuration allows the performance to be instantly heightened when the mid-round performance is executed, increasing interest in the game.

(6) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (5) above, a general winning means (e.g., general winning port 10, etc.) through which a gaming medium can win a prize is further provided, and the display means is capable of displaying the amount of gaming value awarded as a result of the gaming medium winning in the general winning means as the awarded amount display (e.g., displaying an acquisition number display in response to a winning in the general winning port 10, etc.), and if the gaming medium does not win in the general winning means within the specified period, a specified display corresponding to the fact that the gaming value has not been awarded is displayed as the awarded amount display after the specified period has elapsed (e.g., If no game balls enter the general winning opening 10 during the specified period, a predetermined display of "0000" may be displayed to indicate that no prize balls have been awarded), and if a game medium enters the general winning means within the specified period, a display corresponding to the winning of the general winning means may be displayed as the awarded amount display after the specified period has elapsed (for example, if a game ball enters the general winning opening 10 during a specified period after the large winning opening is opened, after the specified period has elapsed, a display of "0003" may be displayed as the winning number display corresponding to the winning of the general winning opening 10).

With this configuration, even if a player wins a general prize during a specified period, a display corresponding to the winning of the general prize is also displayed, preventing the player from feeling anxious.

(7) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (6) above, the variable winning means may be provided in a predetermined area in the game area (for example, the special variable winning ball device 7 may be provided in the game area on the right side), the display means may display a first image (for example, a decorative pattern constituting a jackpot) at the same timing as the display of the amount of the prize, and the first image may be displayed with an effect at the same timing as the display of the amount of the prize during the advantageous state (for example, an effect display that moves the decorative pattern constituting a jackpot), and the effect display may be displayed in a manner that suggests the predetermined area (for example, an effect display that moves the decorative pattern constituting a jackpot to the rear right, front, and rear left, suggesting a right hit).

With this configuration, the effect display suggests the play area to be launched, making it easier for the player to recognize the play area to be launched.

(Description of the first form of the characteristic portion 20SH)
Next, a gaming machine relating to the first embodiment of the characteristic part 20SH will be described with reference to Figs. 11-1 to 11-4. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the first embodiment of the characteristic part 20SH, an acquisition number display relating to the number of prize balls awarded in a jackpot gaming state and an acquisition number notification display for notifying that the number of prize balls awarded in a jackpot gaming state has reached a predetermined number can be displayed. The characters used in the acquisition number display and the acquisition number notification display include specific characters in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters is formed. The specific characters used in the acquisition number display are not visible from the specific area against the background image during a jackpot. The specific characters used in the acquisition number notification display are visible from the specific area against the background image during a jackpot.

The following describes the pachinko gaming machine 1 with the first form of the characteristic part 20SH having such features. Note that descriptions of parts similar to those described above will be omitted.

(Background Art Related to the First Aspect of Characteristic Part 20SH)
FIG. 11A is a diagram showing the background art related to the first aspect of the characteristic portion 20SH.

When a pachinko game machine is controlled to a jackpot game state, it may display an acquisition number display relating to the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state, as shown in FIG. 11-1(A). In the example shown in FIG. 11-1(A), the acquisition number display shows "120 points" corresponding to the number of acquired balls being 120.

The winning number display uses numbers to indicate the number of winning balls, and characters other than numbers to make it clear that it is a winning number display. The numbers used to display the winning number are, for example, Arabic numerals, Roman numerals, Chinese numerals, etc. The winning number display shown in Figure 11-1 (A) uses the word "points" to make it clear that it is a winning number display, and the number "120" to indicate the number of winning balls.

Some of the characters used to display the number of acquisitions form a special area. Here, a special area is an area that is surrounded by the lines that form the character, and does not connect to the area outside the lines that form the character. Here, "not connecting to the area outside the lines that form the character" includes cases where the "special area" is completely isolated from the "area outside the lines that form the character" by the "lines that form the character", and cases where the "special area" is not completely isolated from the "area outside the lines that form the character" by the "lines that form the character", but appears to be a separate area at first glance. In the following explanation, characters that form a special area are referred to as "special characters".

For example, in the case of Arabic numerals, "0", "4", "6", "8", and "9" correspond to specific characters. That is, in the case of the Arabic numerals "0", "6", "8", and "9", the specific region is an approximately circular region surrounded by the curves that form the character. In the case of the Arabic numeral "8", two specific regions are formed. In the case of the Arabic numeral "4", the specific region is a triangular region surrounded by the three straight lines that form the character.

When the pachinko gaming machine is controlled to the jackpot gaming state, as shown in FIG. 11-1(A), a jackpot background image relating to the jackpot gaming state is displayed over the entire display area of the image display device. In the example shown in FIG. 11-1(A), a jackpot background image of a flying "butterfly" is displayed. The jackpot background image is an image that is displayed behind other displays displayed on the image display device in the jackpot gaming state. The jackpot background image contains many lines that represent animated pictures and effects.

The number of wins display is displayed small in an edge area of the display area of the image display device that does not impede the visibility of the background image during a jackpot. When the background image during a jackpot changes over time, the lines of the background image during a jackpot may overlap the back of the number of wins display. Furthermore, when a specific character is displayed in the number of wins display, such as the Arabic numeral "0" surrounded by a two-dot chain line in Figure 11-1 (A), if the lines of the background image during a jackpot overlap the back of a specific area of the specific character, the lines of the background image during a jackpot may blend in with the lines that form the specific character, causing the specific character to appear as a different character than it actually is.

Figure 11-1 (B) is an enlarged view of the Arabic numeral "0" surrounded by a two-dot chain line in Figure 11-1 (A). In the example shown in Figures 11-1 (A) and (B), the "butterfly" lines of the background image during a jackpot overlap the back of the specific area of the specific character "0" used to display the number of wins, and the "butterfly" lines of the background image during a jackpot blend in with the lines that form the specific character "0," making the specific character "0" look like the Arabic numeral "8" instead of the Arabic numeral "0."

In this way, if the characters showing the number of balls won are mistaken for characters that are different from the actual characters, the number of balls awarded during a jackpot game cannot be accurately recognized. However, it is difficult to adjust the position of the lines included in the background image during a jackpot so that the lines do not overlap with specific areas of specific characters.

The first form of characteristic part 20SH was created in consideration of this background. The first form of characteristic part 20SH is described below.

(Display of Acquisition Number in First Form of Characteristic Part 20SH)
FIG. 11-2(A) is a diagram showing an example of a display form of Arabic numerals used to display the number of acquisitions in the first form of the characteristic part 20SH.

In the first form of the characteristic part 20SH, the specific regions 20SHI1 of the Arabic numerals used to display the number of acquisitions, which correspond to the specific characters "0", "4", "6", "8", and "9", are displayed in a non-transparent display mode that differs from the display mode of the lines 20SHS1 that form the characters. In the example shown in FIG. 11-2(A), the color of the lines 20SHS1 of the Arabic numerals used to display the number of acquisitions is "black", while the specific regions 20SHI1 of the specific characters "0", "4", "6", "8", and "9" are displayed in "white".

In addition, the display mode of the specific region 20SHI1 is not limited to a color different from the color of the lines 20SHS1 that form the characters, but may be a display mode that has a high contrast with the display mode of the lines 20SHS1 that form the characters to the extent that the specific region 20SHI1 and the lines 20SHS1 that form the characters can be accurately distinguished.

For example, the color of the specific region 20SHI1 may be a color that has a high contrast with the color of the lines 20SHS1 that form the characters. In that case, the brightness of the specific region 20SHI1 may be a brightness that has a low contrast with the brightness of the lines 20SHS1 that form the characters. Also, in that case, the texture of the specific region 20SHI1 may be a texture that has a low contrast with the texture of the lines 20SHS1 that form the characters. Also, in that case, the texture of the specific region 20SHI1 may be a texture that has a low contrast with the texture of the lines 20SHS1 that form the characters.

Also, for example, the brightness of the specific region 20SHI1 may be a brightness that has a high contrast with the brightness of the lines 20SHS1 that form the characters. In that case, the color of the specific region 20SHI1 may be a color that has a low contrast with the color of the lines 20SHS1 that form the characters. Also, in that case, the texture of the specific region 20SHI1 may be a texture that has a low contrast with the texture of the lines 20SHS1 that form the characters. Also, in that case, the texture of the specific region 20SHI1 may be a texture that has a low contrast with the texture of the lines 20SHS1 that form the characters.

Also, for example, the texture of the specific region 20SHI1 may be a texture with high contrast to the texture of the lines 20SHS1 that form the characters. In that case, the color of the specific region 20SHI1 may be a color with low contrast to the color of the lines 20SHS1 that form the characters. Also, in that case, the brightness of the specific region 20SHI1 may be a brightness with low contrast to the brightness of the lines 20SHS1 that form the characters. Also, in that case, the texture of the specific region 20SHI1 may be a texture with low contrast to the texture of the lines 20SHS1 that form the characters.

Also, for example, the texture of the specific region 20SHI1 may be a texture with high contrast relative to the texture of the lines 20SHS1 that form the characters. In that case, the color of the specific region 20SHI1 may be a color with low contrast relative to the color of the lines 20SHS1 that form the characters. Also, in that case, the brightness of the specific region 20SHI1 may be a brightness with low contrast relative to the brightness of the lines 20SHS1 that form the characters. Also, in that case, the texture of the specific region 20SHI1 may be a texture with low contrast relative to the texture of the lines 20SHS1 that form the characters.

Of the characters used to display the number of balls won, numbers other than Arabic numerals to display the number of balls won, and specific characters other than numerals to recognize that the number of balls won is displayed, are displayed in a display mode in which the specific area is not transparent and is different from the display mode of the lines that form the characters, as in the Arabic numerals shown in Figure 11-2 (A).

(Display of Acquisition Number in the First Form of Characteristic Part 20SH)
FIG. 11-2(A) is a diagram showing an example of a display form of Arabic numerals used for the acquisition number notification display in the first form of the characteristic part 20SH.

When the number of prize balls awarded during a jackpot game reaches a predetermined number, the pachinko game machine 1 displays a winning number notification display to notify the player of this fact.

Here, the time-saving control and the probability variable control executed after the end of the jackpot game state are ended when a predetermined number of special game games are played, or when the jackpot game state is entered before a predetermined number of special game games are played. However, for example, the number of times of the time-saving control and the probability variable control may be different for each type of jackpot, and in the case of a specific type of jackpot, the high probability control and the time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot game state may be continuously executed until another jackpot occurs after the end of the jackpot game state. In such a case, the jackpot game state occurs continuously without going through the normal state, resulting in a so-called consecutive state.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in a consecutive win state, when the number of prize balls awarded in multiple jackpot game states in the consecutive win state reaches a predetermined number, a winning number notification display is displayed to notify that fact.

The winning number notification display uses numbers to display the predetermined number of balls awarded during a jackpot game state when that number is reached, and characters other than numbers to make it clear that it is a winning number notification display. The numbers used in the winning number notification display are, for example, Arabic numerals, Roman numerals, Chinese numerals, etc.

Among the characters used in the acquisition number notification display, there are some that correspond to specific characters. In the first form of the characteristic part 20SH, as shown in FIG. 11-2(B), the specific regions of the specific characters used in the acquisition number notification display are displayed in a transparent display mode. In the example shown in FIG. 11-2(B), the specific regions 20SHI2 of the Arabic numerals "0", "4", "6", "8", and "9" that correspond to specific characters among the Arabic numerals used in the acquisition number notification display are displayed in a transparent display mode.

Of the characters used in the winning number notification display, numbers other than Arabic numerals for displaying a predetermined number when the number of prize balls awarded in a jackpot game state is reached, and specific characters other than numerals for recognizing that it is a winning number notification display, are displayed in a transparent display mode in specific areas, like the Arabic numerals shown in Figure 11-2 (B).

(Appearance of Acquisition Number Display in First Form of Characteristic Part 20SH)
Fig. 11-3(A) is a diagram showing how the acquisition number display appears in the first form of the characteristic part 20SH. Fig. 11-3(B) is an enlarged view of the part of the Arabic numeral "0" surrounded by a two-dot chain line in Fig. 11-1(A).

In the example shown in Figures 11-3 (A) and (B), the "butterfly" line of the background image during a jackpot overlaps the back of the specific area of the specific character "0" used in the number of wins display 20SHK, but because specific area 20SHI1 is displayed in "white," the background image during a jackpot cannot be seen from specific area 20SHI1. Therefore, in specific area 20SHI1, the "butterfly" line 20SHHS of the background image during a jackpot does not blend in with the line 20SHS1 that forms the specific character "0," and the specific character "0" can be accurately recognized as the Arabic numeral "0."

In addition to the number of winnings display 20SHK, the image display device 5 displays a jackpot display 20SHO to let the player know that it is in a jackpot game state, a decorative pattern display 20SHZ that shows the confirmed decorative pattern that is the jackpot combination that is derived and displayed when it is in a jackpot game state, a round number display 20SHR that shows the number of rounds in the round game in the jackpot game state, and a right hit display 20SHM that suggests to the player that he should hit right. Like the number of winnings display 20SHK, the jackpot display 20SHO, decorative pattern display 20SHZ, round number display 20SHR, and right hit display 20SHM are also displayed small in the edge area of the display area of the image display device 5 so as not to obstruct the visibility of the background image during a jackpot.

The characters used in the jackpot display 20SHO, the decorative pattern display 20SHZ, the round number display 20SHR, and the right-hand hit display 20SHM may include characters of the same type as those used in the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display, and characters of a different type than those used in the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display. In this embodiment, the characters in the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH are "numbers" and "katakana" as shown in FIG. 11-4. On the other hand, the jackpot display 20SHO uses "alphabet" and "kanji", which are characters of a different type than those used in the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display. Also, the decorative pattern display 20SHZ uses "numbers", which are characters of the same type as those used in the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display. The round number display 20SHR uses "numbers", which are the same type of characters as those used in the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display, and "alphabet", which are different types of characters from those used in the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display. The right-hand hit display 20SHM uses "kanji", "hiragana", and "symbols", which are different types of characters from those used in the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display.

Some of the characters used in the jackpot display 20SHO, decorative pattern display 20SHZ, round number display 20SHR, and right-hit display 20SHM are specific characters, regardless of the type of character. The specific areas of the specific characters used in the jackpot display 20SHO, decorative pattern display 20SHZ, round number display 20SHR, and right-hit display 20SHM are non-transparent, just like the specific area 20SHI1 of the number of wins display 20SHK, and are displayed in a different display mode from the line 20SHS1 that forms the characters, so the background image during a jackpot cannot be seen from the specific area 20SHI1.

(Example of the performance of the acquisition number display and the acquisition number notification display in the first form of the characteristic part 20SH)
FIG. 11-4 is a diagram showing an example of the presentation operation of the acquisition number display and the acquisition number notification display.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11-4(A), the display area of the image display device 5 is divided into a first display area 20SH51 and a second display area 20SH52, which is an area around the first display area 20SH51 and is narrower than the first display area 20SH51, and various displays are performed by distinguishing between them. In the example shown in FIG. 11-4(A), the area inside the two-dot chain line is the first display area 20SH51, and the area outside the two-dot chain line is the second display area 20SH52.

As shown in FIG. 11-4(A), the performance control CPU 120 displays a background image during a jackpot in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52 of the image display device 5. The performance control CPU 120 also displays an acquisition number display 20SHK in front of the background image during a jackpot in the second display area 20SH52 of the image display device 5. Also, as shown in FIG. 11-4(A), the second display area 20SH52 also displays a jackpot display, a decorative pattern display, a round number display, and a right hit display.

As mentioned above, in this embodiment, when a game ball enters the big prize opening, 15 game balls are paid out as prize balls. In FIG. 11-4(A), the number of points won 20SHK is displayed, indicating "990 points," so it can be recognized that 990 game balls have been paid out as prize balls in the big win game state. The performance control CPU 120 updates the number in the number of points won 20SHK each time a game ball is paid out in the big win game state.

In this situation, suppose a gaming ball enters the big prize slot and 15 gaming balls are paid out as prize balls.

In response to the dispensing of 15 game balls, the performance control CPU 120 counts up the number of winning balls display 20SHK by one from "990" to "1005", as shown in Figures 11-4 (B) to (G). In this case, the number of winning balls display 20SHK will go through the round number "1000", which is a so-called "kiriban". In other words, the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state has reached "1000 balls".

Here, the presentation control CPU 120 displays the winning number notification display each time "1000" game balls are paid out in the jackpot game state. For example, the presentation control CPU 120 displays the winning number notification display "Over 1000" when the number of prize balls in the jackpot game state reaches "1000", and displays the winning number notification display "Over 2000" when the number of prize balls in the jackpot game state reaches "2000".

When the number in the acquisition number display 20SHK reaches the round number "1000", the performance control CPU 120 displays a part of the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH on the right edge of the display area of the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 11-4 (D). Then, as shown in FIG. 11-4 (E) to (G), the performance control CPU 120 moves the display position of the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH, which is displayed in each frame of the image while the number in the acquisition number display 20SHK changes from "1000" to "1005", from the right edge of the display area of the image display device 5 toward the center of the first display area 20SH51. Then, when the number in the acquisition number display 20SHK reaches "1005", the performance control CPU 120 stops and displays the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH in the center of the first display area 20SH51 of the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 11-4 (G). In this case, the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH only needs to be displayed in at least the first display area 20SH51, and may be displayed across the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52.

By this type of display control, the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH is displayed so that it frames in from the outside to the inside of the display area of the image display device 5.

Then, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of displaying the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH, the performance control CPU 120 ends the display of the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH. In the example shown in FIG. 11-4 (H), the performance control CPU 120 moves the display position of the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH displayed in each frame of the video from the center of the first display area 20SH51 of the image display device 5 toward the left edge of the display area.

By this display control, the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH is displayed so that it frames out from the inside to the outside of the display area of the image display device 5, and the display ends when it is no longer displayed in the display area of the image display device 5.

The performance control CPU 120 may determine that the display of the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH has started when the number on the acquisition number display 20SHK reaches a "round number" and that a part of the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH has been displayed, and may perform display control to end the display of the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH when a predetermined period of time has passed from that timing. The performance control CPU 120 may also determine that the display of the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH has started when the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH has been stopped and displayed in the first display area 20SH51 of the image display device 5, and may perform display control to end the display of the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH when a predetermined period of time has passed from that timing.

As mentioned above, the specific area of the specific characters used in the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH is displayed in a transparent display mode. Therefore, as shown in Figures 11-4 (E) to (H), the background image during a jackpot can be seen from the specific area of the specific characters used in the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH. For example, in the example shown in Figures 11-4 (E) to (H), the background image during a jackpot can be seen from the specific area of the Arabic numeral "0", which is the specific character used in the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH.

In addition, the characters used in the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH are larger than the characters used in the acquisition number display 20SHK, as shown in Figures 11-4 (D) to (H).

The presentation mode when the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH is stopped and displayed in the first display area 20SH51 is not limited to the presentation mode in which the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH is framed in, stopped, and then framed out. For example, instead of the presentation in which the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH is framed in, the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH may be presented to jump out from the back side of the screen to the front side, the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH may be presented to gradually emerge, or a character may appear and display the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH in a speech bubble showing the character's lines. Also, instead of making the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH frame out, the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH may be made to be sucked from the front side of the screen to the back side, or the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH may be made to gradually disappear, or the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH may be displayed in a speech bubble showing the character's lines and the character may then leave.

As described above, the pachinko game machine 1 relating to the first form of the characteristic part 20SH can be controlled to a jackpot game state. The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with an image display device 5. The display area of the image display device 5 includes a first display area 20SH51 and a second display area 20SH52 which is an area around the first display area 20SH51 and is narrower than the first display area 20SH51. The image display device 5 can display a jackpot background image corresponding to a jackpot game state in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52. The image display device 5 can also display an acquisition number display 20SHK relating to the number of awarded prize balls in front of the jackpot background image in the second display area 20SH52. In addition, the image display device 5 can display, at least in the first display region 20SH51, an acquisition number notification display 20SHKH for notifying that the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state has reached the number of "round number" on the front side of the background image during the jackpot, an acquisition number notification display of "over 1000" when the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state reaches "1000 balls", and an acquisition number notification display of "over 2000" when the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state reaches "2000 balls". The acquisition number display 20SHK is updated every time a game ball is paid out as a prize ball in the jackpot game state. On the other hand, the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH ends its display when a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of display. The characters used in the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH are larger in size than the characters used in the acquisition number display 20SHK. The characters used in the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH include specific characters that form a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters. The specific characters used in the acquisition number display 20SHK do not allow the background image during a jackpot to be seen from the specific area. On the other hand, the specific characters used in the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH allow the background image during a jackpot to be seen from the specific area.

With this configuration, the winning number display 20SHK and winning number notification display 20SHKH, which include the specific characters, can be displayed appropriately in relation to the background image during a jackpot. For example, when a player checks the number of winning balls in a jackpot game state, the winning number display 20SHK is displayed in small characters in the narrow second display area 20SH52, and if the background image during a jackpot can be seen from the specific area of the specific characters, the specific characters may appear different from the actual characters. However, by making the background image during a jackpot invisible from the specific area of the specific characters, the specific characters can be accurately recognized. Also, unlike the winning number display 20SHK, the winning number notification display 20SHKH is not constantly displayed during a jackpot game state, but is displayed for a limited period of time to congratulate the player when the number of prize balls awarded during a jackpot game state reaches a "round number." Since it is displayed in large letters in the wide first display area 20SH51, by making the background image during a jackpot visible from a specific area of the specific letters, it is possible to show at least a little of the background image during a jackpot in the prominent display position of the first display area.

As mentioned above, the specific characters include the Arabic numerals "0", "4", "6", "8", and "9".

This configuration allows the number of wins display 20SHK and the number of wins notification display 20SHKH, which use Arabic numerals, to be displayed appropriately in relation to the background image during a jackpot.

Also, as described above, when the image display device 5 displays the acquisition number display 20SHK, it displays the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH.

With this configuration, even when the winning number notification display 20SHKH is displayed, the number of winning balls in the jackpot game state can be accurately ascertained from the winning number display 20SHK.

As described above, the image display device 5 can also display the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52.

This configuration makes the winning number notification display 20SHKH easier for the player to see, and can conveniently notify the player that the number of winning balls awarded during a jackpot game has reached the "kiriban" number.

As described above, the image display device 5 can display the jackpot display 20SHO, the decorative pattern display 20SHZ, the number of rounds display 20SHR, and the right-hit display 20SHM in front of the background image during a jackpot in the second display area 20SH52. The characters used in the jackpot display 20SHO, the decorative pattern display 20SHZ, the number of rounds display 20SHR, and the right-hit display 20SHM include characters of the same type as the characters used in the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH, and characters of a different type from the characters used in the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH, and each type of character includes a specific character that forms a specific area surrounded by lines that form the character. Furthermore, the specific characters used in the jackpot display 20SHO, decorative pattern display 20SHZ, round number display 20SHR, and right-hand hit display 20SHM cannot be seen from the specific area in the background image during the jackpot.

This configuration allows the specific characters to be accurately recognized for the jackpot display 20SHO, the decorative pattern display 20SHZ, the number of rounds display 20SHR, and the right-hand hit display 20SHM.

As described above, the image display device 5 can display the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH by stopping it in the first display area 20SH51, and when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH is framed in to the stopping position in the first display area 20SH51, the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH is framed out.

This configuration can improve the presentation effect when the winning number notification display 20SHKH is displayed.

(Second form of characteristic portion 20SH)
Next, a gaming machine relating to the second embodiment of the characteristic portion 20SH will be described with reference to Fig. 11-5 to Fig. 11-7. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the second embodiment of the characteristic portion 20SH, the ratio of the size of the specific region of the specific characters used in the winning number notification display 20SHKH to the region of the lines forming the characters is smaller than that of the specific characters used in the winning number display 20SHK.

The following describes the pachinko gaming machine 1 with respect to the second form of the characteristic part 20SH having such features. Note that the description of the same parts as those described above will be omitted.

(Display of Acquisition Number in Second Form of Characteristic Part 20SH)
FIG. 11-5(A) is a diagram showing an example of a display form of Arabic numerals used for the acquisition number notification display in the second form of the characteristic part 20SH.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the second form of the characteristic part 20SH uses three-dimensional characters to display the winning number notification. Here, three-dimensional characters are a character format that makes the characters appear to jump out in front of the player. The line area that forms the three-dimensional characters includes an area 20SHS21 that represents the characters, and an area 20SHS22 that represents the depth of the three-dimensional characters.

Among these three-dimensional characters, there are some that correspond to specific characters. In the example shown in FIG. 11-5(A), the specific regions 20SHI3 of the three-dimensional Arabic numerals used to display the number of wins notification, which correspond to specific characters "0," "4," "6," "8," and "9," are displayed in a transparent display mode, and when displayed in front of the background image during a jackpot, the background image during a jackpot can be seen from the specific regions 20SHI3.

(Comparison between non-3D characters and 3D characters)
FIG. 11-5(B) is an explanatory diagram for comparing non-three-dimensional characters used for displaying the number of acquisitions with three-dimensional characters used for displaying the number of acquisitions.

Comparing the non-three-dimensional characters used to display the number of acquisitions and the three-dimensional characters used to notify the number of acquisitions, the size of the line area 20SHI1 forming the non-three-dimensional characters is the same as the size of the area 20SHS21 of the line area forming the three-dimensional characters that expresses the characters. In the case of a non-three-dimensional specific character, the area surrounded by the inner outline of the line area 20SHI1 forming the characters becomes the specific area 20SHI1. On the other hand, in the case of a three-dimensional specific character, the line area forming the characters includes the area 20SHS22 expressing the depth of the characters, so the area surrounded by the inner outline of the area 20SHS21 expressing the characters and the outline of the area 20SHS22 expressing the depth of the characters located on the inner side becomes the specific area 20SHI3. Therefore, the size of the three-dimensional specific characters used to display the number of acquisitions is smaller than the non-three-dimensional specific characters used to display the number of acquisitions by the size of the area 20SHS22 that represents the depth of the characters, which is located on the inner side of the area 20SHS21 that represents the characters, and the ratio of the size of the specific area to the size of the line area that forms the characters is smaller.

(Modification of Acquisition Number Notification Display in the Second Form of Characteristic Part 20SH)
FIG. 11-6(A) is a diagram showing a first modified example of the display mode of Arabic numerals used for the acquisition number notification display in the second form of the characteristic part 20SH.

In the example shown in FIG. 11-6(A), the specific region 20SHI4 for the specific characters "0," "4," "6," "8," and "9" among the three-dimensional Arabic numerals used in the winning number notification display is displayed in "white," and when it is displayed in front of the background image during a jackpot, the background image during a jackpot cannot be seen from the specific region 20SHI3.

(Comparison between non-three-dimensional characters and three-dimensional characters in Modification Example 1)
FIG. 11-6(B) is an explanatory diagram for comparing non-three-dimensional characters used for displaying the number of acquisitions and three-dimensional characters used for displaying the number of acquisitions in the first modified example.

In the first modified example, when comparing the non-three-dimensional characters used to display the number of acquisitions and the three-dimensional characters used to notify the number of acquisitions, the size of the line area 20SHI1 forming the non-three-dimensional characters is the same as the size of the area 20SH31 expressing the characters in the line area forming the three-dimensional characters. In the non-three-dimensional specific characters, the area surrounded by the inner outline of the line area 20SHI1 forming the characters becomes the specific area 20SHI1. On the other hand, in the three-dimensional specific characters, the line area forming the characters includes the area 20SH32 expressing the depth of the characters, so the area surrounded by the inner outline of the area 20SH31 expressing the characters and the outline of the area 20SH32 expressing the depth of the characters on the inner side becomes the specific area 20SHI4. Therefore, the three-dimensional specific characters used to display the number of acquisitions are smaller in size than the non-three-dimensional specific characters used to display the number of acquisitions by the size of the area 20SH32 that represents the depth of the character and is located on the inner side of the area 20SH31 that represents the character, and the ratio of the size of the specific area to the size of the line area that forms the character is smaller.

(Modification of Acquisition Number Notification Display in the Second Form of Characteristic Part 20SH)
FIG. 11-7(A) is a diagram showing a modified example 2 of the display mode of Arabic numerals used for the acquisition number notification display in the second form of the characteristic part 20SH.

In variant 2, as shown in FIG. 11-7(A), the characters used to display the number of acquisitions are displayed in a three-color gradation in the line area that forms the characters, and are displayed in one of display modes A to G, which have different combinations of the three-color gradation.

The line region forming the character in display mode A is colored in a three-color gradation with the upper region 20SHSU being "red," the central region 20SHSC being "orange," and the lower region 20SHSD being "yellow." The line region forming the character in display mode B is colored in a three-color gradation with the upper region 20SHSU being "orange," the central region 20SHSC being "yellow," and the lower region 20SHSD being "green." The line region forming the character in display mode C is colored in a three-color gradation with the upper region 20SHSU being "yellow," the central region 20SHSC being "green," and the lower region 20SHSD being "light blue." The line region forming the character in display mode D is colored in a three-color gradation with the upper region 20SHSU being "green," the central region 20SHSC being "light blue," and the lower region 20SHSD being "blue." The area of the lines forming the characters in display mode E is colored in a three-color gradation with the upper area 20SHSU being "light blue," the center area 20SHSC being "blue," and the lower area 20SHSD being "purple." The area of the lines forming the characters in display mode F is colored in a three-color gradation with the upper area 20SHSU being "blue," the center area 20SHSC being "purple," and the lower area 20SHSD being "red." The area of the lines forming the characters in display mode G is colored in a three-color gradation with the upper area 20SHSU being "purple," the center area 20SHSC being "red," and the lower area 20SHSD being "yellow."

The image display device 5 changes the style of the characters used to display the number of acquisitions notification over time in the following order: Display style A → Display style B → Display style C → Display style D → Display style E → Display style F → Display style G → Display style A → ....

Figure 11-7 (B) shows an example of the color change that accompanies the operation of the acquisition number notification display in variant 2.

In variant 2, as shown in FIG. 11-7 (B), the speed at which the display mode of the acquisition number notification display changes differs between when the acquisition number notification display is stopped in the first display area 20SH51 of the image display device 5 and when the acquisition number notification display is moving (frame-in/frame-out).

In the example shown in FIG. 11-7(B), the acquisition number notification display changes from display mode A to display mode D while moving (frame-in) from the right edge of the display area of the image display device 5 to the center of the first display area 20SH51 over 0.35 seconds. The acquisition number display then changes from display mode D to display mode G while stopped and displayed for 1 second in the center of the first display area 20SH51 of the image display device 5. The acquisition number notification display then changes from display mode G to display mode C while moving (frame-out) from the center of the first display area 20SH51 to the left edge of the display area of the image display device 5 over 0.35 seconds.

As described above, the pachinko game machine 1 relating to the second form of the characteristic part 20SH can be controlled to a jackpot game state. The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with an image display device 5. The display area of the image display device 5 includes a first display area 20SH51 and a second display area 20SH52 which is an area around the first display area 20SH51 and is narrower than the first display area 20SH51. The image display device 5 can display a jackpot background image corresponding to a jackpot game state in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52. The image display device 5 can also display an acquisition number display relating to the number of awarded prize balls in front of the jackpot background image in the second display area 20SH52. In addition, the image display device 5 can display, at least in the first display region 20SH51, an acquisition number notification display of "over 1000" when the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state reaches "1000 balls" as an acquisition number notification display for notifying that the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state has reached the number of "kiriban", and can display an acquisition number notification display of "over 2000" when the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state reaches "2000 balls". The acquisition number display is updated every time a game ball is paid out as a prize ball in the jackpot game state. On the other hand, the acquisition number notification display ends when a predetermined period has elapsed since the display started. The characters used for the acquisition number notification display are characters of a size larger than the characters used for the acquisition number display. The characters used for the acquisition number display and the acquisition number notification display include specific characters in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters is formed. The specific characters used to display the number of winnings are not visible from the specific area against the background image during a jackpot. The specific characters used to display the number of winnings notification have a smaller ratio of the size of the specific area to the size of the line area that forms the characters than the specific characters used to display the number of winnings.

With this configuration, the winning number display and winning number notification display, including the specific characters, can be displayed appropriately in relation to the background image during a jackpot. For example, when a player checks the number of winning balls in a jackpot game state, the player checks the winning number display, but the winning number display is displayed in small characters in the narrow second display area 20SH52, and if the background image during a jackpot can be seen from the specific area of the specific characters, there is a possibility that the specific characters will appear different from their original characters. However, by making the background image during a jackpot invisible from the specific area of the specific characters, the specific characters can be accurately recognized.

The characters used to display the number of wins are three-dimensional characters. The line area that forms the three-dimensional characters includes an area that represents the characters and an area that represents the depth of the characters.

This configuration can enhance the presentation effect of the winning number notification display.

As mentioned above, the specific characters used to display the winning number notification can be seen from the specific area 20SHI3 along with the background image during the jackpot.

With this configuration, the winning number notification display is not displayed at all times during a jackpot game state like the winning number display, but is displayed only for a specified period of time to congratulate the player when the number of prize balls awarded during a jackpot game state reaches the "kiriban" number. Since it is displayed in large letters in the wide first display area 20SH51 and the ratio of the size of the specific area 20SHI3 to the size of the line areas 20SHS21, 20SHS22 that form the letters is small, not only can the risk of misidentifying the letters be reduced even if the background image during a jackpot is visible from the specific area 20SHI3 of the specific letters be reduced, but the presentation effect can be enhanced by making the background image during a jackpot visible from the specific area 20SHI3 of the specific letters.

As mentioned above, the specific characters used to display the winning number notification in variant 1 are not visible from specific area 20SHI4 against the background image during a jackpot.

With this configuration, the winning number notification display is not displayed at all times during a jackpot game state like the winning number display, but is displayed only for a specified period of time to congratulate the player when the number of prize balls awarded during a jackpot game state reaches the "kiriban" number, and is displayed in large letters in the wide first display area 20SH51, and the ratio of the size of the specific area to the size of the line area that forms the letters is small, so not only can the sense of incongruity be reduced even if the background image during a jackpot is not visible from the specific area of the specific letters, but by making the background image during a jackpot not visible from the specific area of the specific letters, the letters can be prevented from being misinterpreted.

As described above, the characters used in the acquisition number notification display in variant example 2 are displayed with a three-color gradation in the line areas that form the characters. The image display device 5 changes the appearance of the characters used in the acquisition number notification display over time in the following order: Display appearance A → Display appearance B → Display appearance C → Display appearance D → Display appearance E → Display appearance F → Display appearance G → Display appearance A → ... The speed at which the display appearance of the acquisition number notification display changes differs between when the acquisition number notification display is stopped in the first display area 20SH51 of the image display device 5 and when the acquisition number notification display is moving (frame-in/frame-out).

With this configuration, the display mode changes depending on the movement speed of the acquisition number notification display, enhancing the presentation effect.

(Explanation of the third form of the characteristic portion 20SH)
Next, a gaming machine according to the third embodiment of the characteristic part 20SH will be described with reference to Fig. 11-8 to Fig. 11-11. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the third embodiment of the characteristic part 20SH, the specific characters used in the result display are visible in a specific area of the ending background image.

The following describes the pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the third form of the characteristic part 20SH having such features. Note that descriptions of parts similar to those described above will be omitted.

(Arabic numerals used in results display)
FIG. 11-8 is a diagram showing an example of a display form of Arabic numerals used for displaying the result in the third form of the characteristic portion 20SH.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 finishes the final round of play, it executes an ending presentation corresponding to the end of the jackpot gaming state. At this time, the image display device 5 displays an ending background video. In addition, while the image display device 5 is displaying the ending background video, it displays a result display announcing the total number of winning balls awarded in the jackpot gaming state.

The result display uses numbers to show the total number of winning balls awarded during a jackpot game, and characters other than numbers to make it clear that it is a result display. The numbers used to display the result are, for example, Arabic numerals, Roman numerals, Chinese numerals, etc.

Among the characters used in the result display, there are some that correspond to specific characters. In the third form of the characteristic part 20SH, as shown in FIG. 11-8, the specific regions of the specific characters used in the result display are displayed in a transparent display mode. In the example shown in FIG. 11-8, the specific regions 20SHI5 of the Arabic numerals "0", "4", "6", "8", and "9" that correspond to specific characters among the Arabic numerals used in the result display are displayed in a transparent display mode.

Of the characters used to display the results, numbers other than Arabic numerals to indicate the total number of winning balls awarded in a jackpot game state, and characters other than numerals to recognize that it is a result display, are also displayed in a transparent display mode in specific areas, such as the Arabic numerals shown in Figure 11-8.

(Various effects during big win game mode)
11-9 is a diagram showing an example of a presentation period of various presentations in a big win gaming state. FIG. 11-10 is a diagram showing an example of presentation operation of various presentations in a big win gaming state.

When reserved information is stored in a jackpot gaming state, the presentation control CPU 120 can execute a reserved consecutive win notification that indicates that the game will be controlled to a jackpot gaming state in accordance with the stored reserved information. For example, in a jackpot gaming state of 10 rounds in total, the presentation control CPU 120 starts a reserved consecutive win notification at timing T1 when 9 rounds of round play end and the 10th round, which is the final round, begins, as shown in Figures 11-9 and 11-10 (A) to (B).

When the reserved consecutive wins notification is executed, as shown in FIG. 11-10(B), the second display area 20SH52 of the image display device 5 displays an effect image of the reserved consecutive wins notification in front of the jackpot background image, which corresponds to the progress of a round of play in the jackpot game state. In the example shown in FIG. 11-10(B), a "flame" effect image 20SHE is displayed as the effect image of the reserved consecutive wins notification.

In the example shown in Figure 11-10 (B), the "flame" lines of the effect image overlap the back side of the specific area of the specific character "0" used in the acquisition number display 20SHK, but because the specific area is displayed in "white," the effect image cannot be seen from the specific area. Therefore, in the specific area, the "flame" lines of the effect image do not blend in with the lines that form the specific character "0," and the specific character "0" can be accurately recognized as the Arabic numeral "0."

As shown in FIG. 11-9 and FIG. 11-10(B) to (C), at the timing T2 when the final round of play ends and the ending performance begins, the performance control CPU 120 ends the pending consecutive win notification and begins the ending performance. When the ending performance begins, the first display area 20SH51 of the image display device 5 begins displaying an ending background video at a specified brightness. In the example shown in FIG. 11-10(C), an ending background video of cherry blossom petals falling from the back of the screen is displayed in the first display area 20SH51. Also, the words "Jackpot End" are displayed in front of the ending background video to indicate that the jackpot play state has ended.

Here, the performance control CPU 120 ends the pending consecutive wins notification before the ending background video starts to be displayed at timing T2. Therefore, when the ending background video is being displayed, the effect video 20SHE of the pending consecutive wins notification is not displayed. In other words, the effect video 20SHE of the pending consecutive wins notification is displayed when the ending background video is not being displayed.

The ending background video only needs to be an image displayed in at least the first display area 20SH51, and may be displayed across the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52, as shown in FIG. 11-10(D). In the example shown in FIG. 11-10(D), cherry blossom petals are fluttering across the entire screen as the ending background video.

As shown in Figures 11-9 and 11-10 (D) to (E), at time T3 when the result display begins, the performance control CPU 120 reduces the brightness of the ending background video to a specific brightness darker than a predetermined brightness, pauses the progression of the ending background video, and displays it as a still image. The performance control CPU 120 then displays the result display 20SHRE in front of the ending background video at a brightness brighter than the specific brightness of the still image of the ending background video. In the example shown in Figure 11-10 (E), the fluttering cherry blossoms stop, and the result display 20SHRE is displayed in white letters.

As mentioned above, the specific characters used in the result display 20SHRE are displayed in a transparent manner in the specific area 20SHI5. Therefore, the specific characters used in the result display 20SHRE and the ending background video can be seen from the specific area 20SHI5.

The characters used in the result display 20SHRE are larger than the characters used in the number of wins display 20SHK, as shown in Figures 11-10 (A), (B), and (E). The result display 20SHRE only needs to be displayed in at least the first display area 20SH51, and may be displayed across the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52, as shown in Figure 11-10 (E).

(The setting is hinted at in the ending background video)
FIG. 11-11 is a diagram showing an example of a setting suggestion presentation using an ending background video.

As described above, the pachinko game machine 1 is configured so that the probability of winning a jackpot changes according to the setting value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing shown in FIG. 6, the probability of winning a jackpot changes by using a display result judgment table according to the setting value. The setting value has six levels from "1" to "6", with "1" being the lowest ball payout rate, and the ball payout rate increases as the value increases in the order of "1", "2", "3", "4", "5", and "6". In other words, when the setting value is set to "1", the player has the lowest advantage, and the advantage increases stepwise as the value increases in the order of "2", "3", "4", "5", and "6". In this embodiment, the setting values "1" to "3" are referred to as "low settings", and the setting values "4" to "6" are referred to as "high settings".

The pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the third form of the characteristic section 20SH is configured to be able to change the setting value, and is also configured to be able to display the above-mentioned ending background image as a setting suggestion effect that suggests the setting value. For example, when the setting value is set low, the effect control CPU 120 displays an ending background image of cherry blossom snow falling from the back of the screen, as shown in FIG. 11-11(A). On the other hand, when the setting value is set high, the effect control CPU 120 displays an ending background image of large amounts of cherry blossom snow falling from cherry trees in full bloom on the left and right, as shown in FIG. 11-11(B).

Note that the setting suggestion by the ending background video does not have to definitively suggest whether the setting value is set to low or high. For example, when the setting value is set to low, the ending background video shown in FIG. 11-11(B) may be displayed at a sufficiently low rate, and when the setting value is set to high, the ending background video shown in FIG. 11-11(A) may be displayed at a sufficiently low rate.

The ending background video may be presented in a different manner depending on whether the setting is "6," which is the most advantageous setting for the player, or not. The ending background video may be presented in a different manner depending on whether the setting is an odd number or an even number.

Here, the aforementioned consecutive wins in the reserved lottery notification is one of several types of notification effects that predict the probability of a jackpot, but the setting suggestion effect based on the consecutive wins in the reserved lottery notification is not executed.

As described above, the pachinko game machine 1 relating to the third form of the characteristic part 20SH can be controlled to a jackpot game state. The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with an image display device 5. The display area of the image display device 5 includes a first display area 20SH51 and a second display area 20SH52 which is an area around the first display area 20SH51 and is narrower than the first display area 20SH51. The image display device 5 can display a jackpot background image corresponding to the progress of a round game in the jackpot game state in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52. The image display device 5 can also display an ending background image corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state in at least the first display area 20SH51. In addition, when the ending background image is not displayed, the image display device 5 can display an effect image 20SHE of a reserved consecutive ball announcement, which suggests that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state in response to the stored reserved information, in front of the background image during the jackpot in the second display area 20SH52. In addition, the image display device 5 can display an acquisition number display 20SHK relating to the number of awarded prize balls in front of the background image during the jackpot in the second display area 20SH52. In addition, when the ending background image is displayed, the image display device 5 can display a result display 20SHRE, which notifies the total number of awarded prize balls in the jackpot game state, in front of the ending background image at least in the first display area 20SH51. The characters used in the result display 20SHRE are larger in size than the characters used in the acquisition number display 20SHK. The characters used in the number of wins display 20SHK and the result display 20SHRE include specific characters that form a specific area surrounded by lines that form the characters. The specific characters used in the number of wins display 20SHK cannot be seen from the specific area, and the background video during a jackpot and the effect video 20SHRE of the pending consecutive win notice cannot be seen from the specific area. On the other hand, the specific characters used in the result display 20SHRE can be seen from the specific area 20SHI5, where the ending background video can be seen.

According to this configuration, the winning number display 20SHK including the specific characters can be displayed appropriately in relation to the background image during a jackpot or the effect image 20SHE of the consecutive wins in reserve, and the result display 20SHRE including the specific characters can be displayed appropriately in relation to the ending background image. For example, when a player checks the number of winning balls in a jackpot game state, the winning number display 20SHK is displayed in small characters in the narrow second display area 20SH52 and may overlap with the effect image 20SHE of the consecutive wins in reserve. If the background image during a jackpot or the effect image 20SHE of the consecutive wins in reserve can be seen from the specific area of the specific characters, the specific characters may appear to be different from the original characters. However, by making the background image during a jackpot or the effect image 20SHE of the consecutive wins in reserve invisible from the specific area of the specific characters, the specific characters can be accurately recognized. On the other hand, the result display 20SHRE is displayed in large letters in the wide first display area 20SH51 and does not overlap with the effect image 20SHE of the pending consecutive win notice. Therefore, by making the ending background image visible from a specific area of the specific letters, it is possible to show at least a little of the ending background image in the prominent display position of the first display area 20SH51.

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be set to one of multiple setting values "1" to "6" that have different jackpot winning probabilities. The image display device 5 can display an ending background image in a manner that suggests the set value that has been set. The effect image 20SHRE of the reserved consecutive win notification is one of multiple types of notification effects that predict the jackpot reliability, but does not execute a setting suggestion effect based on the reserved consecutive win notification.

With this configuration, there is a possibility that a setting suggestion effect will be executed using the ending background video, which increases the significance of the ending background video being visible from the specific area 20SHI5 of the specific characters used in the result display 20SHRE.

As described above, the image display device 5 starts displaying the ending background video at a predetermined brightness. Then, at timing T3 when the image display device 5 starts displaying the result display 20SHRE, the image display device 5 pauses and displays the ending background video at a specific brightness that is darker than the predetermined brightness, and displays the result display 20SHRE at a brightness that is brighter than the specific brightness.

This configuration can improve the visibility of the result display 20SHRE.

(Explanation regarding the fourth form of the characteristic portion 20SH)
Next, a gaming machine relating to the fourth embodiment of the characteristic part 20SH will be described with reference to Figs. 11-12 to 11-16. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the fourth embodiment of the characteristic part 20SH, a remaining number display relating to the remaining number of ST times in a probability variable state and a remaining number notification display which notifies the predetermined number of times when the remaining number indicated by the remaining number display becomes a predetermined number can be displayed. The characters used in the remaining number display and the remaining number notification display include specific characters which form a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters. The specific characters used in the remaining number display are not visible from the specific area against the background image during ST. The specific characters used in the remaining number notification display are visible from the specific area against the background image during ST.

The following describes the pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the fourth form of the characteristic part 20SH having such features. Note that descriptions of parts similar to those described above will be omitted.

(Background art related to the fourth aspect of the characteristic portion 20SH)
11 and 12 are diagrams showing background art related to the fourth aspect of the characteristic portion 20SH.

Pachinko gaming machines are basically designed so that when comparing advantageous states for the player, such as a special state, time-saving state, or jackpot gaming state, with the normal state, the period during which the player plays in the advantageous state is longer than the period during which the player plays in the normal state.

For example, in a pachinko game machine, when the upper limit number of reserved information is stored, regardless of whether it is the first special game or the second special game, a shortened variation with a shorter variable display time is more likely to be executed than when the upper limit number of reserved information is not stored. And in a special state with time-saving control, the variable winning ball device changes to an open state, making it easier for winning to occur than in the normal state, so shortened variation is more likely to be executed than in the normal state, and it is possible to progress the game faster than in the normal state. Therefore, the period during which play is performed in the normal state is longer than the period during which play is performed in a special state with time-saving control.

The probability variable control ends when either of the following conditions is met first after the end of the jackpot game state: a specified number of STs of special game are played, or the display result of the variable display becomes "jackpot." Therefore, even if the display result of the variable display does not become "jackpot" while the probability variable control is being performed, if the specified number of STs of special game are played, the probability variable control ends. The specified number of STs is, for example, 70 times.

In addition, by performing the time-saving control, the variable display time of the special pattern in the special pattern game is shortened compared to when the time-saving control is not performed. The time-saving control ends when either of the following conditions is met first: the special pattern game is played a specified number of times after the end of the jackpot game state, or the display result of the variable display becomes a "jackpot." Therefore, even if the display result of the variable display does not become a "jackpot" when the time-saving control is being performed, the time-saving control ends when the special pattern game has been played a specified number of times. The specified number of times is, for example, 70 times.

The set value for the number of STs and the set value for the number of time-savings may be different values.

When a pachinko game machine is controlled to a high probability state, it may display a remaining number display regarding the remaining number of ST times in the high probability state, as shown in FIG. 11-12(A). In the example shown in FIG. 11-12(A), the remaining number display shows "30 times remaining" since there are 30 ST times remaining.

The remaining number of times display uses numbers to show the remaining number of ST times, and characters other than numbers to make it clear that it is a remaining number of times display. The numbers used to show the remaining number of times are, for example, Arabic numerals, Roman numerals, Chinese numerals, etc. The remaining number of times display shown in Figure 11-12 (A) uses the characters "remaining" and "times" to make it clear that it is a remaining number of times display, and the number "30" to show the remaining number of ST times.

Some characters used to display the remaining number of times also form special regions.

When the pachinko machine is controlled to the high probability state, as shown in FIG. 11-12(A), the ST background image corresponding to the high probability state is displayed over the entire display area of the image display device. In the example shown in FIG. 11-12(A), the ST background image is displayed in a manner that makes it appear as if the screen is cracked. The ST background image is an image that is displayed behind the other images displayed on the image display device in the high probability state. The ST background image contains many lines that represent animation pictures and effects.

The remaining number of times display is displayed small in an edge area that does not impede the visibility of the variable display of the decorative pattern in the display area of the image display device. When the background image during ST changes over time, the lines of the background image during ST may overlap the back of the remaining number of times display. Furthermore, when a specific character is displayed in the remaining number of times display, such as the Arabic numeral "0" surrounded by a two-dot chain line in Figure 11-12 (A), if the lines of the image during ST overlap the back of a specific area of the specific character, the lines of the background image during ST may blend in with the lines that form the specific character, causing the specific character to appear different from its original character.

Figure 11-12 (B) is an enlarged view of the Arabic numeral "0" surrounded by a two-dot chain line in Figure 11-12 (A). In the example shown in Figures 11-12 (A) and (B), the lines of the background image during ST are superimposed on the back of the specific area of the specific character "0" used to display the remaining number of plays, and the lines of the background image during ST are assimilated with the lines that form the specific character "0", so that the specific character "0" appears as the Arabic numeral "8" rather than the Arabic numeral "0".

In this way, if the characters displaying the remaining number of times are mistaken for characters that are different from the actual characters, the remaining number of ST times in the special probability state cannot be accurately recognized. However, for example, it is difficult to adjust the position of the lines in the background image during ST so that the lines do not overlap with specific areas of specific characters.

The fourth form of characteristic part 20SH was made in consideration of this background, and the fourth form of characteristic part 20SH will be described below.

(Display of remaining number of times in the fourth embodiment of the characteristic portion 20SH)
11-13 are diagrams showing an example of a display form of Arabic numerals used to display the remaining number of times in the fourth embodiment of the characteristic portion 20SH.

In the fourth form of the characteristic part 20SH, the specific region 20SHI6 of the Arabic numerals used to display the remaining number of times, which correspond to the specific characters "0", "4", "6", "8", and "9", is displayed in a non-transparent display mode different from the display mode of the lines 20SHS6 forming the characters. In the example shown in FIG. 11-13, the color of the lines 20SHS6 of the Arabic numerals used to display the remaining number of times is "black", while the specific region 20SHI6 of the specific characters "0", "4", "6", "8", and "9" is displayed in "white", and when it is displayed in front of the ST background image, the ST background image cannot be seen from the specific region 20SHI6.

In addition, the display mode of the specific region 20SHI6 is not limited to a color different from the color of the lines 20SHS6 that form the character, but may be a display mode that has a high contrast with the display mode of the lines 20SHS6 that form the character to the extent that the specific region 20SHI6 and the lines 20SHS6 that form the character can be accurately distinguished.

For example, the color of the specific region 20SHI6 may be a color that has a high contrast with the color of the lines 20SHS6 that form the characters. In that case, the brightness of the specific region 20SHI6 may be a brightness that has a low contrast with the brightness of the lines 20SHS6 that form the characters. Also, in that case, the texture of the specific region 20SHI6 may be a texture that has a low contrast with the texture of the lines 20SHS6 that form the characters. Also, in that case, the texture of the specific region 20SHI6 may be a texture that has a low contrast with the texture of the lines 20SHS6 that form the characters.

Also, for example, the brightness of the specific region 20SHI6 may be a brightness that has a high contrast with the brightness of the lines 20SHS6 that form the characters. In that case, the color of the specific region 20SHI6 may be a color that has a low contrast with the color of the lines 20SHS6 that form the characters. Also, in that case, the texture of the specific region 20SHI6 may be a texture that has a low contrast with the texture of the lines 20SHS6 that form the characters. Also, in that case, the texture of the specific region 20SHI6 may be a texture that has a low contrast with the texture of the lines 20SHS6 that form the characters.

Also, for example, the texture of the specific region 20SHI6 may be a texture with high contrast to the texture of the lines 20SHS6 that form the characters. In that case, the color of the specific region 20SHI6 may be a color with low contrast to the color of the lines 20SHS6 that form the characters. In that case, the brightness of the specific region 20SHI6 may be a brightness with low contrast to the brightness of the lines 20SHS6 that form the characters. In that case, the texture of the specific region 20SHI6 may be a texture with low contrast to the texture of the lines 20SHS6 that form the characters.

Also, for example, the texture of the specific region 20SHI6 may be a texture with high contrast relative to the texture of the lines 20SHS6 that form the characters. In that case, the color of the specific region 20SHI6 may be a color with low contrast relative to the color of the lines 20SHS6 that form the characters. Also, in that case, the brightness of the specific region 20SHI6 may be a brightness with low contrast relative to the brightness of the lines 20SHS6 that form the characters. Also, in that case, the texture of the specific region 20SHI6 may be a texture with low contrast relative to the texture of the lines 20SHS6 that form the characters.

Of the characters used to display the remaining number of times, numbers other than Arabic numerals to display the remaining number of ST times, and specific characters other than numerals to recognize that they are displaying the remaining number of times, are displayed in a display mode in which the specific area is not transparent and is different from the display mode of the lines that form the characters, as in the Arabic numerals shown in Figures 11-13.

(Display of remaining number of times in the fourth embodiment of the characteristic portion 20SH)
FIG. 11-14 is a diagram showing an example of a display form of Arabic numerals used for the remaining number notification display in the fourth embodiment of the characteristic part 20SH.

When the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display reaches a predetermined number of times, the pachinko gaming machine 1 displays a remaining number of times notification display to notify the predetermined number of times.

The remaining number of times notification display uses numbers to display the specified number of remaining times when the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display reaches a specified number, and characters other than numbers to recognize that it is a remaining number of times notification display. The numbers used in the remaining number of times notification display are, for example, Arabic numerals, Roman numerals, Chinese numerals, etc.

The remaining number of times display is displayed in multiple types with different transparency, as shown in FIG. 11-14. The remaining number of times display shown in FIG. 11-14(A) is a display type in which the line areas forming the characters of the remaining number of times display are not transparent, and the background of the characters is not visible through the line areas. The remaining number of times display shown in FIG. 11-14(B) is a display type in which the line areas forming the characters of the remaining number of times display are transparent, and the background of the characters is visible through the line areas.

The remaining number of times notification is also displayed in three-dimensional characters. In a display mode in which the background of the characters is not visible, the line area forming the three-dimensional characters includes area 20SHS71 representing the characters and area 20SHS72A representing the depth of the three-dimensional characters. In a display mode in which the background of the characters is visible through, area 20SHS71 representing the characters is displayed through transparency, so that the area that was displayed as area 20SHS72A representing the depth of the three-dimensional characters in a display mode in which the background of the characters is not visible is displayed as area 20SHS72B representing the bottom surface of the three-dimensional characters.

Among these three-dimensional characters, there are some that correspond to specific characters. In the example shown in FIG. 11-14, the specific regions 20SHI7 of the three-dimensional Arabic numerals used to display the remaining number of plays, which correspond to specific characters "0," "4," "6," "8," and "9," are displayed in a transparent display mode, and when they are displayed in front of the background image during ST, the background image during ST can be seen from the specific regions 20SHI7.

As shown in FIG. 11-14, the specific area 20SHI7 of the remaining number of times display differs when the remaining number of times display is displayed in a non-transparent manner and when it is displayed in a transparent manner. In the example shown in FIG. 11-14, the remaining number of times display is displayed in a non-transparent manner, and the area of the lines forming the characters includes the area 20SHS72A that represents the depth of the characters, so the area surrounded by the inner outline of the area 20SHS71 that represents the characters and the outline of the area 20SHS72A that represents the depth of the characters located on the inner side of that becomes the specific area 20SHI7. On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 11-14(B), the remaining number of times display is displayed in a transparent manner, and the area 20SHS71 that represents the characters is displayed transparently, so the area surrounded by the inner outline of the area 20SHS72B that represents the bottom surface of the three-dimensional characters becomes the specific area 20SHI7.

(Appearance of remaining number display in the fourth embodiment of characteristic portion 20SH)
Fig. 11-15(A) is a diagram showing how the remaining number display appears in the fourth embodiment of the characteristic part 20SH. Fig. 11-15(B) is an enlarged view of the part of the Arabic numeral "0" surrounded by a two-dot chain line in Fig. 11-15(A).

In the example shown in Figures 11-15 (A) and (B), the lines of the background image during ST are superimposed on the back of the specific area of the specific character "0" used in the remaining number display 20SHST, but because specific area 20SHI6 is displayed in "white," the background image during ST cannot be seen from specific area 20SHI6. Therefore, in specific area 20SHI6, it does not blend in with the lines 20SHHS2 of the background image during ST, and the specific character "0" can be accurately recognized as the Arabic numeral "0."

In addition to the remaining number of times display 20SHST, the image display device 5 also displays the number of times acquired 20SHK, the right-hit display 20SHM, and the probability of winning 20SHRU to notify the player that they are in a probability of winning state. Like the remaining number of times display 20SHST, the number of times acquired 20SHK, the right-hit display 20SHM, and the probability of winning 20SHRU are also displayed small in the edge area that does not obstruct the visibility of the decorative patterns in the display area of the image display device 5.

The characters used in the number of wins display 20SHK, right-hit display 20SHM, and probability variable display 20SHRU may include characters of the same type as those used in the remaining number of times display 20SHST and the remaining number of times notification display, and characters of a different type from those used in the remaining number of times display 20SHST and the remaining number of times notification display. In this embodiment, the characters used in the remaining number of times display 20SHST and the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH are "numbers," "hiragana," and "kanji," as shown in FIG. 11-17. On the other hand, the probability variable display 20SHRU uses "alphabet," which is a different type of character from those used in the remaining number of times display 20SHST and the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH. The number of wins display 20SHK uses "numbers", which are the same type of characters as those used in the remaining number of wins display 20SHST and the remaining number of wins notification display 20SHSTH, and "katakana", which is a different type of character from those used in the remaining number of wins display 20SHST and the remaining number of wins notification display 20SHSTH. The right-hit display 20SHM uses "hiragana" and "kanji", which are the same type of characters as those used in the remaining number of wins display 20SHST and the remaining number of wins notification display 20SHSTH, and "symbols", which are a different type of character from those used in the remaining number of wins display 20SHST and the remaining number of wins notification display 20SHSTH.

Some characters used in the acquisition count display 20SHK, right-hit display 20SHM, and probability bonus display 20SHRU are specific characters, regardless of the type of character. The specific regions of the specific characters used in the acquisition count display 20SHK, right-hit display 20SHM, and probability bonus display 20SHRU, like the specific region 20SHI6 of the remaining number display 20SHST, are non-transparent and are displayed in a different display mode from the line 20SHS6 that forms the characters, so the background image during ST cannot be seen from the specific region 20SHI6.

(Example of the remaining number display and remaining number notification display in the fourth embodiment of the characteristic portion 20SH)
Fig. 11-16 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the relationship between the variable display and the remaining number of times notification display in the fourth form of the characteristic part 20SH. Fig. 11-17 is a diagram showing an example of the remaining number of times display and the remaining number of times notification display in the first form of the characteristic part 20SH.

As shown in FIG. 11-17, the performance control CPU 120 displays the remaining number of times display 20SHST in the second display area 20SH51 of the image display device 5. As shown in FIG. 11-17(A) to (B), the performance control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the number indicating the remaining number of ST times in the remaining number of times display 20SHST each time a variable display is executed.

As shown in Figures 11-16 and 11-17 (A) to (B), when the variable display is started so that the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display becomes a predetermined number, the performance control CPU 120 starts displaying the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH, which notifies the predetermined number of times, in a non-transparent display mode. For example, when the variable display is started so that the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display becomes 60, 50, 40, 30, 20, or 10, the performance control CPU 120 starts displaying the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH, which notifies the number of times, in a non-transparent display mode. As shown in Figures 11-17 (B) to (D), the characters used in the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH are larger in size than the characters used in the remaining number of times display 20SHST. In the example shown in FIG. 11-17, when the remaining number of times display 20SHSTH is displayed, the number of times of winning display 20SHK is also displayed, but the remaining number of times display 20SHSTH is displayed in a display area different from the display area in which the number of times of winning display 20SHK is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 11-16 and FIG. 11-17(B) to (C), when a first period has elapsed since the display of the remaining number of times display 20SHSTH was started, the performance control CPU 120 changes the display mode of the remaining number of times display 20SHSTH from a non-transparent display mode to a transparent display mode. Then, as shown in FIG. 11-16 and FIG. 11-17(B) to (E), when a second period has elapsed since the display mode of the remaining number of times display 20SHSTH was changed, the performance control CPU 120 ends the display of the remaining number of times display 20SHSTH.

Here, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can perform variable display based on multiple types of variation patterns with different variable display times.

The remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is a display for notifying the user of a specified number of times when the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display becomes a specified number. Therefore, if the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is displayed across multiple variable displays, the user may misinterpret the remaining number of ST times.

Therefore, in this embodiment, in order to be able to end the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH in one variable display, the total period of the first period in which the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is displayed in a non-transparent display mode and the second period in which the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is displayed in a transparent display mode is set to be shorter than the variable display time of the type of variation pattern with the shortest variable display time.

With this configuration, as shown in FIG. 11-16, in a variable display where the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display becomes a predetermined number, regardless of the type of variable display based on the variation pattern that is executed, the display of the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH can be terminated in that one variable display.

Here, the first display region 20SH51 includes the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left," "middle," and "right" described above. Meanwhile, the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is displayed in front of the identification information in at least each of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the first display region 20SH51. Therefore, if the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed while the non-transparent remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is displayed, there is a possibility that the display result cannot be recognized.

In this embodiment, therefore, in order to allow the display result of the variable display to be recognized, the first period during which the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH is displayed in a non-transparent display mode is set to end before the timing at which the display result of the variable display of the type of variation pattern with the shortest variable display time is derived.

With this configuration, as shown in Figure 11-16, in a variable display where the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number display becomes a predetermined number of times, the display result of the variable display can be appropriately recognized regardless of the type of variable display based on the variation pattern.

In the example shown in FIG. 11-17(D), the remaining number of times indicator 20SHSTH is displayed when the display result of the variable display is derived, but since the display mode of the remaining number of times indicator 20SHSTH changes to a transparent display mode, the identification information in the background of the characters can be seen from the area of the lines that form the characters of the remaining number of times indicator 20SHSTH.

In this embodiment, the change in the display mode of the remaining number of times indicator 20SHSTH is controlled so that the remaining number of times indicator 20SHSTH is displayed in a transparent display mode when the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed. However, if a pseudo consecutive performance is executed in a variable display where the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times indicator 20SHST is a predetermined number, the remaining number of times indicator 20SHSTH may be displayed in a transparent display mode when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative pattern.

As described above, the pachinko game machine 1 relating to the fourth form of the characteristic part 20SH can be controlled to a probability variable state accompanied by time-saving control that allows the game to proceed faster than in a normal state. The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with an image display device 5. The display area of the image display device 5 includes a first display area 20SH51 and a second display area 20SH52 that is an area around the first display area 20SH51 and is narrower than the first display area 20SH51. The image display device 5 can display a background image during ST in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52. The image display device 5 can also display a remaining number display 20SHST relating to the remaining number of STs in the probability variable state in front of the background image during ST in the second display area 20SH52. In addition, the image display device 5 can display, at least in the first display region 20SH51, a remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH for notifying a predetermined number of times when the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display 20SHST becomes a predetermined number, on the front side of the background image during ST. The remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH for notifying "60" when the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display 20SHST becomes 60, and the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH for notifying "50" when the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display 20SHST becomes 50, as the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH for notifying the predetermined number of times when the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display 20SHST becomes 50. The remaining number of times display 20SHST is updated every time the variable display is executed. On the other hand, the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH ends its display when a predetermined period has elapsed since the display started. The characters used in the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH are larger in size than the characters used in the remaining number of times display 20SHST. The characters used in the remaining number display 20SHST and the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH include a specific area surrounded by lines that form the characters. The specific characters used in the remaining number display 20SHST are not visible from the specific area 20SHI6 against the background image during ST. On the other hand, the specific characters used in the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH are visible from the specific area 20SHI7 against the background image during ST.

With this configuration, the remaining number display 20SHST and the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH, which include specific characters, can be displayed appropriately in relation to the background image during ST. For example, when a player checks the remaining number of STs in a probability variable state, the player checks the remaining number display 20SHST, but the remaining number display 20SHST is displayed in small characters in the narrow second display area 20SH52, and if the background image during ST is visible from the specific area 20SHI6 of the specific characters, there is a possibility that the specific characters will appear to be different characters from the original characters. However, by making the background image during ST invisible from the specific area 20SHI6 of the specific characters, the specific characters can be accurately recognized. Furthermore, the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is not displayed at all times like the remaining number of times display 20SHST, but is displayed only for a specified period of time to alert the player that the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display 20SHST has reached a specified number, and since it is displayed in large letters in the wide first display area 20SH51, by making the background image during ST visible from the specific area 20SHI7 of the specific letters, it is possible to show at least a little of the background image during ST in the prominent display position of the first display area 20SH51.

As described above, the image display device 5 can display the characters used in the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH in a transparent display mode in which the image on the back is visible through the lines that form the characters.

This configuration allows the player to see the background image while the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is displayed, preventing unnecessary stress from being caused to the player.

As described above, the first display area 20SH51 includes the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. The image display device 5 can display the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH on the front side of the decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R.

This configuration allows the player to see the variable display of the decorative symbols while the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is displayed, so that unnecessary stress is not caused to the player.

Also, as described above, when the display result of the variable display is being derived and displayed, the image display device 5 displays the remaining number of times indication display 20SHSTH in a transparent display mode.

With this configuration, even if the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed while the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH is displayed, the display result of the variable display can be recognized.

As described above, the image display device 5 can display the winning number display 20SHK relating to the number of prize balls awarded. The image display device 5 then displays the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH in a display area different from the display area in which the winning number display 20SHK is displayed.

This configuration can prevent the visibility of the number of wins display 20SHK from being reduced due to the remaining number of wins notification display 20SHSTH being displayed.

In the above explanation, a pachinko gaming machine 1 was shown as the gaming machine, but the present invention can also be applied to a slot machine capable of playing a game in which medals are inserted, a predetermined bet amount is set, multiple types of symbols are rotated in response to the player's operation of the control lever, and when the symbols are stopped in response to the player's operation of the stop button, a specific combination of symbols is produced, and a predetermined number of medals is paid out to the player.

(Explanation of Means Related to Characteristic Part 20SH)
(1) A gaming machine according to a first embodiment of the characteristic portion 20SH is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player (e.g., the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state, etc.), and is equipped with a display means (e.g., the pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with an image display device 5, etc.), and the display area of the display means includes a first display area and a second display area that is a region around the first display area and is narrower than the first display area (e.g., the display area of the image display device 5 includes a first display area 20SH51 and a second display area 20SH52 that is a region around the first display area 20SH51 and is narrower than the first display area 20SH51, etc.), and the display means is capable of displaying a background image corresponding to the advantageous state in the first display area and the second display area (e.g., the image display device 5 displays a background image corresponding to the jackpot gaming state in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52, etc.). and the like), and in the second display area, the image display device 5 is capable of displaying, in front of the background image during a jackpot, an amount display relating to the amount of gaming value that has been granted (for example, the image display device 5 is capable of displaying, in front of the background image during a jackpot, an acquired number display 20SHK relating to the number of prize balls granted), and at least in the first display area, in front of the background image, as notification displays for notifying that the amount of gaming value granted has reached a predetermined amount, a first notification display for notifying that the amount of gaming value granted has reached a first predetermined amount and a second notification display for notifying that the amount of gaming value granted has reached a second predetermined amount (for example, the image display device 5 is capable of displaying, in front of the background image during a jackpot, at least in the first display area 20SH51, an acquired number display 20SHK relating to the number of prize balls granted in a jackpot gaming state As the winning number notification display 20SHKH, when the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state reaches "1000", the winning number notification display "over 1000" can be displayed, and when the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state reaches "2000", the winning number notification display "over 2000" can be displayed), the awarded amount display is updated every time a gaming value is awarded in the advantageous state (for example, the winning number notification display 20SHK is updated every time a gaming ball is paid out as a prize ball in the jackpot game state), the notification display ends when a specific period has elapsed since the start of the display (for example, the winning number notification display 20SHKH ends when a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the display), and the characters used in the notification display are characters of a size larger than the characters used in the awarded amount display (for example, the winning number notification display 20SH the characters used for the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH are larger in size than the characters used for the acquisition number display 20SHK), the characters used for the award amount display and the notification display include specific characters in which a specific area is formed surrounded by lines forming the characters (for example, the characters used for the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH include specific characters in which a specific area is formed surrounded by lines forming the characters), the specific characters used for the award amount display are such that the background image is not visible from the specific area (for example, the specific characters used for the acquisition number display 20SHK are such that the background image during a jackpot is not visible from the specific area), and the specific characters used for the notification display are such that the background image is visible from the specific area (for example, the specific characters used for the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH are such that the background image during a jackpot is visible from the specific area).

According to this configuration, the amount of game value and the notification display including the specific characters can be displayed appropriately in relation to the background image. For example, when a player checks the amount of game value that has been awarded in an advantageous state, the player checks the amount of game value that has been awarded. However, the amount of game value that has been awarded is displayed in small characters in the narrow second display area, and if the background image is visible from the specific area of the specific characters, the specific characters may appear different from the original characters. However, by making the background image invisible from the specific area of the specific characters, the specific characters can be accurately recognized. In addition, the notification display is not displayed at all times in an advantageous state like the amount of game value that has been awarded, but is displayed only for a specified period of time to congratulate the player when the amount of game value that has been awarded in an advantageous state reaches a specified amount. Since the notification display is displayed in large characters in the wide first display area, by making the background image visible from the specific area of the specific characters, it is possible to show at least a little of the background image in the conspicuous display position of the first display area.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above, the specific characters may include the Arabic numerals 0, 4, 6, 8, and 9 (for example, the specific characters may include the Arabic numerals "0", "4", "6", "8", and "9").

This configuration allows the display of the amount of the grant and the notification using Arabic numerals to be displayed appropriately in relation to the background image.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above, the display means may display the notification display when the award amount display is displayed (for example, the image display device 5 may display the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH when the acquisition number display 20SHK is displayed).

With this configuration, even when the notification display is displayed, the amount of gaming value awarded during the jackpot gaming state can be accurately ascertained from the award amount display.

(4) In any of the gaming machines described above in (1) to (3), the display means may be capable of displaying the notification display in the first display area and the second display area (for example, the image display device 5 may be capable of displaying the winning number notification display 20SHKH in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52).

This configuration makes the notification display more noticeable to the player, and can conveniently notify the player that the amount of gaming value awarded in an advantageous state has reached a predetermined amount.

(5) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (4) above, the display means is capable of displaying a specific display relating to the advantageous state in front of the background image in the second area (for example, the image display device 5 is capable of displaying a jackpot display 20SHO, a decorative pattern display 20SHZ, a round number display 20SHR, and a right-hit display 20SHM in front of the background image during a jackpot in the second display area 20SH52, etc.), and the characters used in the specific display include characters of the same type as the characters used in the award amount display and the notification display, and characters of a different type from the characters used in the award amount display and the notification display, and both types of characters include specific characters in which a specific area is formed surrounded by lines forming the characters (for example, a jackpot display The characters used in the display 20SHO, the decorative pattern display 20SHZ, the number of rounds display 20SHR, and the right-hit display 20SHM include characters of the same type as the characters used in the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH, and characters of a different type than the characters used in the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH, and both types of characters include specific characters that form a specific area surrounded by lines that form the characters, etc.), and the specific characters used in the specific displays are such that the background image cannot be seen from the specific area (for example, the specific characters used in the jackpot display 20SHO, the decorative pattern display 20SHZ, the number of rounds display 20SHR, and the right-hit display 20SHM are such that the background image cannot be seen from the specific area during a jackpot, etc.).

This configuration allows specific characters to be accurately recognized even in specific displays.

(6) The gaming machine according to the second form of the characteristic part 20SH is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (e.g., can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state, etc.), and is equipped with a display means (e.g., the pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with an image display device 5, etc.), and the display area of the display means includes a first display area and a second display area that is a region around the first display area and is narrower than the first display area (e.g., the display area of the image display device 5 includes a first display area 20SH51 and a second display area 20SH52 that is a region around the first display area 20SH51 and is narrower than the first display area 20SH51, etc.), and the display means is capable of displaying a background image corresponding to the advantageous state in the first display area and the second display area (e.g., the image display device 5 displays a jackpot background image corresponding to the jackpot gaming state in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52, and the like), the second display area is capable of displaying, in front of the background image, an amount display relating to the amount of gaming value that has been awarded (for example, the image display device 5 is capable of displaying, in front of the background image during a jackpot, an acquired number display relating to the number of prize balls awarded, in the second display area 20SH52), and at least in the first display area, in front of the background image, a first notification display notifying that the amount of gaming value awarded has reached a first predetermined amount and a second notification display notifying that the amount of gaming value awarded has reached a second predetermined amount (for example, the image display device 5 is capable of displaying, in front of the background image during a jackpot, an acquired number display notifying that the number of prize balls awarded in a jackpot gaming state has reached a "round number" number, in front of the background image during a jackpot, at least in the first display area 20SH51, When the number of prize balls awarded in a game state reaches "1000", an acquisition number notification display of "over 1000" can be displayed, and when the number of prize balls awarded in a jackpot game state reaches "2000", an acquisition number notification display of "over 2000" can be displayed, etc.), the acquisition amount display is updated each time gaming value is awarded in the advantageous state (for example, the acquisition number display is updated each time gaming balls are paid out as prize balls in a jackpot game state, etc.), the notification display ends when a specific period has elapsed since the start of its display (for example, the acquisition number notification display ends when a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of its display), and the characters used in the notification display are larger in size than the characters used in the acquisition amount display (for example, the characters used in the acquisition number notification display are larger in size than the characters used in the acquisition number display). The characters used in the award amount display and the notification display include specific characters in which a specific area is formed surrounded by lines that form the characters (for example, the characters used in the acquisition number display and the acquisition number notification display include specific characters in which a specific area is formed surrounded by lines that form the characters), the specific characters used in the award amount display are such that the background image is not visible from the specific area (for example, the specific characters used in the acquisition number display are such that the background image during a jackpot is not visible from the specific area), and the specific characters used in the notification display have a smaller ratio of the size of the specific area to the size of the line area that forms the characters than the specific characters used in the award amount display (for example, the specific characters used in the acquisition number notification display have a smaller ratio of the size of the specific area to the size of the line area that forms the characters than the specific characters used in the acquisition number display).

With this configuration, the award amount display and notification display including the specific characters can be displayed appropriately in relation to the background image. For example, when a player checks the amount of gaming value awarded in an advantageous state, the player checks the award amount display, but the award amount display is displayed in small characters in the narrow second display area, and if the background image is visible from the specific area of the specific characters, there is a possibility that the specific characters will appear different from their original characters. However, by making the background image invisible from the specific area of the specific characters, the specific characters can be accurately recognized.

(7) In the gaming machine of (6) above, the characters used in the notification display may be three-dimensional characters (for example, the characters used in the winning number notification display may be three-dimensional characters), and the line area forming the three-dimensional characters may include an area that represents the characters and an area that represents the depth of the characters.

This configuration can enhance the dramatic effect of the notification display.

(8) In the gaming machine of (6) or (7) above, the specific characters used in the notification display may be configured so that the background image is visible from the specific area (for example, the specific characters used in the winning count notification display may be configured so that the background image is visible from the specific area 20SHI3 during a jackpot).

With this configuration, the notification display is not displayed at all times in an advantageous state like the awarded amount display, but is displayed only for a specified period of time to congratulate the player when the amount of gaming value awarded in an advantageous state reaches a specified amount, and is displayed in large letters in the wide first display area, and the ratio of the size of the specific area to the size of the line area that forms the letters is small, so not only can the risk of misidentifying the letters be reduced even if the background image is visible from the specific area of the specific letters be reduced, but the presentation effect can be enhanced by making the background image visible from the specific area of the specific letters.

(9) In the gaming machine of (6) or (7) above, the specific characters used in the notification display may be such that the background image cannot be seen from the specific area (for example, the specific characters used in the winning count notification display in variant 1 may be such that the background image during a jackpot cannot be seen from specific area 20SHI4).

With this configuration, the winning number notification display is not displayed at all times during a jackpot game state like the winning number display, but is displayed only for a specified period of time to congratulate the player when the number of prize balls awarded during a jackpot game state reaches the "kiriban" number, and is displayed in large letters in the wide first display area 20SH51, and since the ratio of the size of the specific area to the size of the line area that forms the letters is small, not only can the sense of incongruity be reduced even if the background image is not visible from the specific area of the specific letters, but by making the background image not visible from the specific area of the specific letters, the letters can be prevented from being misinterpreted.

(10) In any of the gaming machines described in (1) to (9) above, the display means may be capable of changing the state of the notification display to a specific state (for example, the image display device 5 may be capable of displaying the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH by stopping it in the first display area 20SH51, etc.), and when the specific period of time has elapsed since the state of the notification display changed to the specific state, the state of the notification display may be changed to a state different from the specific state (for example, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH has been framed in to its stopping position in the first display area 20SH51, the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH may be framed out, etc.).

This configuration can improve the presentation effect when the notification display is displayed.

(11) In the gaming machine of (10) above, the characters used in the notification display are displayed in a plurality of different colors in the line areas forming the characters (for example, the characters used in the acquisition number notification display in variant example 2 relating to the second form of characteristic part 20SH are displayed in a three-color gradation in the line areas forming the characters), and the display means is capable of changing the combination of the plurality of colors over time (for example, the image display device 5 changes the form of the characters used in the acquisition number notification display in the order of display form A → display form B → display form C → display form D → display form E). The display may be changed over time in the order of display mode E → display mode F → display mode G → display mode A → ...), and the speed at which the combination of the multiple types of colors changes may be different when the notification display is displayed in the specific mode and when it is displayed in a mode different from the specific mode (for example, the speed at which the display mode of the acquisition number notification display changes may be different when the acquisition number notification display is stopped in the first display area 20SH51 of the image display device 5 and when the acquisition number notification display is moving (frame-in/frame-out)).

With this configuration, the display mode changes depending on the movement speed of the notification display, enhancing the dramatic effect.

(12) The gaming machine according to the fourth form of the characteristic part 20SH is a gaming machine that can be controlled to a special state in which the game can proceed faster than the normal state (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be controlled to a probability variable state with time-saving control in which the game can proceed faster than the normal state, etc.), and is equipped with a display means (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with an image display device 5, etc.), and the display area of the display means includes a first display area and a second display area that is a region around the first display area and is narrower than the first display area (for example, the display area of the image display device 5 includes a first display area 20SH51 and a second display area 20SH52 that is a region around the first display area 20SH51 and is narrower than the first display area 20SH51, etc.), and the display means is capable of displaying a background image corresponding to the special state in the first display area and the second display area (for example, the image display device 5 is capable of displaying a background image corresponding to the special state in the first display area and the second display area). In the second display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52, a background image during ST can be displayed, etc.), and in the second display area, a variation count display relating to the number of variations in the special state can be displayed in front of the background image (for example, the image display device 5 can display a remaining number display 20SHST relating to the remaining number of STs in the special state in front of the background image during ST in the second display area 20SH52), and at least in the first display area, in front of the background image, as a number notification display for notifying the number of variations when the value of the variation count display becomes a predetermined value, a first number notification display for notifying the number of variations when the value of the variation count display becomes a first predetermined value, and a second number notification display for notifying the number of variations when the value of the variation count display becomes a second predetermined value (for example, the image display device 5 can display a remaining number display 20SHST relating to the remaining number of STs in the special state in front of the background image during ST in at least the first display area 20SH51). When the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display 20SHST reaches a predetermined number, a remaining number of times display 20SHSTH that notifies the predetermined number of times can be displayed, such as a remaining number of times display 20SHSTH that notifies "60" when the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display 20SHST reaches 60, and a remaining number of times display 20SHSTH that notifies "50" when the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display 20SHST reaches 50), the variable number of times display is updated every time the variable display is executed (for example, the remaining number of times display 20SHST is updated every time the variable display is executed), the number of times display is terminated when a specific period of time has elapsed since the start of display (for example, the remaining number of times display 20SHSTH is terminated when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of display), and characters used for the number of times display are characters of a size larger than the characters used for the variable number of times display (for example, the remaining number of times display 20SHSTH is The characters used for the remaining number of times display 20SHST are larger than the characters used for the remaining number of times display 20SHST, etc.), the characters used for the variable number of times display and the number of times notification display include specific characters that form a specific area surrounded by lines that form the characters (for example, the characters used for the remaining number of times display 20SHST and the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH include a specific area surrounded by lines that form the characters, etc.), the specific characters used for the variable number of times display are such that the background image is not visible from the specific area (for example, the specific characters used for the remaining number of times display 20SHST are such that the background image during ST is not visible from the specific area 20SHI6, etc.), and the specific characters used for the number of times notification display are such that the background image is visible from the specific area (for example, the specific characters used for the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH are such that the background image during ST is visible from the specific area 20SHI7, etc.).

According to this configuration, the change count display and the number of times notification display including the specific characters can be displayed appropriately in relation to the background image. For example, when a player checks the change count in a special state, the change count display is displayed in small characters in the narrow second display area, and if the background image is visible from the specific area of the specific characters, the specific characters may appear different from the original characters. However, by making the background image invisible from the specific area of the specific characters, the specific characters can be accurately recognized. In addition, the number of times notification display is not displayed at all times like the change count display, but is displayed only for a specific period in order to alert the player that the remaining number of times indicated by the change count display is a specified number, and since it is displayed in large characters in the wide first display area, by making the background image visible from the specific area of the specific characters, it is possible to show at least a little of the background image in the conspicuous display position of the first display area.

(13) In the gaming machine of (12) above, the display means is capable of displaying the characters used in the remaining number of times display in a transparent manner in which the image behind the characters can be seen through the line area forming the characters (for example, the image display device 5 is capable of displaying the characters used in the remaining number of times display 20SHSTH in a transparent display manner in which the image behind the characters can be seen through the line area forming the characters).

This configuration allows the player to see the background image while the count notification display is displayed, preventing unnecessary stress from being caused to the player.

(14) In the gaming machine of (13) above, the first display area includes a variable display area in which the identification information is variably displayed (for example, the first display area 20SH51 includes the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R for "left," "middle," and "right"), and the display means is capable of displaying the number of times notification display in front of the identification information in the variable display area (for example, the image display device 5 is capable of displaying the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH in front of the decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R).

With this configuration, the variable display of the identification information can be seen while the count notification display is being displayed, so that unnecessary stress is not caused to the player.

(15) In the gaming machine of (14) above, when the identification information is displayed in a recognizable manner, the display means displays the number of times notification display in the transparent manner (for example, when the display result of the variable display is displayed in a derived manner, the image display device 5 displays the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH in a transparent display manner, etc.).

With this configuration, even if the identification information is displayed in a recognizable manner while the count notification display is being displayed, the display result of the variable display can be recognized.

(16) In any of the gaming machines (12) to (15) above, the display means is capable of displaying an amount of the gaming value that has been awarded (for example, the image display device 5 is capable of displaying an acquired number display 20SHK that indicates the number of prize balls that have been awarded), and displays the number of times notification display in a display area different from the display area in which the amount of the award display is displayed (for example, the image display device 5 displays a remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH in a display area different from the display area in which the acquired number display 20SHK is displayed).

This configuration can prevent the visibility of the dispensed amount display from decreasing due to the number of times the notification display is displayed.

(17) The gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the characteristic part 20SH is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (e.g., the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state, etc.), and is equipped with a display means (e.g., the pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with an image display device 5, etc.), and the display area of the display means includes a first display area and a second display area that is an area around the first display area and is narrower than the first display area (e.g., the display area of the image display device 5 includes a first display area 20SH51 and a second display area 20SH52 which is an area around the first display area 20SH51 and is narrower than the first display area 20SH51), and the display means is capable of displaying a first background video corresponding to the advantageous state progressing in the first display area and the second display area (for example, the image display device 5 displays, in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52, a background image during a jackpot corresponding to the progress of the game, etc.), and a second background image corresponding to the end of the advantageous state, at least in the first display area, can be displayed (for example, the image display device 5 can display an ending background image corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, at least in the first display area 20SH51, etc.), and when the second background image is not being displayed, a specific suggestion image giving a suggestion regarding the progress of the game can be displayed in front of the first background image in the second display area (for example, when an ending background image is not being displayed, the image display device 5 can display an effect image 20SHE of a consecutive win notice in a reserve, which suggests that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state in accordance with the reserved information stored, in front of the background image during a jackpot, in the second display area 20SH52, etc.), and It is possible to display an amount display relating to the amount of value awarded (for example, the image display device 5 is capable of displaying an acquired number display 20SHK relating to the number of awarded prize balls in front of the background image during a jackpot in the second display area 20SH52, etc.), and when the second background image is displayed, it is possible to display a result notification display in front of the second background image at least in the first display area when the second background image is displayed, which notifies the amount of game value awarded in the advantageous state (for example, the image display device 5 is capable of displaying a result display 20SHRE in front of the ending background image at least in the first display area 20SH51 when the ending background image is displayed), and characters used in the result notification display are characters of a size larger than characters used in the amount display (for example, characters used in the result display 20SHRE are larger than characters used in the acquired number display 20SHK, etc.). The characters used in the award amount display and the result notification display include specific characters that form a specific area surrounded by lines that form the characters (for example, the characters used in the acquisition number display 20SHK and the result display 20SHRE include specific characters that form a specific area surrounded by lines that form the characters), the specific characters used in the award amount display are such that the first background image and the previous specific suggestion image are not visible from the specific area (for example, the specific characters used in the acquisition number display 20SHK are such that the background image during a jackpot and the effect image 20SHRE of the pending consecutive win notice are not visible from the specific area), and the specific characters used in the result notification display are such that the second background image is visible from the specific area (for example, the specific characters used in the result display 20SHRE are such that the ending background image is visible from the specific area 20SHI5).

According to this configuration, the display of the amount of the game value provided including the specific character can be displayed in a suitable manner in relation to the first background image and the specific suggestion image, and the display of the result including the specific character can be displayed in a suitable manner in relation to the second background image. For example, when a player checks the amount of the game value provided in an advantageous state, the display of the amount of the game value provided checks the display of the amount of the game value provided. However, since the display of the amount of the game value provided is displayed in small characters in the narrow second display area and may overlap with the specific suggestion image, if the first background image or the specific suggestion image is visible from the specific area of the specific character, the specific character may appear to be different from the original character. However, by making the background image during a jackpot and the specific suggestion image invisible from the specific area of the specific character, the specific character can be accurately recognized. On the other hand, since the display of the result is displayed in large characters in the wide first display area and does not overlap with the specific suggestion image, by making the second background image visible from the specific area of the specific character, it is possible to show at least a little of the second background image in the conspicuous display position of the first display area.

(18) The gaming machine of (17) above is provided with a setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of different setting values with different degrees of advantage for the player (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is capable of setting one of a plurality of different setting values "1" to "6" with different odds of winning a jackpot, etc.), and the display means is capable of displaying the second background video in a manner suggesting the setting value set by the setting means (for example, the image display device 5 is capable of displaying an ending background video in a manner suggesting the set value), and the specific suggestion video is one of a plurality of suggestion videos that suggest the advantageous state, and does not suggest the setting value set by the setting means (for example, the effect video 20SHRE of the consecutive wins in reserve is one of a plurality of preview effects that predict the reliability of a jackpot, but the setting suggestion effect due to the consecutive wins in reserve is not executed, etc.).

With this configuration, the second background image may suggest a setting value, which increases the significance of the second background image being visible from a specific area of the specific characters used to display the result notification.

(19) In the gaming machine of (17) or (18) above, the display means starts displaying the second background video at a predetermined brightness (for example, the image display device 5 starts displaying the ending background video at a predetermined brightness, etc.), and at the timing when the display of the result notification display starts, the second background video is paused and displayed at a specific brightness darker than the predetermined brightness, and the result notification display is displayed at a brightness brighter than the specific brightness (for example, the image display device 5 pauses and displays the ending background video at a specific brightness darker than the predetermined brightness, and displays the result notification display at a brightness brighter than the specific brightness, at the timing T3 when the display of the result display 20SHRE starts).

This configuration can improve the visibility of the result notification display.

(Explanation regarding characteristic portion 19SH)
Next, the gaming machine related to the characteristic part 19SH will be described with reference to Figs. 12-1 to 12-6. The image display device 5 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the characteristic part 19SH can display an acquisition number display related to the number of prize balls awarded when the game ball enters the big prize opening in a big win gaming state, and an expected acquisition number display related to the total number of prize balls scheduled to be awarded in a big win gaming state. The image display device 5 can also display an effect display that makes the expected acquisition number display invisible or difficult to see when an over-winning occurs. Then, the image display device 5 updates the value of the expected acquisition number display when the expected acquisition number display becomes invisible or difficult to see due to the effect display. Meanwhile, the performance control CPU 120 starts the over-winning performance before the expected acquisition number display becomes invisible or difficult to see due to the effect display.

The following describes the pachinko gaming machine 1 with respect to the characteristic part 19SH having such features. Note that the description of the same parts as those described above will be omitted.

(Presentation action when a win occurs during a round game)
Fig. 12-1 is a diagram showing an example of a presentation operation when a winning occurs during a round of play. Fig. 12-2 is a diagram showing an example of the positional relationship of a plurality of display layers on which various displays are displayed.

As shown in Fig. 12-1 (A), when the CPU 120 for controlling the performance of this embodiment is controlled to a jackpot gaming state, it displays, as the winning number display 20SHK, a winning number display 20SHK1 relating to the number of prize balls awarded when a gaming ball enters a big prize opening in the jackpot gaming state, and a planned number of prize balls display 20SHK2 relating to the total number of prize balls to be awarded in the jackpot gaming state. In the example shown in Fig. 12-1 (A), the winning number display 20SHK is displayed in the form of a fraction, such as "135/1500," with the winning number display 20SHK1 with "135" in the numerator and the planned number of prize balls display 20SHK2 with "1500" in the denominator, separated by a central dividing line "/." In other words, the winning number display 20SHK shown in Figure 12-1 (A) indicates that the number of prize balls awarded when the game ball entered the big prize opening during a big win game state was 135 balls, and that the total number of prize balls expected to be awarded during a big win game state is 1,500 balls.

In this embodiment, the number of winnings display 20SHK is also displayed in the second display area 20SH52 of the image display device 5, which also displays the jackpot display 20SHO, the decorative pattern display 20SHZ, the number of rounds display 20SHR, and the right-hit display 20SHM. In addition, the image display device 5 displays a background image during a jackpot, in which the character 20SHCA appears, in response to the progress of a round of play in the jackpot game state. Note that the background image during a jackpot is displayed on a display layer located behind the display layer on which the number of winnings display 20SHK is displayed, as shown in FIG. 12-2.

When a prize ball is awarded as a result of a game ball entering the big prize opening during a big win game state, the presentation control CPU 120 updates the value of the number of winnings display 20SHK according to the presentation mode shown in Figures 12-1 (B) to (F).

When a prize ball is awarded as a result of a game ball entering the big prize opening during a big win game state, the performance control CPU 120 first starts displaying an effect display in a display area close to the position of the special variable prize ball device 7 that forms the big prize opening, as shown in FIG. 12-1 (B). Here, in this embodiment of the pachinko game machine 1, the special variable prize ball device 7 is located in the lower right position of the image display device 5 as seen by the player. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 12-1 (B), the effect display 20SHEF that imitates a tornado is displayed in the lower right corner of the display area of the image display device 5. At this timing, the number of winnings display 20SHK is visible, but the value of the number of winnings display 20SHK has not been updated.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 moves the effect display 20SHEF towards the display area of the acquisition number display 20SHK, as shown in FIG. 12-1(C). In the example shown in FIG. 12-1(C), since the acquisition number display 20SHK is displayed at the top of the display area of the image display device 5, the effect display 20SHEF, which starts to be displayed at the bottom right edge of the display area, moves towards the top of the display area. Also, in the example shown in FIG. 12-1(C), the size of the effect display 20SHEF increases as it moves. Note that even at this timing, the acquisition number display 20SHK is visible, but the value of the acquisition number display 20SHK has not been updated.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 moves the effect display 20SHEF to the display area of the acquisition number display 20SHK, as shown in FIG. 12-1 (D). Here, the effect display 20SHEF is displayed on a display layer that is arranged in front of the display layer on which the acquisition number display 20SHK is displayed, as shown in FIG. 12-2. Therefore, by moving the effect display 20SHEF to the display area of the acquisition number display 20SHK, the acquisition number display 20SHK becomes invisible. Note that at this timing, although the acquisition number display 20SHK is invisible, the value of the acquisition number display 20SHK has not been updated, as shown in FIG. 12-2 (D).

In the example shown in FIG. 12-1 (D), the effect display 20SHEF has been moved to the display area of the acquisition number display 20SHK, making the acquisition number display 20SHK invisible, but a portion of the acquisition number display 20SHK may be visible to the extent that the value of the acquisition number display 20SHK cannot be recognized. In other words, the acquisition number display 20SHK may be difficult to see by moving the effect display 20SHEF to the display area of the acquisition number display 20SHK.

Then, as shown in Figures 12-1 (D) to (E) and 12-2 (D) to (E), the performance control CPU 120 updates the value of the acquisition number display 20SHK1 when the acquisition number display 20SHK is not visible or is difficult to see by displaying the effect display 20SHEF in the display area of the acquisition number display 20SHK. Here, in this embodiment, as described above, when a game ball enters the big prize opening, 15 game balls are paid out as prize balls. Therefore, in the example shown in Figures 12-1 (D) to (E) and 12-2 (D) to (E), the value of the acquisition number display 20SHK1 is updated from "135" to "150".

Then, the performance control CPU 120 ends the display of the effect display 20SHEF, as shown in FIG. 12-1 (F). In the example shown in FIG. 12-1 (F), the display of the effect display 20SHEF has ended, making the acquisition number display 20SHK visible, and it can be confirmed that the value of the acquisition number display 20SHK1 has been updated.

According to this presentation mode, first, the effect display 20SHEF is displayed, thereby drawing attention to the effect display 20SHEF. Then, as the effect display 20SHEF approaches the display area of the acquisition number display 20SHK, attention to the acquisition number display 20SHK can be increased. Then, by updating the value of the acquisition number display 20SHK1 when the acquisition number display 20SHK is not visible or is difficult to see due to the effect display 20SHEF, when the display of the effect display 20SHEF ends and the acquisition number display 20SHK becomes visible, it can be conveniently recognized that the value of the acquisition number display 20SHK1, which was the focus of attention, has been updated.

(Example of the performance when an over-winning occurs)
Fig. 12-3 is a diagram showing an example of a presentation operation when an over-winning occurs Fig. 12-4 is a diagram showing an example of a positional relationship between a plurality of display layers on which various displays are displayed.

In this embodiment of the pachinko game machine 1, when the tenth game ball enters the large prize opening during one round of play, the large prize opening is controlled to be closed, but in this case, a so-called over-winning may occur, in which the eleventh game ball enters the large prize opening following the tenth game ball. When an over-winning occurs, the presentation control CPU 120 updates the value of the winning number display 20SHK in a presentation mode as shown in FIG. 12-3.

When an over-winning occurs, the performance control CPU 120 first starts displaying an effect display in the display area close to the position of the special variable winning ball device 7 that forms the large winning opening, as shown in Figures 12-3 (A) to (B), in the same way as when the 10th winning occurs. In the example shown in Figure 12-3 (B), an effect display 20SHEF that resembles a tornado is displayed in the lower right corner of the display area of the image display device 5. At this time, the winning number display 20SHK is visible, but the value of the winning number display 20SHK has not been updated.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 moves the effect display 20SHEF towards the display area of the acquisition number display 20SHK, as shown in FIG. 12-3(C). In the example shown in FIG. 12-3(C), since the acquisition number display 20SHK is displayed at the top of the display area of the image display device 5, the effect display 20SHEF, which starts to be displayed at the bottom right edge of the display area, moves towards the top of the display area. Also, in the example shown in FIG. 12-3(C), the size of the effect display 20SHEF increases as it moves. Note that even at this timing, the acquisition number display 20SHK is visible, but the value of the acquisition number display 20SHK has not been updated.

Also, as shown in FIG. 12-3(C), the presentation control CPU 120 starts an over-winning presentation to notify the occurrence of an over-winning before the effect display 20SHEF reaches the display area of the winning number display 20SHK, in other words, before the winning number display 20SHK becomes invisible or difficult to see due to the effect display 20SHEF. In the example shown in FIG. 12-3(C), an over-winning presentation video featuring the character CHCB is displayed on the image display device 5.

The performance control CPU 120 can execute a performance using another performance device as the over winning performance. For example, as shown in FIG. 12-3(C), the performance control CPU 120 outputs an over winning sound from speakers 8L and 8R that is different from the sound that occurs when a prize is normally won, as the over winning performance. In the example shown in FIG. 12-3(C), the over winning sound "beep beep beep" is output from speakers 8L and 8R. The performance control CPU 120 can also light up the attacca lamp 9c in a different light emission pattern from the sound that occurs when a prize is normally won, as the over winning performance.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 moves the effect display 20SHEF to the display area of the acquisition number display 20SHK, as shown in FIG. 12-3 (D). Here, the effect display 20SHEF is displayed on a display layer that is arranged in front of the display layer on which the acquisition number display 20SHK is displayed, as shown in FIG. 12-4. Therefore, by moving the effect display 20SHEF to the display area of the acquisition number display 20SHK, the acquisition number display 20SHK becomes invisible. Note that at this timing, although the acquisition number display 20SHK is invisible, the value of the acquisition number display 20SHK has not been updated, as shown in FIG. 12-4 (D).

In the example shown in FIG. 12-3(D), the effect display 20SHEF has been moved up to the display area of the acquisition number display 20SHK, making the acquisition number display 20SHK invisible, but a portion of the acquisition number display 20SHK may be visible to the extent that the value of the acquisition number display 20SHK cannot be recognized. In other words, the acquisition number display 20SHK may be difficult to see by moving the effect display 20SHEF up to the display area of the acquisition number display 20SHK.

Then, as shown in Figures 12-3(D)-(E) and 12-4(D)-(E), the performance control CPU 120 updates the values of the acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the planned acquisition number display 20SHK2 when the acquisition number display 20SHK is not visible or is difficult to see by displaying the effect display 20SHEF in the display area of the acquisition number display 20SHK. In the example shown in Figures 12-3(D)-(E) and 12-4(D)-(E), the value of the acquisition number display 20SHK1 is updated from "150" to "165", and the value of the planned acquisition number display 20SHK2 is updated from "1500" to "1515".

Then, the performance control CPU 120 ends the display of the effect display 20SHEF, as shown in FIG. 12-3(F). In the example shown in FIG. 12-3(F), the end of the display of the effect display 20SHEF makes the acquisition count display 20SHK visible, and it can be confirmed that the values of the acquisition count display 20SHK1 and the expected acquisition count display 20SHK2 have been updated.

According to this presentation mode, first, the effect display 20SHEF is displayed, thereby drawing attention to the effect display 20SHEF. Then, as the effect display 20SHEF approaches the display area of the acquisition number display 20SHK, attention to the acquisition number display 20SHK can be increased. Then, by updating the values of the acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the planned acquisition number display 20SHK2 when the acquisition number display 20SHK is not visible or is difficult to see due to the effect display 20SHEF, when the display of the effect display 20SHEF ends and the acquisition number display 20SHK becomes visible, it can be conveniently recognized that the values of the acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the planned acquisition number display 20SHK2, which were the focus of attention, have been updated.

In particular, when an over-winning occurs, not only the value of the winning number display 20SHK1 but also the value of the expected winning number display 20SHK2 are updated, so that the player can easily recognize that the total number of prize balls expected to be awarded in the jackpot game state has increased by the number of prize balls awarded due to the over-winning.

After the display of the effect display 20SHEF has ended, the performance control CPU 120 ends the over winning performance, as shown in FIG. 12-3(G). In the example shown in FIG. 12-3(G), the display of the over winning performance image that was displayed on the image display device 5 as the over winning performance ends, and the background image during the jackpot in which the character 20SHCA appears is displayed.

(Setting suggestion based on over-winning effect)
As described above, the pachinko game machine 1 is configured such that the probability of winning a jackpot changes according to the setting value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing shown in FIG. 6, the probability of winning a jackpot changes by using a display result judgment table according to the setting value. The setting value has six levels from "1" to "6", with "1" being the lowest ball payout rate, and the ball payout rate increases as the values increase in the order of "1", "2", "3", "4", "5", and "6". That is, when the setting value is set to "1", the player has the lowest advantage, and the advantage increases stepwise as the values increase in the order of "2", "3", "4", "5", and "6". In this embodiment, the setting values "1" to "3" are referred to as "low settings", and the setting values "4" to "6" are referred to as "high settings".

In this embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the setting value can be changed, and the above-mentioned over winning effect can be executed as a setting suggestion effect that suggests the setting value. For example, when the setting value is set low, the effect control CPU 120 displays an over winning effect video featuring the character CHCB on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 12-5 (A), and outputs an over winning sound "beep beep" from the speakers 8L and 8R. On the other hand, when the setting value is set high, the effect control CPU 120 displays an over winning effect video featuring the character CHCC on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 12-5 (B), and outputs an over winning sound "beep beep" from the speakers 8L and 8R.

The setting suggestion effect using the over winning effect does not have to definitively suggest whether the setting value is a low setting or a high setting. For example, when the setting value is a low setting, the over winning effect shown in FIG. 12-5(B) may be executed at a sufficiently low rate, and when the setting value is a high setting, the over winning effect shown in FIG. 12-5(A) may be executed at a sufficiently low rate.

The over prize presentation may be different depending on whether the setting is "6", which is the most advantageous setting for the player, or not. The over prize presentation may be different depending on whether the setting is an odd number or an even number.

(If there are rounds where the required number of prizes are not awarded and rounds where over-winning occurs)
FIG. 11-6 is a diagram showing an example of a presentation operation in a case where there is a round in which the specified number of winning balls are not won and a round in which an over-winning ball occurs in the characteristic portion 19SH.

As mentioned above, the jackpot game state will remain open until either a specified period of time has elapsed or the number of game balls that have entered the jackpot opening reaches a specified number, whichever comes first.

In the example shown in Figures 12-6 (A) to (B), nine winning balls were won in one round of play, but 29.5 seconds passed before the number of game balls entering the big winning hole reached 10, and the first round of play ended, and the second round of play began. In this example, in response to the nine winning balls during one round of play, the winning number display 20SHK, "135/1500", is displayed, as shown in Figure 12-6 (B). Note that in this example, we will explain that the total number of winning balls expected to be awarded in the big win play state in which 10 rounds of play are executed, is 1500.

Then, suppose that in the second round of play, the number of game balls that enter the big prize opening reaches 10, ending the second round of play, and that in the third round of play, 10 prize balls are also won. In other words, suppose that 300 prize balls are awarded in the second and third rounds of play. In this case, the value of the winning number display 20SHK1 is updated from "135" at the start of the second round to "435", as shown in Figure 12-6 (C).

And let us say that an over win occurs during the 3rd round of play. In that case, as shown in FIG. 12-6 (D), the display of the effect display 20SHEF starts, and while the effect display 20SHEF is moving, the over win performance is executed.

As shown in FIG. 12-6 (E), the effect display 20SHEF makes the acquired number display 20SHK invisible or difficult to see, but when the acquired number display 20SHK is invisible or difficult to see, the value of the acquired number display 20SHK is updated. Then, as shown in FIG. 12-6 (F), when the display of the effect display 20SHEF ends, the acquired number display 20SHK becomes visible. In this example, the value of the acquired number display 20SHK1 is updated from "435" to "450", and the value of the expected number of acquisitions display 20SHK2 is updated from "1500" to "1515".

And then, in each of the 4th to 10th rounds, the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening reaches 10, and the round play for that round ends. In that case, the value of the winning number display 20SHK1 is updated from "450" at the start of the 4th round to "1500", as shown in FIG. 12-6 (G).

When all 10 rounds of play are completed, an ending presentation is executed as shown in FIG. 12-6 (H), and the result display 20SH announces that the total number of winning balls awarded during the jackpot play state is 1,500.

In this example, the total number of prize balls expected to be awarded in a jackpot game state in which 10 rounds of round play are played is 1500 balls, but because over-winning occurred in 3 rounds of round play, the final value of the expected winning number display 20SHK2 is "1515". However, because there were only 9 winning balls in 1 round of round play, the final value of the winning number display 20SHK1 is "1500" instead of "1515".

According to this embodiment, if there are rounds in which the specified number of winning balls is not won and rounds in which an over-winning occurs, the value of the winning number display 20SHK1 will be less than the value of the expected winning number display 20SHK2, so by checking the final winning number display 20SHK, it is easy to see that there were rounds in which the specified number of winning balls was not won and rounds in which an over-winning occurred.

Figure 11-7 shows another example of the presentation action when there is a round in which the specified number of winning balls are not won and an over-winning ball occurs in characteristic part 19SH.

In the example shown in Figures 12-7 (A) to (B), nine winning balls were won in one round of play, but 29.5 seconds passed before the number of game balls entering the big winning hole reached 10, and the first round of play ended, and the second round of play began. In this example, in response to the nine winning balls during the first round of play, the winning number display 20SHK, "135/1500", is displayed, as shown in Figure 12-7 (B). Note that in this example, it will be explained that the total number of winning balls expected to be awarded in the big win play state in which 10 rounds of play are executed, is 1500.

Then, suppose that in the second round of play, the number of game balls that enter the big prize opening reaches 10, ending the second round of play, and that in the third round of play, 10 prize balls are also won. In other words, suppose that 300 prize balls are awarded in the second and third rounds of play. In this case, the value of the winning number display 20SHK1 is updated from "135" at the start of the second round to "435", as shown in Figure 12-7 (C).

Let us now assume that an over win occurs during three rounds of play. In this case, as shown in FIG. 12-7 (D), the display of the effect display 20SHEF begins, and the over win performance is executed while the effect display 20SHEF is moving.

As shown in FIG. 12-7(E), the effect display 20SHEF makes the acquired number display 20SHK invisible or difficult to see, but when the acquired number display 20SHK is invisible or difficult to see, the value of the acquired number display 20SHK1 is updated. Then, as shown in FIG. 12-7(F), when the display of the effect display 20SHEF ends, the acquired number display 20SHK becomes visible. In this example, the value of the acquired number display 20SHK1 is updated from "435" to "450", but the value of the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 is not updated and remains at "1500".

And then, in each of the 4th to 10th rounds, the number of game balls that have entered the big prize slot reaches 10, and the round play ends. In that case, the value of the winning number display 20SHK1 is updated from "450" at the start of the 4th round to "1500", as shown in FIG. 12-7 (G).

When all 10 rounds of play are completed, an ending presentation is executed as shown in FIG. 12-7 (H), and the result display 20SH announces that the total number of winning balls awarded during the jackpot play state is 1,500.

In this example, the total number of prize balls expected to be awarded in a jackpot game state in which 10 rounds of round play are played is 1500 balls, but although over-winning has occurred in 3 rounds of round play, the value of the final expected number of winning balls display 20SHK2 remains "1500". However, since there were only 9 winning balls in 1 round of round play, the value of the final number of winning balls display 20SHK1 is "1500".

According to this embodiment, when there is a round in which the specified number of winning balls is not won and a round in which an over-winning ball occurs, it is possible to prevent any sense of incongruity caused by the values of the winning number display 20SHK1 and the expected winning number display 20SHK2.

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the characteristic part 19SH can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with an image display device 5. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is also equipped with a special variable winning ball device 7 that can be changed between an open state in which the gaming ball can easily win a prize and a closed state in which the gaming ball cannot or has difficulty winning a prize. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is also equipped with a CPU 103 that can execute a round game in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed from a closed state to an open state and then changed to a closed state when it is controlled to a jackpot gaming state. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is also equipped with a presentation control CPU 120 that can execute an over-winning presentation when an over-winning occurs in one round game. The image display device 5 can display the winning number display 20SHK1, which indicates the number of prize balls awarded when the game ball enters the special variable winning ball device 7, and the expected winning number display 20SHK2, which indicates the total number of prize balls to be awarded in a jackpot game state. The image display device 5 can also display an effect display 20SHEF, which makes the expected winning number display 20SHK2 invisible or difficult to see, when an over-winning occurs. The image display device 5 updates the value of the effect display 20SHEF when the expected winning number display 20SHK2 is invisible or difficult to see due to the effect display 20SHEF. Meanwhile, the performance control CPU 120 starts the over-winning performance before the expected winning number display 20SHK2 is invisible or difficult to see due to the effect display 20SHEF.

This configuration makes it possible to reduce the sense of discomfort felt when the value of the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 is updated, compared to when the value of the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 is updated while the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 remains visible.

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is also equipped with speakers 8L and 8R. The performance control CPU 120 can execute over-winning performances using the image display device 5 and the speakers 8L and 8R.

This configuration can enhance the presentation effect of the over-winning effect.

As described above, when a game ball enters the special variable winning ball device 7, the image display device 5 starts displaying the effect display 20SHEF in a display area close to the special variable winning ball device 7, and moves the effect display 20SHEF to make the number of balls won display 20SHK1 and the number of balls expected to be won display 20SHK2 invisible or difficult to see.

With this configuration, the entry of the game ball into the special variable winning device 7 can be expressed by a display effect on the image display device 5, which can increase interest. In addition, the effect display 20SHEF makes it difficult or impossible to see not only the expected number of wins display 20SHK2 but also the number of wins display 20SHK1, so the feeling of discomfort can be more effectively suppressed.

As described above, the acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the planned acquisition number display 20SHK2 are visible when the effect display 20SHEF is moving, and become invisible or difficult to see when the effect display 20SHEF reaches the display area where the acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the planned acquisition number display 20SHK2 are displayed.

With this configuration, when the effect display 20SHEF approaches the display area in which the acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the planned acquisition number display 20SHK2 are displayed, the acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the planned acquisition number display 20SHK2 automatically come into view, so that attention to the effect display 20SHEF can also draw attention to the acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the planned acquisition number display 20SHK2 in their state before the values were updated.

As described above, the presentation control CPU 120 starts the over-winning presentation before the effect display 20SHEF reaches the display area in which the winning number display 20SHK1 and the expected winning number display 20SHK2 are displayed.

With this configuration, the over-winning effect can be executed to let the player know in advance that an over-winning has occurred, so it is possible to more effectively prevent discomfort from occurring when the expected number of wins display 20SHK2 is updated.

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be set to one of several different setting values "1" to "6" that have different jackpot winning probabilities. The image display device 5 can then execute an over-winning effect in a manner that suggests the set value that has been set.

This configuration can increase attention to the over-winning effects.

As described above, the presentation control CPU 120 ends the over prize presentation after the display of the effect display 20SHEF has ended.

With this configuration, the updated value of the expected number of wins display 20SHK2 becomes visible while the over-winning effect is continuing, so the sense of discomfort caused by the expected number of wins display 20SHK2 being updated can be more effectively suppressed.

(Modifications regarding the characteristic portion 19SH)
The gaming machine relating to the characteristic portion 19SH is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

For example, when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power outage or the like, the CPU 103 executes a process for when the power supply is stopped just before the machine becomes unable to operate due to the power supply being stopped. In this process for when the power supply is stopped, a process for turning on a backup flag indicating that data is to be backed up in the RAM 102, a process for protecting the data in the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes the addition of an error detection code and a process for backing up various data. The data that is backed up includes not only various data for progressing the game, but also the state of the backup flag and the error detection code. Even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power outage or the like, by executing such a process for when the power supply is stopped, the CPU 103 can continue playing the game before the power outage after the power is restored.

On the other hand, the presentation control CPU 120 does not back up the various data required to proceed with the presentation. Therefore, after the power outage is restored, the presentation control CPU 120 cannot continue the presentation based on the game information before the power outage.

For example, if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped during a round of play due to an unexpected power outage or the like, the presentation control CPU 120 will not execute a presentation corresponding to the round of play after the power outage is restored. In that case, the presentation control CPU 120 will not display the number of wins display 20SHK1 and the number of expected wins display 20SHK2 during the round of play after the power outage is restored, or will display the number of wins display 20SHK1 and the number of expected wins display 20SHK2 in a manner that does not display specific values such as "???/????". Furthermore, even if a win occurs during a round of play after the power outage is restored, the presentation control CPU 120 will not display the effect display 20SHEF because the image display device 5 has not executed a presentation corresponding to the round of play. On the other hand, if the performance control CPU 120 can determine that an over win has occurred in one round of play after the power outage is restored, it will not execute the over win performance using the image display device 5, but can execute the over win performance using the speakers 8L, 8R and the attacca lamp 9c. Note that the performance control CPU 120 can determine that an over win has occurred, for example, by a performance control command that notifies the player that an over win has occurred.

With this configuration, in a situation where the values of the number of wins display 20SHK1 and the number of expected wins display 20SHK2 cannot be confirmed after the power outage is restored, the effect display 20SHEF is not displayed to avoid any sense of incongruity, while if an over-winning occurs, this fact can be notified.

(Explanation of Means Related to Characteristic Part 19SH)
(1) The gaming machine according to the characteristic part 19SH is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state, etc.), and includes a display means (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with an image display device 5, etc.), a variable winning means that can be changed between a first state in which the gaming medium is easy to win a prize and a second state in which the gaming medium is impossible or difficult to win a prize (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a special variable winning ball device 7 that can be changed between an open state in which the gaming ball is easy to win a prize and a closed state in which the gaming ball is impossible or difficult to win a prize, etc.), and a lane that changes the variable winning means from the second state to the first state and then changes the variable winning means to the second state when the variable winning means is controlled to the advantageous state. The game machine is provided with a control means capable of executing a round game (for example, the pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a CPU 103 capable of executing a round game in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed from a closed state to an open state and then changed back to the closed state when the pachinko game machine 1 is controlled to a jackpot game state), and a specific effect execution means capable of executing a specific effect when more than a predetermined number of game media win in the variable winning means in one of the round games (for example, the pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a performance control CPU 120 capable of executing an over winning effect when an over winning occurs in one of the round games), and the display means displays the awarded game value awarded when the game media win in the variable winning means. and a second award amount display relating to the amount of gaming value to be awarded in the advantageous state (for example, the image display device 5 can display an acquired number display 20SHK1 relating to the number of prize balls awarded when a gaming ball enters the special variable winning ball device 7, and an expected number of awards display 20SHK2 relating to the total number of prize balls to be awarded in a jackpot gaming state), and can display a specific display that makes the second award amount display invisible or difficult to see when more than the predetermined number of gaming media have won in the variable winning means (for example, the image display device 5 can display an effect display that makes the expected number of awards display 20SHK2 invisible or difficult to see when an over-winning occurs). the image display device 5 updates the value of the effect display 20SHEF when the effect display 20SHEF makes the expected number to be won display 20SHK2 invisible or difficult to see), and the specific performance execution means starts the specific performance before the second award amount display becomes invisible or difficult to see due to the specific display (the performance control CPU 120 starts an over winning performance before the effect display 20SHEF makes the expected number to be won display 20SHK2 invisible or difficult to see),

This configuration makes it possible to reduce the sense of discomfort felt when the value of the second amount of provision display is updated, compared to when the value of the second amount of provision display is updated while the second amount of provision display remains visible.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above, a sound output means is provided (e.g., the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with speakers 8L and 8R, etc.), and the specific effect execution means is capable of executing, as the specific effect, an effect by the display means and an effect by the sound output means (e.g., the effect control CPU 120 is capable of executing, as an over winning effect, an effect by the image display device 5 and an effect by the speakers 8L and 8R, etc.).

This configuration can enhance the effect of specific performances.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above, when the gaming medium wins the variable winning means, the display means starts displaying the specific display in a display area close to the variable winning means, and moves the specific display to make the first award amount display and the second award amount display invisible or difficult to see (for example, when the gaming ball wins the special variable winning ball device 7, the image display device 5 starts displaying the effect display 20SHEF in a display area close to the special variable winning ball device 7, and moves the effect display 20SHEF to make the number of winnings display 20SHK1 and the number of expected winnings display 20SHK2 invisible or difficult to see, etc.).

With this configuration, the entry of the game ball into the variable winning means can be expressed by a display effect on the display means, which can increase interest. In addition, the specific display makes it impossible or difficult to see not only the second award amount display but also the first award amount display, so that the occurrence of a sense of incongruity can be more effectively suppressed.

(4) In the gaming machine of (3) above, the first and second award amount displays are visible when the specific display is moving, and become invisible or difficult to see when the specific display reaches the display area in which the first and second award amount displays are displayed (for example, the acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the planned acquisition number display 20SHK2 are visible when the effect display 20SHEF is moving, and become invisible or difficult to see when the effect display 20SHEF reaches the display area in which the acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the planned acquisition number display 20SHK2 are displayed, etc.).

With this configuration, when the specific display approaches the display area in which the first and second grant amount displays are displayed, the first and second grant amount displays automatically come into view, so that attention to the specific display can also draw attention to the first and second grant amount displays before their values were updated.

(5) In the gaming machine of (4) above, the specific effect execution means starts the specific effect before the specific display reaches the display area where the first award amount display and the second award amount display are displayed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 starts the over winning effect before the effect display 20SHEF reaches the display area where the number of winnings display 20SHK1 and the number of expected winnings display 20SHK2 are displayed).

With this configuration, the player can recognize in advance that a specific presentation has been executed and that more than a predetermined number of gaming media have been won in the variable winning means, which more effectively prevents the player from feeling uncomfortable when the second award amount display is updated.

(6) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (5) above, a setting means is provided that can set one of a plurality of different setting values with different degrees of advantage to the player (e.g., the pachinko gaming machine 1 can set one of a plurality of setting values "1" to "6" with different odds of winning a jackpot, etc.), and the specific effect execution means can execute the specific effect in a manner that suggests the setting value set by the setting means (e.g., the image display device 5 can execute an over-winning effect in a manner that suggests the set setting value, etc.).

This configuration can increase attention to specific performances.

(7) In the gaming machine of (5) above, the specific effect execution means ends the specific effect after the display of the specific display has ended (for example, the effect control CPU 120 ends the over winning effect after the display of the effect display 20SHEF has ended, etc.).

With this configuration, the updated value of the second award amount display becomes visible while the specific performance is continuing, so that the sense of discomfort caused by the second award amount display being updated can be more effectively suppressed.

(Other examples of transition to time-saving mode)
In addition, in the above-mentioned characteristic parts and modified examples, the transition to the time-saving state is always made via the big win state or the small win state in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is activated, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when a time-saving pattern is derived and displayed as a special pattern, the transition to the time-saving state may be made without activating the special variable winning ball device 7.

The time-saving symbols mentioned above may be part of the losing symbol or part of the small winning symbol.

In addition, when performing lottery processing for the derivation and display of time-saving symbols, the lottery may be performed using a random number dedicated to the lottery of time-saving symbols, or the lottery may be performed using a random number for other lotteries such as a lottery random number for a losing symbol, a lottery random number for a big win symbol, a lottery random number for a small win symbol, a random number for determining a big win lottery, or a lottery random number for a fall lottery.

These time-saving symbols may be of multiple types, and may be used in combination with other symbols, such as small win symbols and loss symbols. In this case, the small win symbol used in combination may determine whether or not to transition to the time-saving state. However, if a time-saving symbol is selected, no further lottery will be held to determine whether or not to transition to the time-saving state, and no lottery will be held to determine the number of times the time-saving state will be used.

In addition, when a lottery is held for the time-saving symbols, if the setting value can be changed, the probability of drawing the time-saving symbols does not change according to the setting value; in other words, the probability of drawing the time-saving symbols is the same for all setting values. However, the probability of drawing these time-saving symbols may be different for the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

In addition, the timing of obtaining the random number when drawing the time-saving pattern may be the timing of the winning entry into the starting hole, regardless of whether a dedicated random number is used or another random number is used.

In addition, when a lottery for a time-saving pattern is held, if a dedicated random number is used, the result of the lottery using the dedicated random number will be the winning value; if a small win pattern random number is used to hold the time-saving pattern, a specific small win pattern random number value will be the winning value; if a random number for a fall lottery judgment value is used to hold the time-saving pattern, the random number for the fall lottery judgment value will be the winning value; and in the case of a lottery using a structure, for example, a time-saving area is set inside the special variable winning ball device 7, and the passing of the game ball through the time-saving area will be the winning of the time-saving pattern.

When the time-saving symbol is selected using a structure and the small winning symbol is used in conjunction with the time-saving symbol, the number of times the time-saving state is displayed will not change depending on whether or not the time-saving area is passed through.

In addition, when drawing a lottery for the time-saving pattern, if a losing pattern random number is used to draw the time-saving pattern, a specific losing pattern random number value can be the winning value, and if a winning pattern random number is used to draw the time-saving pattern, a specific winning pattern random number value can be the winning value. However, when using these random numbers as the winning value, this is only possible for machines whose settings cannot be changed, since the settings can affect performance other than the probability of winning.

The timing for determining the result of the lottery for the time-saving symbol may be any time after the jackpot has been determined. The lottery for the time-saving symbol is not performed in the time-saving state or when the probability is high, regardless of the random number value used in the lottery, but is only performed in the low probability, low base state. However, if the time-saving symbol is derived and displayed when the game is already in the time-saving state, it may be possible to either reset the number of times the time-saving symbol is played or not draw a lottery, as long as this is determined for each gaming machine.

In addition, the number of times the time-saving symbol is displayed when it is derived can have multiple pre-determined times depending on the winning value and the game state. In addition, the conditions for granting the time-saving symbol can be different for each time-saving symbol.

In addition, when the number of time-saving patterns differs depending on the time-saving pattern, the lottery for allocating the time-saving pattern can be changed between the first special pattern and the second special pattern.

In addition, even when the same time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the number of time-saving times awarded may differ depending on the game state at that time. However, this must be determined in advance for the game state.

In addition, the lottery result for the time-saving pattern in a low-probability, low-base state can include the lottery result of "0 time-saving times."

Also, a lottery may be carried out to determine the symbol for the end of the time-saving period, and the number of times the time-saving period is to be repeated may be set to the number of times after the start of the time-saving period until the symbol for the end of the time-saving period is derived and displayed, or until the symbol for the big win is derived and displayed. In other words, the number of times the time-saving period is to be repeated may not be set, and may be unlimited in principle.

The number of time-saving times and the conditions for granting the time-saving state may be different between the time-saving state controlled by the time-saving symbol and the time-saving state controlled by the occurrence of a jackpot.

In addition, when a time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the timing at which the time-saving state is controlled is the point at which the symbol determination time for the time-saving symbol has elapsed. However, when a small win symbol random number is used to select the time-saving symbol, if a small win is won and the time-saving state is entered, the timing at which the time-saving state is controlled is the end of the small win operation.

In addition, in the case of a lottery using a structure, the timing at which the time-saving state is entered is the timing at which the operation of the structure ends in the game state in which the structure is operated.

In addition, in the case of a gaming machine that is controlled to a high-probability, low-base state for a prescribed number of variable displays after a jackpot, the machine may be in the high-probability, low-base state when the gaming center opens, and after the high-probability, low-base state has ended after a prescribed number of variable displays have been executed, the machine may be controlled to a time-saving state.

In addition, if a time-saving limiter function is installed, when a time-saving pattern is derived and displayed, the number of times for the time-saving limiter is updated. Also, the pattern confirmation time for the time-saving pattern may be different from the pattern confirmation time for other patterns.

The present invention is not limited to the above description. Furthermore, the specific configuration includes the above-mentioned embodiment and other examples described below, as well as modifications and additions that do not deviate from the gist of the present invention.

Furthermore, among the configurations shown in the embodiment and each modified example described above, and the configurations shown in the embodiment and each modified example described below, all or part of the configurations may be combined in any manner.

The above-mentioned and hereinafter-described embodiments disclosed herein should be considered as illustrative in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims, not by the above-mentioned and hereinafter-described descriptions, and is intended to include all modifications equivalent to and within the scope of the claims.

The gaming machine of the present invention is also a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result (e.g., the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state, etc.), and is equipped with a display means (e.g., the pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with an image display device 5, etc.), and the display area of the display means includes a first display area and a second display area that is an area around the first display area and is narrower than the first display area (e.g., the display area of the image display device 5 is a first display area 20SH51 and a second display area 20SH61). and a second display area 20SH52 which is a region around the first display area 20SH51 and is narrower than the first display area 20SH51, etc.), the display means is capable of displaying a background image corresponding to the advantageous state in the first display area and the second display area (for example, the image display device 5 is capable of displaying a background image corresponding to a jackpot gaming state in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52, etc.), and is capable of displaying an amount display relating to the amount of gaming value that has been granted in front of the background image in the second display area (for example, The image display device 5 is capable of displaying an acquired number display 20SHK relating to the number of awarded prize balls in front of a background image in the second display region 20SH52), and is capable of displaying, at least in the first display region, in front of the background image, as notification displays notifying that the amount of awarded gaming value has reached a predetermined amount, a first notification display notifying that the amount of awarded gaming value has reached a first predetermined amount, and a second notification display notifying that the amount of awarded gaming value has reached a second predetermined amount (for example, the image display device 5 is capable of displaying, at least in the first display region 20SH51, In the game, an acquired number notification display 20SHKH for notifying that the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state has reached the number of "round numbers" can be displayed on the front side of the background image, and when the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state reaches "1000 balls", an acquired number notification display of "over 1000" can be displayed, and when the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state reaches "2000 balls", an acquired number notification display of "over 2000" can be displayed, etc.), and the awarded amount display is updated every time a gaming value is awarded in the advantageous state (for example, The number display 20SHK is updated each time a game ball is paid out as a prize ball in a jackpot game state, etc.), the notification display ends when a specific period has elapsed since the start of display (for example, the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH ends when a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of display, etc.), and the characters used in the notification display are larger in size than the characters used in the award amount display (for example, the characters used in the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH are larger in size than the characters used in the acquisition number display 20SHK). and the like), the characters used in the award amount display and the notification display include specific characters in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters (for example, the characters used in the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH include specific characters in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters, etc.), the specific characters used in the award amount display are such that the background image cannot be seen from the specific area (for example, the specific characters used in the acquisition number display 20SHK are such that the background image cannot be seen from the specific area, etc.), and the specific characters used in the notification display are The specific characters displayed on the display 20SHKH are visible against the background image from the specific area (for example, the specific characters used in the winning number notification display 20SHKH are visible against the background image from the specific area), and the game device further includes a launching means capable of launching game media into the game area in response to a player's operation, and a guidance display means for displaying a guidance message by using an image display on the display means to prompt the player to launch the game media toward the second flow-down path out of a first flow-down path and a second flow-down path along which the game media can flow in the game area, and the guidance display includes a first guidance display and a second guidance display. The guidance display means displays the second guidance display during a predetermined period after the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, before the display of the name of the advantageous state, which is part of the start effect that notifies the start of control of the advantageous state, is completed, displays the first guidance display and continues the second guidance display after the display of the name of the advantageous state is completed, and during a period after the predetermined period, ends the first guidance display while continuing the second guidance display, and continues the second guidance display in a special state after the control of the advantageous state is completed.

This configuration allows the display including the specific text to be displayed appropriately in relation to the background image. Also, instructions encouraging the player to launch the game ball in a specific direction can be executed appropriately.

In other words, the background image cannot be seen from the specific area enclosed by the lines that form the characters, the characters used for the notification display are larger than the characters used for the award amount display, and the background image is visible from the specific area, so that the award amount display can be always easily confirmed despite being in small characters, while the notification display can display an indication that a specific amount has been reached in large characters without obscuring the background image, and by emphasizing the instruction to launch the game ball in a specific direction with the first and second guidance displays for a specific period of time after the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result, and then instructing the game ball to be launched in the specific direction by taking over from the first guidance display without taking over from the first guidance display, the instruction can be made not to be too annoying, and further, the second guidance display can be displayed first to modestly instruct the game ball to be launched in the specific direction, and then the name of the advantageous state can be recognized, and after recognition, the first guidance display can be used to firmly instruct the game ball to be launched in the specific direction. In other words, when installed in an amusement center, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that allows players to easily grasp the amount of gaming value that has been awarded, to recognize when a predetermined amount has been reached, and to easily understand the directions in which to launch the gaming ball when in an advantageous state.

Furthermore, as an example of a form of a gaming machine that can suitably display a display including specific characters in relation to a background image and can suitably execute instructions that encourage the player to launch a gaming ball in a specific direction, there is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of a variable display becoming a specific display result, and that includes a launching means that can launch a gaming medium into a gaming area in response to a player's operation, and a guidance display means that uses an image display to display guidance that encourages the player to launch the gaming medium toward the second flow-down path out of a first flow-down path and a second flow-down path along which the gaming medium can flow in the gaming area. , the guidance display includes a first guidance display and a second guidance display, and the guidance display means, during a predetermined period after the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, performs the second guidance display before the display of the name of the advantageous state, which is part of the start effect that notifies the start of control of the advantageous state, is completed, performs the first guidance display and continues the second guidance display after the display of the name of the advantageous state is completed, and during a period after the predetermined period, ends the first guidance display while continuing the second guidance display, and continues the second guidance display in a special state after the control of the advantageous state is completed. An example of an example of the form of these gaming machines will be described below as another example of the form.

<Explanation of characteristic part 075F>
Next, the gaming machine according to the characteristic feature 075F of this embodiment will be described with reference to Figs. 13-1 to 13-60.

[Configuration of the pachinko game machine 1 according to the characteristic part 075F]
This is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1 according to the characteristic part 075F of this embodiment. As shown in Fig. 13-1, the pachinko game machine 1 according to this characteristic part 075F is provided with a special variable winning ball device 075F007A instead of the special variable winning ball device 7 shown in Fig. 1. The special variable winning ball device 075F007A has a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see Fig. 13-4), and forms a large winning opening (hereinafter referred to as a normal large winning opening) that changes between an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door.

For example, the special variable winning ball device 075F007A has a large prize opening door in the space between the game board 2 located at the back of the pachinko game machine 1 and the glass door frame 3a located at the front side (player side) of the pachinko game machine 1, and this large prize opening door slides open and closes horizontally between the back and front sides of the pachinko game machine 1 to open the path for the game ball to the normal large prize opening. Specifically, when the solenoid 82 is in the off state, the large prize opening door slides to the front side of the pachinko game machine 1 to close the normal large prize opening, and the game ball cannot enter (pass) through the normal large prize opening. On the other hand, when the solenoid 82 is in the on state, the large prize opening door slides to the back side of the pachinko game machine 1 to open the normal large prize opening, and the game ball can easily enter the normal large prize opening.

When a gaming ball enters the regular large prize opening, it is detected by the count switch 23 as it passes through an area provided inside the regular large prize opening. When a gaming ball is detected by the count switch 23, a number of gaming balls corresponding to the detection (for example, 10 balls per detection) are paid out to the player as prize balls. When the number of gaming balls detected by the count switch 23 reaches an upper limit (for example, 10 balls), one round ends and the regular large prize opening is controlled to a closed state.

In the pachinko game machine 1, a V-variable winning ball device 075F007B is provided next to the special variable winning ball device 075F007A. The V-variable winning ball device 075F007B has a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 075F083 (see Figure 13-4), and forms a large winning opening (hereinafter referred to as a V-large winning opening) that can be switched between an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door.

For example, the special variable winning ball device 075F007B has a large winning port door in the space between the game board 2 and the glass door frame 3a, and this large winning port door slides open and closes horizontally between the back and front of the pachinko game machine 1, opening the path for the game ball to the V large winning port. Specifically, when the solenoid 075F083 is in the off state, the large winning port door slides to the front side of the pachinko game machine 1, closing the V large winning port and preventing the game ball from entering (passing through) the V large winning port. On the other hand, when the solenoid 075F083 is in the on state, the large winning port door slides to the back side of the pachinko game machine 1, opening the V large winning port and allowing the game ball to enter the V large winning port more easily.

The game ball that enters the V large prize opening is detected by the V prize opening switch 075F024 (see FIG. 13-4) as it passes through a specific area (also called the V prize opening area) provided inside the V large prize opening. When the game ball is detected by the V prize opening switch 075F024, the game state is controlled to a high probability state. In other words, in this embodiment, a V prize occurs on the condition that the game ball enters the V large prize opening during a round of the jackpot game state, and the game state is controlled to a high probability state. The normal large prize opening and the V large prize opening are collectively referred to as the large prize opening. The large prize opening is also referred to as an attacca.

The pachinko game machine 1 has a number of lamps on the game board 2. Specifically, in addition to the movable body lamp 9d provided on the movable body 32 and the attacca lamp 9c provided near the normal large prize opening and the V large prize opening, the pachinko game machine 1 also has an attacca upper lamp 075F009U provided above the attacca, a lower left lamp 075F009D provided at the lower left of the game board 2, a board right lamp 075F009F provided to the right of the image display device 5, and a board left lamp 075F009E provided to the left of the image display device 5.

The movable body lamp 9d illuminates the characters (for example, the title of the pachinko game machine 1, in this example, "XXX") attached to the movable body 32 by lighting or blinking the lighting means such as an LED when the movable body 32 is stopped or in operation. The attacca lamp 9c illuminates the vicinity of the attacca by lighting or blinking the lighting means such as an LED. The attacca upper lamp 075F009U illuminates the vicinity above the attacca by lighting or blinking the lighting means such as an LED. The lower left lamp 075F009D illuminates the vicinity of the lower left of the game board 2 by lighting or blinking the lighting means such as an LED. The board right lamp 075F009F is a lamp provided on a housing imitating a character, and illuminates the housing imitating a character on the right side of the image display device 5 by lighting or blinking the lighting means such as an LED. The board left lamp 075F009E illuminates the vicinity of the left side of the image display device 5 by lighting or blinking the lighting means such as an LED. The left board lamp 075F009E may be provided on a character-shaped housing, similar to the right board lamp 075F009F. The right board lamp 075F009F and the left board lamp 075F009E may be movable in a predetermined direction (left/right, up/down, etc.), similar to the movable body lamp 9d.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 has multiple lamps in the gaming machine frame 3. Specifically, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has frame lamps consisting of a frame left lamp 075F009L provided on the left side of the gaming machine frame 3 and a frame right lamp 075F009R provided on the right side of the gaming machine frame 3.

Here, FIG. 13-2 is an explanatory diagram showing the frame lamps. The frame left lamp 075F009L has a group of eleven lamps, the first lamp to the eleventh lamp, arranged counterclockwise from the top to the bottom of the gaming machine frame 3. The frame left lamp 075F009L lights up the left side of the gaming machine frame 3 by lighting or blinking each of the multiple lamps (11 lamps in this example). On the other hand, the frame right lamp 075F009R has a group of eleven lamps, the first lamp to the eleventh lamp, arranged clockwise from the top to the bottom of the gaming machine frame 3. The frame right lamp 075F009R lights up the right side of the gaming machine frame 3 by lighting or blinking each of the multiple lamps (11 lamps in this example).

The pachinko game machine 1 also has a special symbol LED board 075F020 at the bottom left of the game board 2. The special symbol LED board 075F020 is controlled by the game control microcomputer 100, and is a board that plays the roles of the first reserve indicator 25A, the second reserve indicator 25B, the regular reserve indicator 25C, the regular pattern indicator 20, the first special symbol display device 4A, and the second special symbol display device 4B shown in FIG. 1 by turning on/off/blinking the LEDs. The pachinko game machine 1 also has a fourth symbol unit 075F050 at the bottom left of the image display device 5. The fourth symbol unit 075F050 is an LED board that is controlled by the performance control CPU 120, and notifies the changes in the special symbol, the number of reserved memories, the right-hit display, and the like by turning on/off/blinking the LEDs.

Here, Figure 13-3 is an explanatory diagram showing the special pattern LED board 075F020 and the fourth pattern unit 075F050. As shown in FIG. 13-3(a), the special chart LED board 075F020 includes a special chart 1 variable display unit 075F021 which indicates the variable display of the first special chart, a special chart 2 variable display unit 075F022 which indicates the variable display of the second special chart, a special chart 1 memory display unit 075F023 which indicates the first reserved memory number corresponding to the first special chart game, a special chart 2 memory display unit 075F024 which indicates the second reserved memory number corresponding to the second special chart game, a regular chart memory display unit 075F025 which indicates the regular chart reserved memory number, a regular chart display unit 075F026 which indicates the variable display of regular charts, a right hit display unit 075F030 which encourages the player to hit to the right, a special rate display unit 075F028 which indicates whether or not a special rate state is in effect, a time-saving display unit 075F029 which indicates whether or not a time-saving state is in effect, and a round display unit 075F027 which indicates the number of rounds of the jackpot. Each display unit can inform the player of the presence or absence of variable display of special or normal symbols, the results, the current game status, the number of reserved symbols, etc., by lighting or blinking with a lighting means such as an LED.

For example, the special symbol 1 variable display unit 075F021 notifies the player whether or not a variable display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol game is being performed, and the stopping symbol of the first special symbol determined by the result of the variable display, by lighting/blinking/extinguishing an LED or other lighting means. The special symbol 2 variable display unit 075F022 notifies the player whether or not a variable display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol game is being performed, and the stopping symbol of the second special symbol determined by the result of the variable display, by lighting/blinking/extinguishing an LED or other lighting means.

Furthermore, the special chart LED board 075F020 can prompt the player to hit to the right by lighting/blinking/turning off the lighting means such as the LED in the right hit display unit 075F030. In this embodiment, when the player is prompted to hit to the right, the lighting means such as the LED in the right hit display unit 075F030 lights up (emits light), and when the player is not prompted to hit to the right, that is, when the player is prompted to hit to the left, the lighting means such as the LED in the right hit display unit 075F030 turns off. After the pattern is determined, the CPU 103 transmits a right hit display lighting command to the performance control CPU 120 and turns on the right hit display unit 075F030, and after the pattern is determined by the final variation in the high base state before returning to the normal state, it transmits a right hit display turning off designation command to the performance control CPU 120 and turns off the right hit display unit 075F030. In addition, if the pachinko game machine 1 has a jackpot or a small jackpot that is not controlled to a high base after the jackpot game ball state, the performance control CPU 120 may turn on the right-hit display unit 075F030 only during the jackpot round. In this case, the CPU 103 sends a jackpot end designation command to the performance control CPU 120 and turns off the right-hit display unit 075F030.

Here, right-hand hit refers to operating the ball-hitting handle 30 to launch the game ball toward the second flow-down path, which is one of the first and second flow-down paths through which the game medium can flow down in the game area provided on the game board 2. The first flow-down path is, for example, a path that passes through the left area of the game area, and beyond which there is a first start winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, but there is no second start winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B. The second flow-down path is, for example, a path that passes through the right area of the game area, and beyond which there are a second start winning hole and a large winning hole (normal large winning hole, V large winning hole) formed in the variable winning ball device 6B. When the player launches the game ball toward the first flow-down path, the game ball flows toward the first start winning hole through the first flow-down path. When the player shoots the game ball toward the second flow path, the game ball flows through the second flow path toward the second start winning hole or the large winning hole (normal large winning hole, V large winning hole). In this embodiment, in the big win game after the big win occurs and in the game state after the big win game (time-saving state or probability change state), the player hits the right to make the game ball enter the second start winning hole or the large winning hole provided on the right side of the game area, and during that time, the right hit display unit 075F030 urges the player to hit the right. By hitting the right while the display urging the player to hit the right is being displayed, the player can make the game ball enter the second start winning hole and a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, 3 balls) are paid out and the right to the second special game can be obtained, or the game ball can enter the normal large winning hole and a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, 10 balls) are paid out. Furthermore, as will be described in more detail later, during a round of a guaranteed jackpot, the V-large winning hole opens, and by hitting the right while a display is being displayed encouraging the player to hit to the right, the player can gain the right to enter the game ball into the V-large winning hole and be controlled into a guaranteed jackpot state. Therefore, hitting to the right while a display is being displayed encouraging the player to hit to the right can give the player an overall advantage. Note that, unlike hitting to the right, operating the ball-hitting handle 30 to launch the game ball toward the first flow path (hitting style) is also called hitting to the left.

As shown in FIG. 13-3(b), the fourth symbol unit 075F050 includes a special symbol 1 memory display section 075F051 that indicates the first reserved memory number corresponding to the first special symbol game, a special symbol 2 memory display section 075F052 that indicates the second reserved memory number corresponding to the second special symbol game, a special symbol 1 variable display section 075F053 that indicates the status or display result of the variable display of the first special symbol, a special symbol 2 variable display section 075F054 that indicates the status or display result of the variable display of the second special symbol, and a right hit display section 075F055 that encourages the player to hit right. Each display section can inform the player of the presence or absence of a variable display of a special symbol, the reserved number, and a right hit instruction by lighting/blinking/going out using lighting means such as an LED.

For example, the special chart 1 variable display unit 075F053 notifies the player whether or not the variable display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol game is being performed, and the stopped symbol of the first special symbol determined by the result of the variable display, by turning on/flashing/going off a lighting means such as an LED. The special chart 2 variable display unit 075F054 notifies the player whether or not the variable display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol game is being performed, and the stopped symbol of the second special symbol determined by the result of the variable display, by turning on/flashing/going off a lighting means such as an LED. Hereinafter, the display of the change in the stopped symbol of the first special symbol by a lighting means such as an LED in the special chart 1 variable display unit 075F021 is also referred to as the change display of the first special symbol. Also, the display of the change in the stopped symbol of the second special symbol by a lighting means such as an LED in the special chart 2 variable display unit 075F054 is also referred to as the change display of the second special symbol.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the player is prompted to hit to the right, the lighting means such as the LED in the right hit display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 lights up (emits light), and when the player is not prompted to hit to the right, that is, when the player is prompted to hit to the left, the lighting means such as the LED in the right hit display section 075F055 turns off. The performance control CPU 120 turns on the right hit display section 075F055 based on receiving a right hit display lighting command from the CPU 103 after the symbol is determined, and turns off the right hit display section 075F055 based on receiving a right hit display turning off command from the CPU 103 after the symbol is determined by the final variation in the high base state before returning to the normal state. In addition, if the pachinko game machine 1 has a jackpot or a small jackpot that is not controlled to a high base after the jackpot game ball state, the performance control CPU 120 may turn on the right-hit display unit 075F055 only during the jackpot round. In this case, the performance control CPU 120 turns off the right-hit display unit 075F055 based on receiving a jackpot end command from the CPU 103.

Figure 13-4 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1. As shown in Figure 13-4, each of the movable body lamp 9d, attacca lamp 9c, attacca upper lamp 075F009U, lower left lamp 075F009D, board right lamp 075F009F, board left lamp 075F009E, frame right lamp 075F009R, and frame left lamp 075F009L is connected to a lamp control board 14 and can be lit (blinked) by control of the performance control CPU 120 via the lamp control board 14. Each of these movable body lamps 9d, attacca lamp 9c, attacca upper lamp 075F009U, lower left lamp 075F009D, board right lamp 075F009F, board left lamp 075F009E, frame right lamp 075F009R, and frame left lamp 075F009L, or these collectively, are also referred to as game effect lamps 9.

The fourth pattern unit 075F050 is connected to the performance control board 12, and each display section can be lit (blinked) under the control of the control CPU 120.

The special chart LED board 075F020 is connected to the main board 11, and each display can be lit (blinked) by the control of the game control microcomputer 100.

[Image display device]
13-5 is a front view of the image display device 5. Most of the display area of the image display device 5 constitutes a first display area 075F005F for displaying effects such as variable display of decorative symbols and reach effects. In addition, the lower end of the image display device 5 constitutes a second display area 075F005Sa including a first reserved memory display area 075F005D capable of displaying the first reserved memory number by the number of circular reserved displays, and a second reserved memory display area 075F005U capable of displaying the second reserved memory number by the number of circular reserved displays.

The upper right corner of the image display device 5 constitutes a third display area 075F005Sb that includes a fourth pattern 075F005J, which indicates that a special pattern is being variably displayed, and a display of the first and second reserved memory counts.

In the center of the first display area 075F005F, the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R are arranged, and variable display of the decorative patterns can be performed. In addition, small patterns 075F005M, which are smaller than the decorative patterns, are displayed at the left end of the first display area 075F005F. The small patterns correspond to the decorative patterns displayed in the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L, the decorative patterns displayed in the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C and the decorative patterns displayed in the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R, and are arranged vertically. In addition, the small patterns 075F005M are not hidden during variable display, and are always displayed in the first display area 075F005F of the image display device 5.

As shown in FIG. 13-5, the decorative pattern is arranged in the center of the first display area 075F005F of the image display device 5, and the small pattern 075F005M is arranged in a size smaller than the decorative pattern at the left end of the first display area 075F005F of the image display device 5. For this reason, the visibility of the small pattern 075F005M is lower than the visibility of the decorative pattern.

Furthermore, an active display area 075F005A is provided at the bottom center of the first display area 075F005F for displaying the pending display corresponding to the variable display currently being executed as the active display.

[Various tables]
Various tables will be described with reference to FIGS.

(Big Win Type)
Fig. 13-6 is an explanatory diagram showing a winning type table. As shown in Fig. 13-6, the winning type table shows the winning probability after the end of the winning game state, the base after the end of the winning game state, the variable time after the end of the winning game state, and the number of openings (number of rounds) in the winning game for each type of winning in the winning game.

Specifically, the types of jackpots are 5R normal jackpots, 5R sure-win jackpots, and 10R sure-win jackpots. In the following, each round may be designated by "R". For example, the first round may be called the first round, and the second round may be called the second round. A 5R normal jackpot is a jackpot in which the control pattern of the distribution member (not shown) in the attacker makes it difficult to win a V (for example, control that shortens the time to open the lid that opens and closes the V big winning port to less than a specified time, or control that does not allow the game ball to enter a specific area by repeatedly opening and closing the lid), and is controlled to a low probability state and a high base state after the end of the 5-round jackpot game state. In a normal jackpot, this low probability high base state continues until the earlier of the following conditions is met: the variable display is executed a specified number of times, 100 times, or the next jackpot occurs.

A 5R guaranteed jackpot is a jackpot in which the control pattern of the distribution member (not shown) inside the attacker is one that makes it easier to win a V (for example, a control that always keeps the lid that opens and closes the V winning port open, or a control that keeps the lid open for longer than a specific time), and which is controlled to a high probability state and high base state after the end of the 5-round jackpot game state. In a guaranteed jackpot, this high probability, high base state continues until the earlier of the following conditions is met: the variable display is executed a specified number of times, 150 times, or the next jackpot occurs.

A 10R guaranteed jackpot is a jackpot in which the control pattern of the distribution member (not shown) inside the attacker is one that makes it easier to win a V (for example, a control that always keeps the lid that opens and closes the V winning port open, or a control that keeps the lid open for longer than a specific time), and which is controlled to a high probability state and high base state after the end of the 10-round jackpot game state. In a guaranteed jackpot, this high probability, high base state continues until the earlier of the following conditions is met: the variable display is executed a specified number of times, 150 times, or the next jackpot occurs.

The 5R normal jackpot and the 5R variable probability jackpot share the same decorative symbols that stop when the jackpot occurs. In addition, the 5R normal jackpot and the 5R variable probability jackpot share the same presentation style of the fanfare presentation (e.g., background, characters that appear, sound effects, etc.) that occurs when the jackpot occurs, the presentation style of the round presentation (e.g., background, characters that appear, sound effects, etc.) that occurs during the round of the jackpot game state, and the number of rounds in the jackpot game state are also common. For this reason, it is difficult for a player to recognize whether a 5R normal jackpot or a 5R variable probability jackpot has occurred, as long as they look at the stopped decorative symbols, fanfare presentation, and round presentation. Here, in the case of a 5R variable probability jackpot, the V large prize entry port opens in a specified round (in this embodiment, the 4th round). At this time, if the player can aim at the V-large winning hole and hit the ball to the right to get it into the V-large winning hole, the game state will be controlled to a special state.

As such, 5R normal jackpots and 5R special jackpots are also called chance bonuses because it is difficult for the player to know whether or not a special jackpot has occurred until halfway through the round.

In the case of a 10R special jackpot, the V-large winning hole is opened in a predetermined round (the 9th round in this embodiment) in the same way as in the case of a 5R special jackpot. At this time, if the player can make the game ball enter the V-large winning hole by hitting it to the right, the game state is controlled to a special jackpot state. However, in the case of a 10R special jackpot, the decorative pattern that stops when the jackpot occurs, the presentation style of the fanfare presentation (for example, the background, the characters that appear, the sound effects, etc.), and the presentation style of the round presentation that is performed during the round of the jackpot game state are different from those of a 5R normal jackpot and a 5R special jackpot. Therefore, when a 10R special jackpot occurs, the player can recognize that a special jackpot has occurred. Such a 10R special jackpot is also called a special bonus.

(each random number)
FIG. 13-7 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. As shown in FIG. 13-7, each random number is used as follows. Specifically, Random R is a random counter for hit determination that determines whether or not a hit is made. Random R is updated by 1 at 10 MHz, and is updated by incrementing from 0 to its upper limit of 65535, and then is updated by incrementing again from 0. Random 1 is a random counter (for determining the type of hit) that determines the type of hit as 5R normal hit, 5R variable hit, or 10R variable hit. Random 2 is a random counter (for determining the type of fluctuation pattern) that determines the type (type) of the fluctuation pattern. Random 3 is a random counter (for determining the fluctuation pattern) that determines the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time). Random 4 is a random counter (for determining the hit of a normal pattern) that determines whether or not a hit based on a normal pattern is generated. Random 5 is a random counter (for determining the initial value of Random 4) that determines the initial value of Random 4.

In this embodiment, whether or not the game state is controlled to a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player is determined based on the value of a random number for jackpot determination (Random R). Then, which of the multiple types of jackpots, such as a 5R normal jackpot, a 5R special jackpot, and a 10R special jackpot, that will be the jackpot game state is determined based on the value of a random number for jackpot type determination (Random 1). At this time, the jackpot pattern can also be determined based on the value of Random 1.

Furthermore, first, a fluctuation pattern type is determined using a random number for determining the fluctuation pattern type (Random 3), and then one of the fluctuation patterns included in the determined fluctuation pattern type is determined using a random number for determining the fluctuation pattern (Random 4). Thus, in this embodiment, the fluctuation pattern is determined by a two-stage lottery process. A fluctuation pattern type is a grouping of multiple fluctuation patterns according to the characteristics of their fluctuation modes. One or multiple fluctuation patterns belong to a fluctuation pattern type.

For example, in the case of a jackpot, the fluctuation pattern is classified into a normal reach fluctuation pattern type accompanied by a normal reach, and a super reach fluctuation pattern type accompanied by a super reach. Such fluctuation pattern types are selected at a predetermined rate. In addition, in the case of a miss, the fluctuation pattern types are classified into a normal fluctuation pattern type that is a fluctuation pattern type that does not involve a reach, a normal reach fluctuation pattern type, and a super reach fluctuation pattern type.

These types of fluctuation pattern are set so that when the display result is incorrect, the selection rate of the fluctuation pattern type differs between when the time-saving state is in effect and when the time-saving state is not in effect (when the time-saving state is in effect, the rate at which a fluctuation pattern type with a short fluctuation display time, such as a normal fluctuation pattern type, is selected is set to be higher than when the time-saving state is not in effect), and therefore when the time-saving state is in effect, the fluctuation display time is shorter than when the time-saving state is not in effect.

In addition, such a variation pattern type may be set so that the selection ratio differs when the reserved memory number of each special symbol that performs the variable display is equal to or greater than a predetermined number and when it is less than the predetermined number, so that when the reserved memory number of each special symbol that performs the variable display is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, the reserved number shortening control is executed to shorten the variable display time compared to when the reserved number shortening control number is less than the predetermined number. For example, in the reserved number shortening control state, the ratio of selecting a variable pattern type with a short variable display time such as a normal variable pattern type may be set to be higher compared to when the reserved number shortening control state is not in effect, so that the average variable display time is shorter compared to when the reserved number shortening control state is not in effect. In addition, in the reserved number shortening control, the variable display time of the variable pattern type itself may be shortened even when the same variable pattern type is selected compared to when the reserved number shortening control state is not in effect.

In addition, the fluctuation pattern may be determined in a one-step method in which the fluctuation pattern is determined by a single random number drawing, rather than in a two-step method in which the fluctuation pattern type is determined first and then the fluctuation pattern is determined.

(Big hit determination table, big hit type determination table)
13-8 is an explanatory diagram showing the big win determination table and the big win type determination table. These tables are stored in the ROM 101.

Figure 13-8 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table. The jackpot determination table is a collection of data stored in RO101, and is a table in which a jackpot determination value that is compared with random R is set. There are two types of jackpot determination tables: a normal (non-high probability) jackpot determination table used in the normal state (a game state that is not in the high probability state, i.e., a non-high probability state), and a high probability jackpot determination table used in the high probability state.

The normal jackpot determination table has the numerical values in the left column of FIG. 13-8(A) set as jackpot determination values, and the special jackpot determination table has the numerical values in the right column of FIG. 13-8(B) set as jackpot determination values. The special jackpot determination table has a larger number of jackpot determination values (called special jackpot determination values or second jackpot determination values) than the special jackpot determination table, by adding a special jackpot determination value specific to the special jackpot determination table to the jackpot determination values common to the normal jackpot determination table (called normal jackpot determination values or first jackpot determination values). This allows the special jackpot state to be determined as a jackpot with a higher probability than the normal state.

At a predetermined time, the CPU 103 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 104 and compares the extracted value with the value of a random number (random R) for determining a jackpot. If the random number value for determining a jackpot matches any of the jackpot determination values shown in FIG. 13-8 (A), it decides to determine a jackpot (normal jackpot or special jackpot) for the special symbol. Note that the "probability" shown in FIG. 13-8 (A) indicates the probability (percentage) of a jackpot.

Figures 13-8 (B) and (C) are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination table. Figure 13-8 (B) is a first special pattern jackpot type determination table used to determine the jackpot type when a jackpot is determined to be a jackpot by the first special pattern. Figure 13-8 (C) is a second special pattern jackpot type determination table used to determine the jackpot type when a jackpot is determined to be a jackpot by the second special pattern.

The first special symbol jackpot type determination table in FIG. 13-8(B) has a value to be compared with the value of Random 1 for jackpot type determination, and the jackpot determination values corresponding to each of "5R normal jackpot", "5R special jackpot", and "10R special jackpot" are set. The second special symbol jackpot type determination table in FIG. 13-8(C) has a value to be compared with the value of Random 1, and the jackpot determination value corresponding to "10R special jackpot".

As shown in Fig. 13-8 (B) and (C), the jackpot type judgment value is also used as a judgment value (jackpot pattern judgment value) that determines the jackpot patterns of the first special pattern and the second special pattern. For example, the judgment value corresponding to a "5R normal jackpot" is also set as a judgment value corresponding to the jackpot pattern "1". The judgment value corresponding to a "5R special jackpot" is also set as a judgment value corresponding to the jackpot pattern "3". The judgment value corresponding to a "10R special jackpot" is also set as a judgment value corresponding to the jackpot pattern "7". The special jackpot 1 variable display unit 075F021 and the special jackpot 2 variable display unit 075F022 in the special jackpot LED board 075F020 can indicate the stopped jackpot pattern by lighting or blinking the lighting means such as LEDs in a lighting mode corresponding to each jackpot pattern. Similarly, the special pattern 1 variable display unit 075F053 and the special pattern 2 variable display unit 075F054 in the fourth pattern unit 075F050 can indicate the stopped jackpot pattern by lighting or blinking lighting means such as LEDs in a lighting pattern corresponding to each jackpot pattern.

Using these various jackpot type determination tables, the CPU 103 determines the jackpot type that corresponds to the jackpot type determination value with which the value of Random 1 matches, and determines the jackpot pattern with which the value of Random 1 matches, as the jackpot pattern. This simultaneously determines the jackpot type and the jackpot pattern that corresponds to the jackpot type.

According to these various jackpot type determination tables, for jackpots with the second special symbol, the percentage of "10R sure jackpot" selected is higher than for jackpot types selectable with the first special symbol, and the percentage of jackpot types that are advantageous to the player selected is higher.

(Performance control command)
FIG. 13-9 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of a presentation control command. The game control microcomputer 100 transmits various presentation control commands to the presentation control CPU 120 according to the game control state. The presentation control command is, for example, two bytes in length, with the first byte indicating MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicating EXT (command type). Note that the command format shown in FIG. 13-9 is only an example, and other command formats may be used. Note that, although "(H)" indicates hexadecimal in the following description, it may be omitted in this specification.

Command 8001 (H) is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of the variable display of the first special symbol. Command 8002 (H) is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of the variable display of the second special symbol. When the performance control CPU 101 receives command 8001 (H) or command 8002 (H), it controls the image display device 5 to start the variable display of the decorative pattern.

Command 81XX (H) is a variation pattern command that specifies the variation pattern of the decorative pattern that is displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variation display of the special pattern (each corresponds to a variation pattern XX). In other words, when a unique number is assigned to each of multiple types of variation patterns, there is a variation pattern command that corresponds to each variation pattern identified by that number.

Command 8C01 (H) is a display result 1 designation command (miss designation command) indicating that a miss has been determined. Command 8C02 (H) is a display result 2 designation command (5R normal jackpot designation command) indicating that a 5R normal jackpot has been determined. Command 8C03 (H) is a display result 3 designation command (5R special jackpot designation command) indicating that a 5R special jackpot has been determined. Command 8C04 (H) is a display result 4 designation command (10R special jackpot designation command) indicating that a 10R special jackpot has been determined. The miss designation command, 5R normal jackpot designation command, 5R special jackpot designation command, and 10R special jackpot designation command, or all of these collectively, are also referred to as 8C commands.

Command 8D01 (H) is a first pattern change designation command that indicates the start of the changing display of the first special pattern. Command 8D02 (H) is a second pattern change designation command that indicates the start of the changing display of the second special pattern. The first pattern change designation command and the second pattern change designation command, or these collectively, are also referred to as 8D commands. Command 8F00 (H) is a pattern confirmation designation command that specifies the end of the changing of the first special pattern and/or the second special pattern.

Command 9000 (H) is an initialization command that specifies initialization (specifies that the initial screen at power-on is displayed) that is sent when power supply to the gaming machine is started. Command 9200 (H) is a power outage recovery command that specifies power outage recovery (specifies that the power outage recovery screen is displayed) that is sent when power supply to the gaming machine is resumed. Command 9500 (H) is a normal state command that specifies the background of the normal state. Command 9501 (H) is a time-saving state command that specifies the background of the time-saving state. Command 9502 (H) is a special probability state command that specifies the background of the special probability state. Each of the normal state command, time-saving state command, and special probability state command, or these are collectively referred to as a 95 series command or background command. Command 9F00 (H) is a customer waiting demonstration command that specifies a customer waiting demonstration.

Command A001 (H) is a jackpot start 1 designation command that designates the start of a 5R normal jackpot. Command A002 (H) is a jackpot start 2 designation command that designates the start of a 5R special jackpot. Command A003 (H) is a special jackpot start 3 designation command that designates the start of a 10R special jackpot. The jackpot start 1 designation command, jackpot start 2 designation command, and jackpot start 3 designation command, or all of these collectively, are also referred to as A0 series commands.

A1XX (H) is a command for specifying when the large prize opening is open, indicating that the large prize opening is open for the number of times (rounds) indicated by XX. The command for specifying when the large prize opening is open is also referred to as an A1 series command. A2XX (H) is a command for specifying after the large prize opening is open, indicating that the large prize opening is closed for the number of times (rounds) indicated by XX. The command for specifying after the large prize opening is open is also referred to as an A2 series command.

Command A301 (H) is a jackpot end 1 designation command that designates the end of a 5R normal jackpot. Command A302 (H) is a jackpot end 2 designation command that designates the end of a 5R special jackpot. Command A303 (H) is a jackpot end 3 designation command that designates the end of a 10R special jackpot. The jackpot end 1 designation command, jackpot end 2 designation command, and jackpot end 3 designation command, or all of these collectively, are also referred to as A3 series commands.

Command AD00(H) is a high probability jackpot determination device passage designation command that specifies that a V win has occurred. The high probability jackpot determination device passage designation command is a command that is sent when the game ball that has passed through the V large winning port enters the V winning area and is detected by the V winning switch 075F024.

Command B100(H) is a first start winning designation command that specifies that a first start winning has occurred. Command B200(H) is a second start winning designation command that specifies that a second start winning has occurred.

Command C1XX(H) is a first reserved memory number designation command that designates that the first reserved memory number has reached the number indicated by XX. The first reserved memory number designation command is also referred to as a C1 series command. Command C2XX(H) is a second reserved memory designation command that designates that the second reserved memory number has reached the number indicated by XX. The second reserved memory number designation command is also referred to as a C2 series command.

Commands C4XX(H) and C6XX(H) are presentation control commands that indicate the contents of the winning judgment results, such as a jackpot judgment, a jackpot type judgment, and a fluctuation pattern type judgment, when a start winning is made at the first or second start winning port. Of these, command C4XX(H) is a design designation command that indicates whether or not a winning has occurred, and the type of jackpot judgment result, among the winning judgment results. In addition, command C3XX(H) is a fluctuation type command that indicates the judgment result of which range of judgment values the value of the fluctuation pattern type judgment random number falls within, among the winning judgment results (fluctuation pattern type judgment result).

C7XX(H) is a special prize opening entry designation command that indicates the passing of the game ball through the special prize opening on the number of times (round) indicated by XX.

A command in which MODE is FD (H) and the 4th bit of EXT is 0 is a right-hit display off command, which indicates that the right-hit display is turned off. A command in which MODE data is FD (H) and the 4th bit of EXT data is 1 is a right-hit display on command, which indicates that the right-hit display is turned on. In this embodiment, the right-hit display on command is also referred to as an FD command.

At the time of start winning, the game control microcomputer 100 judges whether or not a jackpot will be generated, the type of jackpot, and the value of the random number for judging the type of fluctuation pattern, which range of judgment values it falls within. Then, it sets a value specifying a jackpot and a value specifying the type of jackpot in the EXT data of the designation command, and controls the transmission of this to the performance control CPU 120. The game control microcomputer 100 also sets a value specifying the range of judgment values as the judgment result of the type of fluctuation pattern in the EXT data of the fluctuation type command, and controls the transmission of this to the performance control CPU 120. The performance control CPU 120 can recognize whether or not the display result will be a jackpot and the type of jackpot based on the value set in the designation command, and can recognize the type of fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation type command.

[Action]
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the characteristic part 075F will be described. First, the process by the CPU 103 mounted on the main board 11 will be described.

(Special pattern normal processing)
FIG. 13-10 is a flowchart showing an example of the normal special symbol processing. As shown in FIG. 13-10, in the normal special symbol processing, the CPU 103 judges whether there is reserved memory data in the first reserved memory buffer (a memory buffer for storing reserved memory information of the first special symbol) or the second reserved memory buffer (a memory buffer for storing reserved memory information of the second special symbol) (step 075FS001). If there is no reserved memory data in either the first reserved memory buffer or the second reserved memory buffer (N in step 075FS001), it judges whether a predetermined period has passed since the fluctuation stop (step 075FS002). If the predetermined period has not passed since the fluctuation stop (N in step 075FS002), the normal special symbol processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the predetermined period has passed since the fluctuation stop (Y in step 075FS002), a process for transmitting a customer waiting demo designation command is performed (step 075FS003), and the normal special symbol processing is terminated. Here, when the customer waiting demo designation command is sent, a customer waiting demo designation command sent flag is set, which indicates that the customer waiting demo designation command has been sent. Then, when the special symbol normal processing is executed after the next timer interruption after the customer waiting demo designation command is sent, the customer waiting demo designation command is controlled not to be sent again based on the fact that the customer waiting demo designation command sent flag is set. Such a customer waiting demo designation command sent flag is reset when the next variable display of the special symbol is started.

When there is reserved memory data in the first reserved memory buffer or the second reserved memory buffer (Y in step 075FS001), the CPU 103 judges whether the first data among the data set in the reserved specific area is data indicating "second" (step 075FS004). If the first data set in the reserved specific area is not data indicating "second" (i.e., data indicating "first") (N in step 075FS004), the CPU 103 sets data indicating "first" to the special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether the special symbol process processing is being performed for the first special symbol or the second special symbol) (step 075FS005). If the first data set in the reserved specific area is data indicating "second" (Y in step 075FS004), the CPU 103 sets data indicating "second" to the special symbol pointer (step 075FS006).

In this embodiment, depending on whether data indicating "first" or "second" is set in the special pattern pointer, the display of the first special pattern and the display of the second special pattern are performed using a common processing routine. When data indicating "first" is set in the special pattern pointer, the display of the first special pattern is performed based on the reserved memory data stored in the first reserved memory buffer. On the other hand, when data indicating "second" is set in the special pattern pointer, the display of the second special pattern is performed based on the reserved memory data stored in the second reserved memory buffer.

By the control of steps 075FS004 to 075FS006, if there is at least one second reserved memory data in the second reserved memory buffer, the display of the second special symbol changes based on the data in the second reserved memory is executed in priority over the display of the first special symbol changes based on the data in the first reserved memory.

Next, the CPU 103 reads out each random number stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved memory number=1 indicated by the special symbol pointer, and stores it in the reserved memory buffer of the RAM 102 (step 075FS007). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 reads out each random number stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number=1 in the first reserved memory buffer, and stores it in the reserved memory buffer of the RAM 102. Also, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 reads out each random number stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number=1 in the second reserved memory buffer, and stores it in the reserved memory buffer of the RAM 102.

Then, the CPU 103 subtracts one from the count value of the reserved memory number counter indicated by the special pattern pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step 075FS008). Specifically, when the special pattern pointer indicates "first," the CPU 103 subtracts one from the count value of the first reserved memory number counter, and shifts the contents of each storage area in the first reserved memory buffer. When the special pattern pointer indicates "second," the CPU 103 subtracts one from the count value of the second reserved memory number counter, and shifts the contents of each storage area in the second reserved memory buffer.

In other words, when the special symbol pointer indicates "1st", the CPU 103 stores each random number stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved memory buffer of the RAM 102 in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = n-1. Also, when the special symbol pointer indicates "2nd", the CPU 103 stores each random number stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved memory buffer of the RAM 102 in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n-1.

Therefore, the order in which the random numbers stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to each first pending memory number (or each second pending memory number) are extracted always matches the order of the first pending memory number (or second pending memory number) = 1, 2, 3, 4.

Next, the CPU 103 controls the transmission of a reserved memory number designation command to the performance control CPU 120 indicated by the special pattern pointer based on the value of the reserved memory number counter indicated by the special pattern pointer after subtraction (step 075FS009). In this case, if the special pattern pointer is set to a value indicating "first", the CPU 103 controls the transmission of a first reserved memory number designation command. Also, if the special pattern pointer is set to a value indicating "second", the CPU 103 controls the transmission of a second reserved memory number designation command.

Next, the CPU 103 sends a background designation command (step 075FS010), reads Random R (random number for determining a jackpot) from the reserved memory buffer, and executes the jackpot determination module (step 075FS011). In this case, the CPU 103 reads the random number for determining a jackpot that was extracted in the start winning determination process and stored in advance in the first reserved memory buffer or the second reserved memory buffer, and performs a jackpot determination. The jackpot determination module is a program that executes a process that compares a predetermined jackpot determination value (see Figure 13-8) with the random number for determining a jackpot, and determines that a jackpot has occurred if they match. In other words, it is a program that executes the process of determining a jackpot.

In the process of determining whether or not a jackpot has been generated, when the game state is in a probability variable state (high probability state), the probability of a jackpot is higher than when the game state is not in a probability variable state (normal game state or time-saving state). Specifically, a probability variable jackpot determination table (table with the values on the right side of FIG. 13-8(A) set) in which a large number of jackpot determination values are set in advance, and a normal time jackpot determination table (table with the values on the left side of FIG. 13-8(A) set) in which a smaller number of jackpot determination values are set than in the probability variable jackpot determination table are provided. Then, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the game state is in a probability variable state, and when the game state is in a probability variable state, performs the process of determining whether or not a jackpot has been generated using the probability variable jackpot determination table, and when the game state is in a normal state or time-saving state, performs the process of determining whether or not a jackpot has been generated using the normal time jackpot determination table. That is, when the value of the random number for determining a jackpot (random R) matches any of the jackpot determination values shown in FIG. 13-8 (A), the CPU 103 determines that the special symbol is a jackpot. If it determines that a jackpot has occurred (Y in step 075FS011), the process proceeds to step 075FS012. Note that determining whether or not to determine whether or not to determine a jackpot means determining whether or not to transition to a jackpot game state, but also means determining whether or not to determine whether or not the stopped symbol in the special symbol is a jackpot symbol.

Whether the current game state is in a high probability state is confirmed by checking whether the high probability state flag is set. The high probability state flag is set when the game state transitions to a high probability state, and is reset when the high probability state ends. Specifically, the high probability state flag is set in the process of ending a jackpot game, and is then reset at the timing when the variable display of the special pattern ends and the stopped pattern is displayed stationary when either the variable display has been performed a predetermined number of times (150 times) or the next jackpot has been determined, whichever occurs first, is met.

If the value of the random number (Random R) for determining a jackpot does not match any of the jackpot determination values (N in step 075FS011), proceed to step 075FS016, which will be described later.

If the value of the random number (random R) for determining a jackpot matches any of the jackpot determination values in step 075FS011, the CPU 103 sets a jackpot flag indicating a jackpot (step 075FS012). The jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot game ends. Then, as a table to be used to determine the jackpot type as one of the multiple types, the first special symbol jackpot type determination table in FIG. 13-8 (B) and the second special symbol jackpot type determination table in FIG. 13-8 (C) are selected (step 075FS013). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 selects the first special symbol jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 13-8 (B). Also, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 selects the second special symbol jackpot type determination table in FIG. 13-8 (C).

Next, the CPU 103 reads the random number for determining the type of jackpot extracted in the start winning determination process and stored in advance in the first reserved memory buffer or the second reserved memory buffer, and using the jackpot type determination table selected in step 075FS013, determines the jackpot type and jackpot pattern that correspond to the value that matches the value of the random number for determining the type of jackpot (Random 1) stored in the reserved memory buffer (step 075FS014).

As shown in Figures 13-8 (B) and (C), for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the relationship between the jackpot type and the jackpot pattern is set so that the jackpot pattern differs for each jackpot type, and the jackpot type and the jackpot pattern are determined simultaneously, so that the correspondence between the jackpot pattern and the game control according to the jackpot type is simplified, preventing the game control from becoming complicated.

The CPU 103 also sets jackpot type data indicating the determined jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 102 (step 075FS015). For example, if the jackpot type is a "5R normal jackpot", the jackpot type data is set to "01". If the jackpot type is a "5R variable jackpot", the jackpot type data is set to "02". If the jackpot type is a "10R variable jackpot", the jackpot type data is set to "03".

Next, the CPU 103 sets the stopping symbol for the special symbol (step 075FS016). Specifically, if the jackpot flag is not set, the "-" symbol, which is a losing symbol, is set as the stopping symbol for the special symbol. If the jackpot flag is set, the jackpot symbol determined in step 075FS014 is set as the stopping symbol for the special symbol according to the determination result of the jackpot type. That is, when the jackpot type is determined to be a "5R normal jackpot", the stopping symbol for the special symbol is set to "1". When the jackpot type is determined to be a "5R special jackpot", the stopping symbol for the special symbol is set to "3". When the jackpot type is determined to be a "10R special jackpot", the stopping symbol for the special symbol is set to "7".

Then, the CPU 103 sends a display result designation command (step 075FS017) and updates the value of the special pattern process flag to a value corresponding to the variable pattern setting process (S111) (step 075FS018).

(Variation pattern setting process)
FIG. 13-11 is a flow chart showing an example of a fluctuation pattern setting process. As shown in FIG. 13-11, in the fluctuation pattern setting process, the CPU 103 determines a fluctuation pattern (step 075FS101). Specifically, when the jackpot flag is set, the CPU 103 selects a jackpot fluctuation pattern type determination table according to the jackpot type, and when the jackpot flag is not set, the CPU 103 selects a miss fluctuation pattern type determination table. Then, the CPU 103 reads out random 2 (random number for fluctuation pattern type determination) from the first reserved memory buffer or the second reserved memory buffer, and determines the fluctuation pattern type to one of a plurality of types by referring to the selected table.

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to send a variation pattern command corresponding to the determined variation pattern to the performance control CPU 120 (step 075FS102).

Next, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the change time corresponding to the selected change pattern in the change time timer formed in the RAM 102 (step 075FS103). Then, the CPU 103 performs control to send a pattern change designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 075FS104), and updates the value of the special pattern process flag to a value corresponding to the special pattern change process (S112) (step 075FS105).

(Special pattern variation processing)
Fig. 13-12 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol variation process. As shown in Fig. 13-11, in the special symbol variation process, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the variation time timer (step 075FS201), and when the variation time timer times out (Y in step 075FS202), updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol stop process (S113) (step 075FS203). When the variation time timer has not timed out (N in step 075FS202), the process ends as it is.

(Special symbol stop processing)
FIG. 13-13 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol stop processing. As shown in FIG. 13-13, in the special symbol stop processing, the CPU 103 sets an end flag to end the variable display of the special symbol, and performs control to derive and display the stop symbol in the special symbol 1 variable display unit 075F021 or the special symbol 2 variable display unit 075F022 (step 075FS301). If data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the variation of the first special symbol in the special symbol 1 variable display unit 075F021 is ended, and if data indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer, the variation of the second special symbol in the special symbol 2 variable display unit 075F022 is ended. In addition, a symbol determination designation command is set in the performance control CPU 120 (step 075FS302). As a result, the symbol determination designation command is transmitted to the performance control CPU 120. Next, the CPU 103 judges whether or not the big win flag is set (step 075FS303). If the big win flag is not set (N in step 075FS303), the process proceeds to step 075FS309.

If the jackpot flag is set (Y in step 075FS303), the CPU 103 resets the probability bonus flag and the time-saving flag (step 075FS304). Next, it transmits a jackpot start command and a right-hit display lighting command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 075FS305).

Also, referring to the opening pattern data stored in RO101, data indicating the opening mode of the normal large prize winning port and the V large prize winning port, such as the number of times of opening (for example, 5 times or 10 times), the opening time (for example, 29 seconds), and the interval time between rounds (for example, 0.5 seconds), are set in a predetermined memory area (step 075FS306). Specifically, in the case of a 5R normal jackpot, the opening mode for opening the normal large prize winning port in all 1R to 5R, etc., is stored in a predetermined memory area provided in RAM102. In the case of a 5R sure-change jackpot, the opening mode for opening the normal large prize winning port in the 1st to 3rd Rs and the 5th Rs, and the V large prize winning port in the 4th Rs, etc., is stored in a predetermined memory area provided in RAM102. In addition, in the case of a 10R sure-change jackpot, the opening mode for opening the normal large prize winning port in the 1st to 8th Rs and the 10th Rs, and the V large prize winning port in the 9th Rs, etc., is stored in a predetermined memory area provided in RAM102. The data on the number of times it was opened (5 times or 10 times) is set in an opening counter to count the number of times it was opened.

The large prize opening control timer is also set to a value equivalent to the fanfare time, which is the jackpot display time (the time during which the occurrence of a jackpot is notified, for example, on the image display device 5) (step 075FS307). Thereafter, in the jackpot opening pre-processing, the large prize opening control timer is decremented by 1, and when it reaches 0, the large prize opening is opened and the round begins. The value of the special symbol process flag is then updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening pre-processing (S114) (step 075FS308), and the process ends.

If it is determined in step 075FS303 that the jackpot flag is not set (N in step 075FS303), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the time-saving flag indicating the time-saving state is set (step 075FS309). If the time-saving flag is not set (N in step 075FS309), the process proceeds to step 075FS316. If the time-saving flag is set (Y in step 075FS309), the counter value of the time-saving count counter indicating the remaining number of fluctuations in the time-saving state is decremented by 1 (step 075FS310). Next, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the value of the time-saving count counter has become 0 (step 075FS311). If the value of the time-saving count counter has become 0 (Y in step 075FS311), it is determined that the duration of the time-saving state has ended, and the time-saving flag is reset (step 075FS312). As a result, when the variable display that results in a miss display occurs a specific number of times (150 times) in the time-saving state, the game state transitions from the time-saving state to the non-time-saving state. In step 075FS311, if the value of the time-saving counter is not 0 (N in step 075FS311), the process transitions to step 075FS316.

After step 075FS312, it is determined whether or not the probability variable flag indicating the probability variable state is set (step 075FS313). If the probability variable flag is set (Y in step 075FS313), the probability variable flag is reset (step 075FS314). Next, the CPU 103 transmits a normal state designation command to the performance control CPU 120 in response to the transition of the game state from the time-saving state to the normal state (low probability/low base state) (step 075FS315) and proceeds to step 075FS316. If the probability variable flag is not set in step 075FS313 (N in step 075FS313), the process of step 075FS314 is not performed and the process proceeds to step 075FS315. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (S110) (step 075FS316), and the process ends.

(Pre-opening process for big win)
13-14 is a flow chart showing an example of the big win opening pre-processing. As shown in FIG. 13-14, in the big win opening pre-processing, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the big win opening control timer by 1 (subtract update) (step 075FS401). Then, it is determined whether the value of the big win opening control timer is 0 (step 075FS402), and if the value of the big win opening control timer is not 0 (N in step 075FS402), the process is terminated.

If the value of the large prize opening control timer is 0 (Y in step 075FS402), a command to specify that the large prize opening is open is sent to the performance control CPU 120 (step 075FS403). Then, the solenoid 82 is driven according to the opening pattern to open the regular large prize opening (step 075FS404). As a result, the regular large prize opening is opened in the first round.

Next, the CPU 103 sets the large prize opening control timer to a large prize opening opening time (29 seconds) corresponding to the maximum time that the large prize opening can be opened (large prize opening opening time) based on the opening pattern data (for example, data stored in the RAM 102 by step 075FS306) (step 075FS405). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the large prize opening processing (S115) (step 075FS406), and ends the processing.

(Processing during jackpot opening)
13-15 is a flow chart showing an example of the big win opening process. As shown in FIG. 13-15, in the big win opening process, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the big win opening control timer by 1 (subtraction update) (step 075FS501).

Then, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the large prize opening control timer has reached 0 (step 075FS502). If the value of the large prize opening control timer has reached 0 (Y in step 075FS501), the process proceeds to step 075FS511. If the value of the large prize opening control timer has not reached 0 (N in step 075FS502), the process determines whether the regular large prize opening or the V large prize opening is open (step 075FS503). Whether the regular large prize opening or the V large prize opening is open can be determined from the value of the opening count counter.

If it is determined in step 075FS503 that the regular large prize opening or the V large prize opening is not open (N in step 075FS503), the process ends.

If the regular large prize opening or the V large prize opening is open (Y in step 075FS503), it is determined whether the count switch 23 or the V prize switch 075F024 is on (step 075FS504). If neither the count switch 23 nor the V prize switch 075F024 is on (N in step 075FS504), the process ends. On the other hand, if either the count switch 23 or the V prize switch 075F024 is on (Y in step 075FS504), the prize number counter is incremented by +1 (updated) (step 075FS505).

Next, it is determined whether the high probability variable flag is set (step 075FS506). The high probability variable flag is a flag that is set when it is determined that the machine will be controlled into the high probability variable state when a V win occurs. If the high probability variable flag is set (Y in step 075FS506), processing proceeds to step 075FS510. On the other hand, if the high probability variable flag is not set (N in step 075FS506), it is determined whether the V win switch 075F024 is on (step 075FS507). If the V win switch 075F024 is not on (N in step 075FS507), processing proceeds to step 075FS510. On the other hand, if the V winning switch is on (Y in step 075FS507), the probability change determination flag is set (step 075FS508), a probability change determination device pass command is sent (step 075FS509), and processing proceeds to step 075FS510.

Then, the CPU 103 determines whether the value of the winning number counter has reached a predetermined number (for example, 10) (step 075FS510). If the value of the winning number counter has not reached the predetermined number (N in step 075FS510), the process ends.

When the value of the winning number counter is a predetermined number (Y in step 075FS510), the CPU 103 performs either control to drive the solenoid 82 to close the normal large prize opening, or control to drive the solenoid 075F083 to close the V large prize opening (step 075FS511). Next, the CPU 103 performs a process to clear (set to 0) the value of the winning number counter (step 075FS512). Next, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the post-large prize opening process (S116) (step 075FS513), and ends the process.

(Post-opening processing)
13-16 is a flow chart showing an example of the big win release post-processing. As shown in FIG. 13-16, in the big win release post-processing, the CPU 103 judges whether the value of the release number counter is 0 or not (step 075FS601).

If the value of the opening count counter is 0 (Y in step 075FS601), a jackpot end command is sent to the performance control CPU 120 (step 075FS602), a value corresponding to the jackpot end time (the time at which the jackpot game is notified, for example, on the image display device 5 that the jackpot game has ended) is set in the jackpot entry port control timer (step 075FS603), the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot end process (S117) (step 075FS604), and the process ends.

In step 075FS601, if the value of the opening count counter is not 0 (N in step 075FS601), a command to specify when the large prize opening is to be opened is sent to the performance control CPU 120 (step 075FS605), and the large prize opening control timer is set to a value equivalent to the interval time from the end of a round to the start of the next round (step 075FS606).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not it is before the round in which the V large prize opening is opened (also called the V opening round), i.e., whether or not the next round is a V opening round (step 075FS607). If it is not before the V opening round (N in step 075FS607), control is performed to drive the solenoid 82 to open the normal large prize opening (step 075FS608). On the other hand, if it is before the V opening round (Y in step 075FS607), control is performed to drive the solenoid 075F083 to open the V large prize opening (step 075FS609).

After step 075FS608 or step 075FS609, the CPU 103 sends a command to the performance control CPU 120 to specify whether the big win opening is in progress (step 075FS610). The CPU 103 then updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the big win opening processing (S115) (step 075FS611), and ends the processing.

(Jackpot end processing)
FIG. 13-17 is a flow chart showing an example of the jackpot end process. As shown in FIG. 13-17, in the jackpot end process, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the large prize opening control timer in which the jackpot end time is set (step 075FS701). Then, the CPU 103 judges whether the value of the large prize opening control timer is 0 (whether the jackpot end time has elapsed) (step 075FS702). If the value of the large prize opening control timer is not 0 (N in step 075FS702), the process ends. If the value of the large prize opening control timer is 0 (Y in step 075FS702), the jackpot flag is reset (step 075FS703).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether the high probability flag, which is set by passing through the V winning area, is set (step 075FS704). If the high probability flag is not set (N in step 075FS704), the process proceeds to step 075FS705. If the high probability flag is set in step 075FS704 (Y in step 075FS704), the high probability flag indicating that the game is in a high probability state is set (step 075FS707). Next, a high probability state designation command is sent to the performance control CPU 120 (step 075FS708), the high probability flag is reset (step 075FS709), and the process proceeds to step 075FS710.

In step 075FS710, a time-saving flag is set to indicate that the time-saving state is active (step 075FS710), and the time-saving count counter is set to 150 (step 075FS711). Then, the process proceeds to step 075FS712.

On the other hand, if the probability of a bonus has not been set in step 075FS704 (N in step 075FS704), then in step 075FS705, a time-saving flag is set indicating that the game is in the time-saving state (step 075FS705), the time-saving counter is set to 100 (step 075FS706), and the process proceeds to step 075FS712.

In step 075FS712, a time-saving state designation command is sent to the performance control CPU 120 (step 075FS712). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (S110) (step 075FS713), and ends the process. Note that the performance control CPU 120 is able to recognize whether the game is in a special, time-saving, or normal state based on the special state designation command sent from the CPU 103.

(Performance processing during big win)
Next, the processing by the performance control CPU 120 mounted on the performance control board 12 will be described. FIG. 13-18 is a flow chart showing an example of the performance processing during a jackpot. As shown in FIG. 13-18, in the performance processing during a jackpot, the performance control CPU 120 first judges whether the jackpot end designation command reception flag is set (step 075FS651). Here, flags such as the jackpot end designation command reception flag are set by the performance control CPU 120 when data indicating that the jackpot end designation command has been received is stored in the command reception buffer formed in the ROM 121, and are erased at a predetermined timing such as when the jackpot game ends.

If the jackpot end command reception flag is not set (N in step 075FS651), the performance control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the process timer (step 075FS652).

Next, it is determined whether the process timer has timed out (step 075FS653). If the process timer has timed out (Y in step 075FS653), the process data is switched (step 075FS655). Then, the process timer is started again by setting the process timer to the next process timer setting value in the process table (step 075FS656). In addition, the performance device (image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, game effect lamp 9, etc.) is controlled according to the content of the next set process data (step 075FS657). For example, the performance control CPU 120 reads image data from ROM 121 according to the content of the process data in order to display an image corresponding to the performance during the round on the image display device 5, and outputs the read image data to the image display device 5. In addition, a control signal is output to the lamp control board 14 in order to control the lighting/flashing/extinguishing of various lamps such as the game effect lamp 9. It also outputs a control signal (sound number data) to the sound control board 13 to cause the speakers 8L and 8R to output sound. Then, the process ends.

If the process timer has not timed out (N in step 075FS653), control of the presentation devices (image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, game effect lamp 9, etc.) continues according to the contents of the set process data (step 075FS654). Then, the process ends.

The performance control CPU 120 sets the above-mentioned process data based on the performance control command received from the CPU 103 mounted on the main board 11. For example, when the performance control CPU 120 receives a jackpot start command (A0 series command) from the CPU 103 based on the occurrence of a jackpot, it sets process data corresponding to the fanfare performance in order to execute the fanfare performance under the control of the performance device. Furthermore, when the performance control CPU 120 receives a right-hit display lighting command from the CPU 103 based on the occurrence of a jackpot, it lights up the lighting means such as an LED in the right-hit display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 to encourage the player to hit right.

In addition, when the performance control CPU 120 receives a command (A1 series command) to specify that the large prize opening is open from the CPU 103 at the start of each round of a jackpot, it sets process data corresponding to the mid-round performance in order to execute the mid-round performance under the control of the performance device, as follows.

When the CPU 120 for controlling the performance receives a command (A102 command) to specify when the large prize opening is in progress from the CPU 103 at the start of the second round of a 5R normal jackpot, it sets process data for executing a V-type probability variation indication effect that indicates whether or not the jackpot is a probability variation jackpot. At this time, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance identifies the type of jackpot (in this case, a 5R normal jackpot) based on the command (A0 series command) to specify when the jackpot is in progress that has already been received, and identifies the round of the jackpot (in this case, 2R) based on the command (A102 command) to specify when the large prize opening is in progress, and sets process data for executing an indication corresponding to the identified round of the jackpot (in this case, a V-type probability variation indication effect).

When the CPU 120 for controlling the performance receives a command (A102 command) to specify that the large prize opening is open from the CPU 103 at the start of the second round of a 5R special jackpot, it sets process data for executing a V special jackpot suggestion performance (see FIG. 13-41). At this time, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance identifies the type of jackpot (in this case, a 5R special jackpot) based on the command (A0 series command) to specify the start of the jackpot that has already been received, identifies the round of the jackpot (in this case, 2R) based on the command (A102 command) to specify that the large prize opening is open, and sets process data for executing a performance corresponding to the identified round of the jackpot (in this case, a V special jackpot suggestion performance).

In addition, when the CPU 120 for controlling the performance receives a command (A103 command) to specify that the large prize opening is in progress from the CPU 103 at the start of the third round of a five round probability jackpot, it sets process data for executing a V notice performance (see FIG. 13-42) that notifies the player that the next fourth round will be a V opening round. At this time, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance identifies the type of jackpot (in this case, a five round probability jackpot) based on the command (A0 series command) to specify the start of the jackpot that has already been received, and identifies the round of the jackpot (in this case, the third round) based on the command (A103 command) to specify that the large prize opening is in progress, and sets process data for executing a performance corresponding to the identified round of the jackpot (in this case, a V notice performance).

In addition, when the CPU 120 for controlling the performance receives a command (A203 command) to specify after the opening of the large prize opening from the CPU 103 after 3R of the 5R special jackpot, it sets process data for executing the "Aim for V" performance (see FIG. 13-43) that aims to make the game ball enter the V large prize opening, which is a specific area, between rounds. At this time, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance specifies the type of jackpot (in this case, a 5R special jackpot) based on the command to specify after the opening of the large prize opening (A203 command) that has already been received, specifies the round of the jackpot that has ended (in this case, 3R), and sets process data for executing the performance (in this case, the "Aim for V" performance) according to the specified post-round during the jackpot. The "Aim for V" performance is a guide display using an image display related to the V large prize opening, which is a specific area. Specifically, in the Aim for V presentation, an image is displayed that encourages the player to hit to the right to launch the game ball toward the V large prize opening, which is a specific area. In the Aim for V presentation, an image may be displayed that points to the V large prize opening itself, which is a specific area, an image may be displayed that points to the vicinity of the V large prize opening, which is a specific area, or an image may be displayed that points to the path to the V large prize opening, which is a specific area.

In addition, when the CPU 120 for controlling the presentation receives a command (A104 command) to specify that the large prize opening is open from the CPU 103 at the start of the 4th round of a 5R sure-win jackpot, it sets process data for continuing to execute the Aim for V presentation (see FIG. 13-44). At this time, the CPU 120 for controlling the presentation identifies the type of jackpot (in this case, a 5R sure-win jackpot) based on the command (A0 series command) to specify the start of the jackpot that has already been received, and identifies the round of the jackpot (in this case, 4th round) based on the command (A104 command) to specify that the large prize opening is open, and sets process data for executing the presentation corresponding to the identified round of the jackpot (in this case, the Aim for V presentation).

When the CPU 120 for controlling the performance receives a command (A108 command) to specify that the large prize opening is in progress from the CPU 103 at the start of the 8th round of a 10R sure-win jackpot, it sets process data for executing a V notice performance that notifies the player that the next 9th round will be a V opening round. At this time, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance identifies the type of jackpot (in this case, a 10R sure-win jackpot) based on the command (A0 series command) to specify the start of the jackpot that has already been received, and identifies the round of the jackpot (in this case, 8th round) based on the command (A108 command) to specify that the large prize opening is in progress, and sets process data for executing a performance (in this case, a V notice performance) that corresponds to the round of the jackpot that has been identified.

In addition, when the CPU 120 for controlling the presentation receives a command (A208 command) specifying the time after the opening of the large prize opening from the CPU 103 after 8R of a 10R sure-win jackpot, it sets process data for executing a "Aim for V" presentation that aims to make the game ball enter the V large prize opening, which is a specific area, between rounds. At this time, the CPU 120 for controlling the presentation specifies the type of jackpot (in this case, a 10R sure-win jackpot) based on the already received command specifying the start of the jackpot (A0 series command), specifies the round of the jackpot that has ended (in this case, 8R) based on the command specifying the time after the opening of the large prize opening (A208 command), and sets process data for executing a presentation corresponding to the end of the round during the specified jackpot (in this case, the "Aim for V" presentation).

In addition, when the CPU 120 for controlling the performance receives a command (A109 command) to specify that the large prize opening is open from the CPU 103 at the start of the 9th round of a 10R special jackpot, it sets process data for continuing to execute the "Aim for V" performance. At this time, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance identifies the type of jackpot (in this case, a 10R special jackpot) based on the command (A0 series command) to specify the start of the jackpot that has already been received, and identifies the round of the jackpot (in this case, 9R) based on the command (A109 command) to specify that the large prize opening is open, and sets process data for executing the performance (in this case, the "Aim for V" performance) according to the round of the jackpot that has been identified.

Furthermore, when the output control CPU 120 receives a command (AD00 command) to specify passage through the probability change determination device from the CPU 103 during a jackpot round, it sets process data corresponding to the V winning presentation in order to execute the V winning presentation by controlling the presentation device as follows.

When the CPU 120 for controlling the performance receives a command (AD00 command) to specify passage through the probability change determination device from the CPU 103 during the 4th round of a 5th round probability change jackpot, it sets process data for executing the V winning performance (see Figure 13-44).

When the CPU 120 for controlling the performance receives a command (AD00) to specify passage through the probability change determination device from the CPU 103 during the 9R of a 10R probability change jackpot, it sets process data for executing the V winning performance.

In addition, when the presentation control CPU 120 receives a jackpot end command (A3 series command) from the CPU 103 based on the end of the jackpot gaming state, it sets process data for executing an ending presentation (see Figures 13-46 and 13-47) that indicates the end of the jackpot gaming state.

In this way, the performance control CPU 120 sets process data based on the performance control commands received from the CPU 103, thereby controlling the performance devices such as the image display device 5, speakers 8L and 8R, and game effect lamp 9 to execute various performances.

[Outline of game progress]
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the characteristic part 075F configured as described above, the game proceeds as follows. The pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the characteristic part 075F also has the content of the game played in the basic pachinko gaming machine 1 already described, but the following will particularly explain the part of the game related to the characteristic part 075F.

In the pachinko game machine 1, the player first hits with the left hand to launch the game ball toward the first flow path that passes through the left area of the game area. When the launched game ball enters the first start winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special game is started. When the result of the first special game is that the special game 1 variable display unit 075F021 is in a display mode showing a jackpot pattern, a jackpot occurs.

As mentioned above, the types of jackpots in the first special pattern game include a 5R normal jackpot, a 5R special chance jackpot, and a 10R special chance jackpot. When a jackpot occurs, a fanfare effect is executed, and a right-hit promotion effect is executed to encourage the player to make a right hit. The right-hit promotion effect is executed by displaying text (for example, "right hit") and a graphic image (for example, an arrow pointing to the right, which is the direction of the second flow path) on the screen of the image display device 5 to encourage a right hit, and also by lighting up the right-hit display unit 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020 and the right-hit display unit 075F055 of the fourth pattern unit 075F050, for example, LEDs or other lighting means to encourage a right hit. This causes the player to make a right hit from then on.

During a round in the jackpot game state, the jackpot opening opens a predetermined number of times (for example, five times for a 5R normal jackpot and a 5R special jackpot, and ten times for a 10R special jackpot). The jackpot opening continues until a predetermined period of time (for example, 29 seconds) has elapsed, or until the number of game balls that have entered the jackpot reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10), whichever comes first.

In the case of a 5R normal jackpot, the normal large prize entry port opens in the 1st to 3rd rounds and the 5th round, but the V large prize entry port opens only in the 4th round. However, since the control pattern of the distribution member (not shown) in the attacker is a control pattern that makes it difficult to win a V prize, there will be no V prize. Also, since there will be no V prize, the Aim for V performance will not be executed in the 4th round, and the same background image as in the 1st round will be displayed. Specifically, in the case of a 5R normal jackpot, the normal large prize entry port opens in the 1st and 2nd rounds, and in the 2nd round, a V special probability suggestion performance is executed, which suggests whether or not there is a special probability jackpot. Then, as a result of the V special probability suggestion performance, it is announced that it is a normal jackpot, not a special probability jackpot. After that, the V large prize entry port opens in the 4th round, but no V prize occurs, and then in the 5th round, the normal large prize entry port opens, and when the 5th round ends, the ending performance is executed.

In the case of a 5R special jackpot, the normal special jackpot is opened in the 1st to 3rd rounds and the 5th round, but the V special jackpot is opened only in the 4th round. Specifically, in the case of a 5R special jackpot, the normal special jackpot is opened in the 1st and 2nd rounds, as in the 5R normal jackpot, and in the 2nd round, a V special jackpot suggestion effect is executed, which indicates whether or not it is a special jackpot. Then, as a result of the V special jackpot suggestion effect, it is announced that it is a special jackpot. Then, in the 3rd round after that, a V notice effect is executed, which indicates that the next 4th round is a V opening round. In the 4th round, the V special jackpot is opened, and when the game ball that entered the V special jackpot is detected by the V entry switch 075F024, a V entry occurs. This gives the player the right to control the game state after the jackpot round to a special jackpot state. After that, in the 5th round, the regular big prize slot opens again, and when the 5th round ends, the ending performance is performed.

In the case of a 10R special jackpot, the normal special jackpot is opened in the 1st through 8th rounds and the 10th round, but the V special jackpot is opened only in the 9th round. Specifically, in the case of a 10R special jackpot, the normal special jackpot is opened in the 1st through 7th rounds, and in the 7th round, a V special jackpot suggestion effect is executed, which suggests whether or not it is a special jackpot. Then, as a result of the V special jackpot suggestion effect, it is announced that it is a special jackpot. Then, in the 8th round, a V notice effect is executed, which announces that the next 9th round is a V opening round. In the 9th round, the V special jackpot is opened, and when the game ball that entered the V special jackpot is detected by the V entry switch 075F024, a V entry occurs. This gives the player the right to control the game state after the jackpot round to a special jackpot state. After that, in the 10th round, the regular big prize slot opens again, and when the 10th round ends, the ending performance is performed.

When the ending performance after the jackpot game state ends, the game state is controlled to the time-saving state for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 times for a 5R normal jackpot, 150 times for a 5R special jackpot and a 10R special jackpot). Furthermore, in the case of a 5R special jackpot and a 10R special jackpot, if a V win occurs during the jackpot round, the game state is controlled to the special jackpot state for a predetermined number of fluctuations (150 times) that are controlled to the time-saving state. In other words, in the case of a 5R normal jackpot, the game state after the jackpot round becomes a low-probability high-base state, and in the case of a 5R special jackpot or a 10R special jackpot, the game state after the jackpot round becomes a high-probability high-base state.

Even in the special probability state or time-saving state after the jackpot round, the right-hit promotion effect continues to be executed by the image display device 5, the right-hit display unit 075F030, and the right-hit display unit 075F055. Therefore, after the first jackpot (also called the first hit) occurs, the player is always prompted to hit right by the right-hit promotion effect, even in the time-saving state after the jackpot round ends.

In the time-saving state, control is performed to shorten the average special chart change time (period during which the special chart changes) more than in the normal state, and control is performed to shorten the average regular chart change time (period during which the regular chart changes) more than in the normal state, and further control is performed to increase the probability of a "regular chart hit" in the regular chart game more than in the normal state. Also, in the time-saving state, electric chute support control may be performed to increase the frequency at which the variable winning ball device 6B that forms the second start winning port is opened, thereby increasing the frequency at which the game ball enters the second start winning port, making it easier to win in the second start winning port (higher entry, higher frequency).

In the time-saving state after the jackpot round, the released game ball enters the second start winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, starting the second special game. As a result of the second special game, when the special game 2 variable display section 075F022 changes to a display mode showing a jackpot pattern, a jackpot (also called a consecutive win) occurs.

As mentioned above, the type of jackpot in the second special game is the 10R guaranteed jackpot. When a jackpot occurs, a fanfare effect is executed. The right-hit promotion effect by the image display device 5, right-hit display unit 075F030, and right-hit display unit 075F055 continues from the first jackpot.

During a round in which a jackpot game is in progress, the jackpot opening opens a predetermined number of times (e.g., 10 times). Each opening of the jackpot opening continues until either a predetermined period of time (e.g., 29 seconds) has elapsed or the number of game balls that have entered the jackpot opening reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 10), whichever comes first.

Because it is a 10R sure-win jackpot, the normal big prize opening is open in the 1st through 8th rounds and the 10th round, but the V big prize opening is only open in the 9th round. Specifically, like the first win, the normal big prize opening is open in the 1st through 7th rounds. Then, in the 8th round that follows, a V notice performance is executed, notifying the player that the next 9th round will be a V opening round. In the 9th round, the V big prize opening is opened, and when the game ball that entered the V big prize opening is detected by the V entry switch 075F024, a V entry occurs. This grants the player the right to control the game state after the jackpot round to a sure-win state. After that, in the 10th round, the normal big prize opening is opened again, and when the 10th round ends, an ending performance is executed.

Then, when the ending presentation after the jackpot game state ends, the game state is controlled to the time-saving state and the probability variable state (high probability, high base state) for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 150 times) in the same way as the first hit. Even in the probability variable state after the jackpot round in a consecutive hit, the right-hit promotion presentation continues to be executed by the image display device 5, the right-hit display unit 075F030, and the right-hit display unit 075F055. For this reason, after the first hit occurs, consecutive hits occur in the probability variable state or the time-saving state after the jackpot round ends, and the player is always encouraged to hit right by the right-hit promotion presentation, even in the probability variable state or the time-saving state after the jackpot round ends in the consecutive hit.

When the probability variable state or time-saving state ends without a jackpot occurring in either the probability variable state or time-saving state after the first jackpot round ends, or the probability variable state or time-saving state after the consecutive jackpot round ends, the game state is controlled to the normal state (low probability low base state), and the right-hit promotion effect by the image display device 5, right-hit display unit 075F030, and right-hit display unit 075F055 also ends. This allows the player to hit the ball from the left again to launch the game ball toward the first flow path that passes through the left area of the game area.

[Timing chart of an example of processing]
With reference to Fig. 13-19 to Fig. 13-21, the timing of the main processing executed by the pachinko game machine 1 relating to the characteristic part 075F will be described. Fig. 13-19 is a timing chart showing an example of processing during a winning fluctuation. Fig. 13-20 is a timing chart showing an example of processing during a jackpot. Fig. 13-21 is a timing chart showing an example of processing after the jackpot ends. Fig. 13-19 to Fig. 13-21 show the timing of processing when a 5R variable jackpot occurs.

As shown in FIG. 13-19, at t1, when the first special symbol game starts as the game ball enters the first start winning hole, the CPU 103 sends a reserved memory number designation command (C1 series command), a background designation command (95 series command), a pattern change designation command (8D series command), a display result designation command (8C series command), and a change pattern designation command (81 series command) to the performance control CPU 120. In response, the performance control CPU 120 sets process data for changing and displaying decorative symbols in response to the change in the first special symbol, and for executing a change-in-progress performance (for example, a reach performance or a preview performance) in accordance with the change in the first special symbol.

For example, the performance control CPU 120 updates the display of the first reserved memory display area 075F005D and updates the lighting state of the special pattern 1 memory display unit 075F051 by specifying the first reserved memory number based on the reserved memory number specification command. The performance control CPU 120 also controls the image display device 5 to display a background image corresponding to the game state by specifying the game state being controlled based on the background specification command. The performance control CPU 120 also specifies that the special pattern will start to change based on the pattern change specification command, and sets the start timing of the performance. The performance control CPU 120 also specifies the presence or absence of a jackpot and the type of jackpot based on the display result specification command, and determines the corresponding decorative pattern. Furthermore, the performance control CPU 120 also sets the execution time of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern (presence or absence of a reach, etc.), and the content of the performance during the variable display of the decorative pattern (type of reach performance, etc.) based on the change pattern specification command.

After that, when the variation of the special symbol stops at t2, the CPU 103 sends a symbol determination command (8F00) to the performance control CPU 120. Note that the performance control CPU 120 does not set any particular performance based on the symbol determination command.

When a jackpot occurs as a result of the special symbol fluctuation stop, at t3 thereafter, the CPU 103 transmits a jackpot start command (A0 command) and a right-hit display lighting command (FD command) to the performance control CPU 120. In response to this, the performance control CPU 120 sets process data for executing a fanfare performance and lights up lighting means such as an LED in the right-hit display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050. For example, the performance control CPU 120 sets process data for displaying an image congratulating the jackpot on the image display device 5 as a fanfare performance, and outputting a sound congratulating the jackpot from the speakers 8L and 8R. In addition, the performance control CPU 120 displays an image encouraging right-hitting on the image display device 5 as a right-hit promotion performance, and outputs a sound encouraging right-hitting from the speakers 8L and 8R.

As shown in FIG. 13-20, when the big win round starts at t4, the CPU 103 opens the normal big win opening and sends a big win opening open command (A101 command) to the performance control CPU 120. In response, the performance control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the in-round performance in the first round.

After that, when the first round ends at t5, the CPU 103 closes the regular large prize opening and sends a command (A201 command) to the performance control CPU 120 to specify what happens after the large prize opening is opened. Note that the performance control CPU 120 does not set any special performance settings based on the command to specify what happens after the large prize opening is opened.

After that, when the second round starts at t6, the CPU 103 opens the normal large prize opening and sends a command (A102 command) to the performance control CPU 120 to specify that the large prize opening is open. In response, the performance control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the performance during the round in the second round. For example, the performance control CPU 120 sets process data for executing a V probability change suggestion performance (see FIG. 13-41) based on the command (A102 command) to specify that the large prize opening is open.

After that, when the second round ends at t7, the CPU 103 closes the regular large prize opening and sends a command (A202 command) to the performance control CPU 120 to specify what happens after the large prize opening is opened. Note that the performance control CPU 120 does not set any special performance settings based on the command to specify what happens after the large prize opening is opened.

After that, when the third round starts at t8, the CPU 103 opens the normal large prize opening and sends a large prize opening open command (A103 command) to the performance control CPU 120. In response, the performance control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the in-round performance in the third round. For example, the performance control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the V preview performance (see FIG. 13-42) based on the large prize opening open command (A103 command).

After that, when the third round ends at t9, the CPU 103 closes the regular large prize opening and sends a command (A203 command) to the performance control CPU 120 to specify what happens after the large prize opening is opened. In response, the performance control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the inter-round performance from after the third round to the fourth round. For example, the performance control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the Aim for V performance (see FIG. 13-43) based on the command (A203 command) to specify what happens after the large prize opening is opened.

As shown in FIG. 13-21, when the 4th round starts at t10, the CPU 103 opens the normal large prize opening and sends a command (A104 command) to the performance control CPU 120 to specify that the large prize opening is open. In response, the performance control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the in-round performance in the 4th round. For example, the performance control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the V preview performance (see FIG. 13-42) and then the Aim for V performance (see FIG. 13-43) based on the command (A104 command) to specify that the large prize opening is open.

After that, when a V win occurs at t11, the CPU 103 sends a command (AD00 command) to the performance control CPU 120 to specify passage of the probability change determination device. In response, the performance control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the V win performance (see FIG. 13-44).

After that, when the 4th round ends at t12, the CPU 103 closes the regular large prize opening and sends a command (A204 command) to the performance control CPU 120 to specify what happens after the large prize opening is opened. Note that the performance control CPU 120 does not set any special performance settings based on the command to specify what happens after the large prize opening is opened.

After that, when the 5th round starts at t13, the CPU 103 opens the normal large prize opening and sends a large prize opening open command (A105 command) to the performance control CPU 120. In response, the performance control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the in-round performance in the 5th round.

After that, when the 5th round ends at t14, the CPU 103 closes the regular large prize opening and sends a command (A205 command) to the performance control CPU 120 to specify what happens after the large prize opening is opened. Note that the performance control CPU 120 does not set any special performance based on the command to specify what happens after the large prize opening is opened.

After that, at t15, the CPU 103 sends a jackpot end command (A3 command) to the performance control CPU 120. In response, the performance control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the ending performance.

After that, the game is controlled to a high probability state and a time-saving state (high probability high base state), and in this state, the CPU 103 changes the performance control command depending on whether the number of reserved memories exceeds 0.

For example, at t16, if the number of reserved memories exceeds 0, the CPU 103 sends a reserved memory number designation command (C2 series command), a background designation command (95 series command), a pattern change designation command (8D series command), a display result designation command (8C series command), and a change pattern designation command (81 series command) to the performance control CPU 120. In response, the performance control CPU 120 sets process data for changing and displaying the decorative patterns in response to the change in the second special pattern, and for executing a performance during change (for example, a reach performance or a preview performance) in accordance with the change in the second special pattern.

On the other hand, if the number of reserved memories does not exceed 0, the CPU 103 sends a background designation command (95 series command) and a customer waiting demo designation command (9F series command) to the performance control CPU 120. In response to this, the performance control CPU 120 performs a customer waiting demonstration performance (see FIG. 13-60) that allows the player to identify that no game is being played. For example, the performance control CPU 120 displays an image of the initial value (for example, 123) as a decorative pattern or small pattern on the image display device 5, or stops the output of sound from the speakers 8L and 8R. Note that the customer waiting demonstration performance is not limited to the form shown in FIG. 13-60, and may be any performance that allows the player to identify that no game is being played, such as a character image or the logo of the manufacturer of the pachinko game machine 1.

[Lamp lighting status]
Fig. 13-22 is an explanatory diagram showing the lighting state of the lamps. In this embodiment, the game effect lamps 9 (movable body lamp 9d, attacca lamp 9c, attacca upper lamp 075F009U, left lower lamp 075F009D, right panel lamp 075F009F, left panel lamp 075F009E, right frame lamp 075F009R, left frame lamp 075F009L), the right hit display unit 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020, and the right hit display unit 075F055 of the fourth pattern unit 075F050 are shown in a black-painted state as shown in Fig. 13-22 (A) when each of them is turned off.

In addition, in this embodiment, the game effect lamps 9 (movable body lamp 9d, attacca lamp 9c, attacca upper lamp 075F009U, lower left lamp 075F009D, board right lamp 075F009F, board left lamp 075F009E, frame right lamp 075F009R, frame left lamp 075F009L), the right hit display unit 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020, and the right hit display unit 075F055 of the fourth pattern unit 075F050 are shown in a white-painted manner as shown in Figure 13-22 (B) when they are lit.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the game effect lamps 9 (movable body lamp 9d, attacca lamp 9c, attacca upper lamp 075F009U, lower left lamp 075F009D, board right lamp 075F009F, board left lamp 075F009E, frame right lamp 075F009R, frame left lamp 075F009L), the right hit display unit 075F030 of the special symbol LED board 075F020, and the right hit display unit 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are each shown as being lit/blinking/off in a manner corresponding to the performance and the background displayed on the image display device 5, in a hatched manner as shown in FIG. 13-22 (C).

[Performance of Pachinko Game Machine 1]
Next, a description will be given of the presentation mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 during a game. Figures 13-23 to 13-33 and 13-38 to 13-50 are explanatory diagrams showing the presentation mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 during a game.

As shown in FIG. 13-23(a), when a losing symbol stops due to the variation of the special symbol in the previous game, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the stopping of the losing symbol. After that, if there is a first reserved memory number, the CPU 103 transmits a reserved memory number designation command (C1 series command), a background designation command (95 series command), a symbol variation designation command (8D series command), a display result designation command (8C series command), and a variation pattern designation command (81 series command) to the performance control CPU 120. In response to this, the performance control CPU 120 changes and displays the decorative symbol in response to the variation of the first special symbol based on the command from the CPU 103, or executes a variation-in-progress performance (for example, a reach performance or a notice performance) in accordance with the variation of the first special symbol. The performance control CPU 120 sets the data for each of the performances in Fig. 13-23(b1) to Fig. 13-24(b3) based on the reserved memory number designation command (C1 series command), background designation command (95 series command), pattern change designation command (8D series command), display result designation command (8C series command), and change pattern designation command (81 series command). In other words, each of the performances performed between Fig. 13-23(b1) to Fig. 13-24(b3) progresses over time, rather than being triggered by a performance control command.

As shown in FIG. 13-23(b1), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the variation of the first special symbol. Also, as shown in FIG. 13-23(b2), in the event of a jackpot variation, an image corresponding to the reach effect is displayed on the image display device 5, a sound corresponding to the reach effect is output from the speakers 8L, 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the reach effect.

After that, when the variation of the special symbol stops, the CPU 103 sends a symbol determination command (8F00) to the performance control CPU 120. Note that the performance control CPU 120 does not set any particular performance based on the symbol determination command.

As shown in FIG. 13-24(b3), when a jackpot occurs as a result of the stop of the special symbol fluctuation, the CPU 103 sends a jackpot start command (A0 command) and a right-hit display lighting command (FD command) to the performance control CPU 120. In response to this, the performance control CPU 120 executes a fanfare performance based on the command from the CPU 103, and lights up the lighting means such as an LED in the right-hit display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050. The performance control CPU 120 sets the data for each performance in FIG. 13-24(c1) to FIG. 13-38(d2) based on the jackpot start command (A0 command) and the right-hit display lighting command (FD command). In other words, each performance performed between FIG. 13-24(c1) to FIG. 13-38(d2) progresses over time, rather than being triggered by a performance control command.

Here, the fanfare effect will be explained in detail. The fanfare effect is divided into multiple effect parts. In this embodiment, the fanfare effect includes a celebration part, a name display part, and a right-hit promotion part. The celebration part is an effect part in which an effect to celebrate a jackpot is executed, and as described later in FIG. 13-24 (c1), an image celebrating the jackpot is displayed on the image display device 5, a sound celebrating the jackpot is output from the speakers 8L, 8R, and the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 is changed to a lighting mode celebrating the jackpot. The name display part is a presentation part that informs the player that a jackpot round is about to start by announcing the name of the jackpot game state that has occurred, and also informs the player of the type of the jackpot game state that has occurred. As described later in Fig. 13-24 (c2) and (c3), a name image showing the name of the jackpot game state is displayed on the image display device 5, a sound corresponding to the start of the jackpot is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the lighting state of the game effect lamp 9 changes to a lighting state corresponding to the start of the jackpot. The right hit promotion part is a presentation part that encourages the player to hit right, and as described later in Fig. 13-24 (c4) to Fig. 13-33 (c29), a big right hit promotion presentation is executed that encourages the player to hit right using image displays of letters and figures. After the jackpot symbol stops and the symbol is confirmed, the performance control CPU 120 receives a symbol confirmation command (8F00) from the CPU 103, and then starts a fanfare performance based on the jackpot start command (A0 series command) received from the CPU 103, and continues the fanfare until the regular jackpot opening opens and the jackpot round begins.

As shown in FIG. 13-24(c1), as the congratulatory part in the fanfare performance, an image congratulating the player on the big win (in this example, a character image and a text image of "Congratulations!!") is displayed on the image display device 5, a sound congratulating the player on the big win is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the lighting state of the game effect lamp 9 is changed to a lighting state congratulating the player on the big win. In addition, as a right-hit promotion performance, a small right-hit promotion performance is executed in which an image consisting of a figure (in this example, an arrow pointing to the right) and text (in this example, the text "right hit") is displayed small in the upper right corner of the image display device 5. The image display device 5 has multiple layers, and a predetermined image can be displayed on each layer. As shown in FIG. 13-24(c1), the image consisting of a figure and text in the small right-hit promotion performance is displayed on a layer on the front side (toward the player as seen from the pachinko game machine 1) of the image congratulating the player on the big win (in this example, a character image and a text image of "Congratulations!!"). In addition, in the fanfare performance, a sound encouraging right-hitting is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and further, as a right-hitting promotion performance, the lighting state of the right-hitting display unit 075F030 and the right-hitting display unit 075F055 changes to a state encouraging right-hitting (lighting in this example). The start order of the above-mentioned image display and lighting is as follows. First, after the pattern is determined, the CPU 103 transmits a jackpot start designation command (A0 command) and a right-hitting display lighting command (FD command), and lights up the right-hitting display unit 075F030. The performance control CPU 120 lights up the right-hitting display unit 075F055 based on the received right-hitting display lighting command (FD command), while displaying an image consisting of figures and letters in the small right-hitting promotion performance and an image celebrating the jackpot based on the received jackpot start designation command (A0 command) on the image display device 5. At this time, the image consisting of figures and letters in the small right hit promotion performance located closer to the front side is displayed on the image display device 5 at an earlier timing than the image celebrating the big win. That is, first, the lamps are turned on in the order of the right hit display unit 075F030 and the right hit display unit 075F055, and then the images consisting of figures and letters in the small right hit promotion performance and the image celebrating the big win are displayed in that order. In addition, the display of the image consisting of figures and letters in the small right hit promotion performance and the lighting of the right hit display unit 075F030 and the right hit display unit 075F055 are performed until the pattern is determined by the final variation in the high base state before returning to the normal state. At that time, first, after the pattern is determined, the CPU 103 transmits a right hit display off designation command together with a background designation command, and turns off the right hit display unit 075F030. The performance control CPU 120 turns off the right hit display unit 075F055 based on the received right hit display off designation command, while ending the display of the image consisting of figures and letters in the small right hit promotion performance and displaying the normal background image on the image display device 5 based on the received background designation command. Note that the image consisting of figures and letters in the small right hit promotion performance and the lighting by the right hit display unit 075F030 and the right hit display unit 075F055 may start and end at the same timing. In this way, the display period of the image consisting of figures and letters in the small right hit promotion performance coincides with the lighting period by the right hit display unit 075F030 and the right hit display unit 075F055, making it easier for the player to understand the period for hitting right.

As shown in FIG. 13-24 (c2), as a name display part in the fanfare performance, a part of the name image indicating the name of the jackpot game state that has occurred (in this example, "CHANCE" from the text image "CHANCE BONUS!!") is displayed in the center of the image display device 5, a sound corresponding to the start of the jackpot is output from speakers 8L, 8R, and the lighting state of the game effect lamp 9 changes to a lighting state corresponding to the start of the jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 13-25(c3), as the name display part in the fanfare effect, following FIG. 13-24(c2), the remaining part of the name image indicating the name of the jackpot game state that has occurred (in this example, "BONUS!!" from the text image of "CHANCE BONUS!!") is newly added and displayed in the center of the image display device 5. As a result, the text image of "CHANCE BONUS!!" is displayed in the center of the image display device 5 as the name image indicating the name of the jackpot game state that has occurred. In addition, the game effect lamp 9 is temporarily turned off in preparation for the big right hit promotion effect that is executed in the right hit promotion part of the fanfare effect that starts from the next timing. After that, from FIG. 13-24(c4) to FIG. 13-33(c29), a big right hit promotion effect is executed in which an image consisting of a figure (in this example, an arrow indicating the right direction) and text (in this example, the text "right hit") is displayed large in the center of the image display device 5 as a right hit promotion effect.

Here, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance controls the game effect lamp 9 in the fanfare performance and the big right hit promotion performance based on the lighting data stored in the lighting data table shown in FIG. 13-34 to FIG. 13-37. These lighting data tables are stored in the ROM 121. For example, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance moves the light-emitting part of the frame lamp based on the lighting data stored in the lighting data table to emit a guide light to encourage the player to hit the right. In this embodiment, the light-emitting part literally refers to the part that emits light. For example, the part where the light-emitting lamp is located among the multiple lamps included in the frame lamp is called the light-emitting part, and the part where the other lamps that are not lit (i.e., the lamps that are turned off) are located is not called the light-emitting part. In another example, the light-emitting part refers to the part that emits light with high brightness. For example, the part where the light-emitting lamp is located among the multiple lamps included in the frame lamp is called the light-emitting part, and the part where the lamp that is lit with a brightness lower than the brightness of the lamp located at the light-emitting part is not called the light-emitting part. Below, we will explain in detail how the performance control CPU 120 controls the lighting (light emission control) of various lamps.

Figure 13-34 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a parent table in a lighting data table. As shown in Figure 13-34, in the parent table in the lighting data table, the performance time of each of the fanfare effects and the big right hit promotion effects is specified for each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9, such as the frame lamp (frame right lamp 075F009R, frame left lamp 075F009L), the movable body lamp 9d, the bottom left lamp 075F009D, the attacca top lamp 075F009U, the board left lamp 075F009E, the board right lamp 075F009F, and the attacca lamp 9c. For example, each lamp in the game effect lamp 9 is set to perform a fanfare effect for 9880 msec, and then a big right hit promotion effect for 2000 msec. In addition, the big right hit promotion effect is configured to be repeated multiple times (twice in this embodiment), so the game effect lamp 9 will repeat the 2000 msec big right hit promotion effect twice.

Figure 13-35 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a child table in the lighting data table. As shown in Figure 13-35, in the child table in the lighting data table, the time for each of the fanfare effects and the big right hit promotion effects is subdivided for each lamp in the game effect lamp 9, and the grandchild table to be referenced in each time period is specified.

Here, for the big right hit promotion effect, the frame right lamp 075F009R and the frame left lamp 075F009L are assigned a common grandchild table W11. In addition, the bottom left lamp 075F009D, the attacca top lamp 075F009U, and the board left lamp 075F009E are not used in the big right hit promotion effect and are turned off, so no grandchild tables are provided. This allows the capacity of the lighting data used in the ROM 121 to be reduced as much as possible. For the attacca lamp 9c, the execution time of the big right hit promotion effect, 2000 msec, is further divided into multiple periods, and multiple grandchild tables are assigned. For example, grandchild table A11a is assigned to 330 msec, grandchild table A11b is assigned to 1350 msec, and grandchild table A11c is assigned to 320 msec.

Figures 13-36 and 13-37 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of a grandchild table in a lighting data table. Figure 13-36 shows data in grandchild table W11 for frame right lamp 075F009R and frame left lamp 075F009L. As shown in Figure 13-36, in grandchild table W11 for the frame right lamp, RGB data is specified over T1 to T56 at 30 msec intervals, and further data for all lamps being off (0x000000) is specified at the final time of 1000 msec (T57). Note that in the grandchild table, data for lamps 1 to 11 as shown in Figure 13-2 is specified for each of frame right lamp 075F009R and frame left lamp 075F009L. Also, in FIG. 13-36, to clearly indicate the lighting period for each lamp included in the frame lamp, dashed circles are added to the data (F00) at the timing when lighting starts and the data (000) at the timing when lighting ends.

Looking at the data in the grandchild table W11, first at T1, the fourth lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L lights up, then at T2, the third lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L lights up, then at T3, the second lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L lights up, then at T4, the first lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L lights up, then at T5, the second lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R lights up, then at T6, At T3 the third lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R lights up, then at T7 the fourth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R lights up, then at T8 the fifth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R lights up, then at T9 the sixth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R lights up, then at T10 the seventh lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R lights up, then at T11 the eighth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R lights up. After lighting begins, each lamp continues to light up while changing color to form seven colors. After that, first, the fourth lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is turned off at T46, then the third lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is turned off at T47, then the second lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is turned off at T48, then the first lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is turned off at T49, then the second lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off at T50, and then the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off at T51. The third lamp of 075F009R is turned off, then the fourth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off at T52, then the fifth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off at T53, then the sixth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off at T54, then the seventh lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off at T55, then the eighth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off at T56. After that, each lamp is turned off until 2000 msec has elapsed in one big right hit promotion performance. Note that after all the lamps are turned off at T56, the remaining time until 2000 msec has elapsed in one big right hit promotion performance is about 320 msec. In other words, the time used to turn the lights on is 30 msec x 56 = 1680 msec, so there is only about 320 msec remaining, but to ensure that the remaining time is completely turned off, the final time to turn the lights off is set to 1000 msec (T57), which is longer than the remaining time. Note that the first, fifth to eleventh lamps of the left frame lamp 075F009L and the first, ninth to eleventh lamps of the right frame lamp 075F009R are turned off for the entire time.

When the grandchild table W11, which stores the above-mentioned data, is used, as shown in Fig. 13-25 (c4) to Fig. 13-32 (c24), the frame lamps will light up in seven colors, starting with the fourth lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L and going from the eighth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R in an arch from the left to the right. This kind of big right hit promotion effect using the frame lamps will be performed twice.

Figure 13-37 shows data in the grandchild table K11 for the movable body lamp 9d and the grandchild tables A11a to A11c for the attacca lamp 9c. As shown in Figure 13-37, in the grandchild table K11 for the movable body lamp 9d, RGB data is specified over T1 to T56 at 30 msec intervals, and further, at the last time of 1000 msec (T57), data for turning off all the lamps (0x000000) is specified. In addition, in the grandchild table K11, data is specified for each of the left X (left X), center X (center X), and right X (right X) of the character "XXX" attached to the movable body 32 for the movable body lamp 9d. Also, in Figure 13-37, in order to easily indicate the lighting period for each lamp included in the movable body lamp 9d, a dashed circle is attached to the data at the timing when lighting starts (F00) and the data at the timing when lighting ends (000).

Referring to the data in the grandchild table K11, first the left X lamp of the movable body lamp 9d is turned on at T3, then the middle X lamp of the movable body lamp 9d is turned on at T4, and then the right X lamp of the movable body lamp 9d is turned on at T5. After starting to turn on, each lamp continues to turn on while changing color to seven colors. Then, first the left X lamp of the movable body lamp 9d is turned off at T48, then the middle X lamp of the movable body lamp 9d is turned off at T49, and then the right X lamp of the movable body lamp 9d is turned off at T50. Then, each lamp is turned off until 2000 msec has elapsed in one big right hit promotion performance. Note that after all the lamps are turned off at T50 and continue to be turned off until T56, the remaining time until 2000 msec has elapsed in one big right hit promotion performance is about 320 msec. That is, the time spent turning it on is 30 msec x 56 = 1680 msec, so there is only about 320 msec remaining, but to ensure that the remaining time is spent turning it off, the final turn-off time is set to 1000 msec (T57), which is longer than the remaining time. Also, compared to the grandchild table W11 of the frame lamp, the movable body lamp 9d starts to turn on later than the frame lamp (i.e., it remains off for the first T1 and T2), and turns off earlier than the frame lamp.

As shown in Fig. 13-25(c4) to Fig. 13-32(c24), when the grandchild table K11 in which the data described above is stored is used, the movable body lamp 9d goes out while the fourth lamp and the third lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L are on, and then the left X of the movable body lamp 9d goes out at the same timing as the second lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L goes out, and then the middle X and right X lamps go out, and then each lamp continues to light up in seven colors, and then the left X of the movable body lamp 9d goes out at the same timing as the second lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L goes out, and then the middle X and right X lamps go out. As a result, the movable body lamp 9d lights up in seven colors, starting with the left X lighting up, then the middle X lamp, and then the right X lamp, drawing an arch from the left side to the right side. This kind of big right hit promotion performance by the movable body lamp 9d is performed twice.

Figure 13-37 also shows data in grandchild tables A11a, A11b, and A11c for the attacca lamp 9c. As shown in Figure 13-37, in the grandchild table A11a for the attacca lamp 9c, RGB data is specified for a very long period of time, 600,000 msec, compared to the 330 msec that is the target for lighting, and the data specified is off (0x000000).

In the grandchild table A11b of the attacca lamp 9c, RGB data is specified at 20 msec intervals for the 1350 msec that it is to light up. However, because the attacca lamp 9c only repeats color changes in a specific pattern (e.g., seven colors) over the 1350 msec, the grandchild table A11b specifies only 280 nsec for one color change pattern. In other words, the performance control CPU 120 lights up the attacca lamp 9c for 280 nsec each time it refers to the grandchild table A11b at 1350 msec, and then repeatedly refers to the grandchild table A11b until the end of the 1350 msec to repeat the color changes in the specific pattern (e.g., seven colors).

In the grandchild table A11c of the Attacka lamp 9c, RGB data is specified for a very long period of time, 600,000 msec, compared to the 320 msec that is the target for turning the lamp on, and the data specified is off (0x000000).

When the big right hit promotion performance is started, the performance control CPU 120 turns off the attacca lamp 9c by referring to the grandchild table A11a for the first 330 msec, then causes the attacca lamp 9c to repeat color changes in a predetermined pattern (for example, seven colors) by referring to the grandchild table A11b multiple times at 280 nsec intervals for 1,350 msec, and then turns off the attacca lamp 9c by referring to the grandchild table A11c for the final 320 msec. As a result, as shown in Figures 13-25 (c4) to 13-32 (c24), the frame lamps light up in an arch from the left to the right, and eventually the 8th lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R reaches the vicinity of the attacca, and then the attacca lamp 9c lights up, and then the frame lamps go out in an arch from the left to the right, and eventually the 8th lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R goes out, and then the attacca lamp 9c goes out. This kind of big right hit promotion effect using the attacca lamp 9c is performed twice.

In addition, in the case of a lighting pattern such as the grandchild tables A11a, A11b, and A11c of the attacca lamp 9c, where the lamp is initially turned off, a predetermined pattern of colors is repeated in the middle, and then the lamp is turned off again, the lighting of the attacca lamp 9c is divided into three stages and a scenario is created. For the repetition of the predetermined pattern of colors in the middle, the same grandchild table A11b is repeatedly referenced. This eliminates the need to prepare data for the entire duration of the 2000 msec lighting from start to finish, and only the data for the repeated portion is required. This makes it possible to reduce the amount of lighting data used in the ROM 121 as much as possible.

Returning to FIG. 13-25 (c4), we will now explain the presentation mode of the big right hit promotion presentation executed in the right hit promotion part of the fanfare presentation. As shown in FIG. 13-25 (c4), the tip of an arrow image pointing to the right is displayed on the image display device 5. As for the game effect lamps 9, the fourth lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L begins to light up. In line with the lighting of the game effect lamps 9, sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a mode corresponding to the right hit promotion presentation.

As shown in FIG. 13-25 (c5), the tip of an arrow image pointing to the right is further displayed on the image display device 5. As for the game effect lamps 9, the third lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L starts to light up. In accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamps 9, sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion performance.

As shown in FIG. 13-26 (c6), the tip of an arrow image pointing to the right is further displayed on the image display device 5. As for the game effect lamps 9, the second lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L starts to light up. Furthermore, as the frame lamp has reached the vicinity of the movable body lamp 9d, the left X of the movable body lamp 9d starts to light up. In accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9, sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion performance.

As shown in FIG. 13-26 (c7), the tip of an arrow image pointing to the right is further displayed on the image display device 5. As for the game effect lamps 9, the first lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L starts to light up. Furthermore, the center X of the movable body lamp 9d starts to light up. In accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9, sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion performance.

As shown in FIG. 13-26 (c8), the tip of an arrow image pointing to the right is further displayed on the image display device 5. As for the game effect lamps 9, the second lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts to light up. Furthermore, the right X of the movable body lamp 9d starts to light up. In accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9, sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion performance.

As shown in FIG. 13-27 (c9), an arrow image pointing to the right is further displayed on the image display device 5. As for the game effect lamps 9, the third lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts to light up. In accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamps 9, sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion performance.

As shown in FIG. 13-27 (c10), an arrow image pointing to the right is further displayed on the image display device 5. As for the game effect lamps 9, the fourth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts to light up. In accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamps 9, sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion performance.

As shown in FIG. 13-27 (c11), an arrow image pointing to the right is further displayed on the image display device 5. As for the game effect lamps 9, the fifth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts to light up. Furthermore, as the frame lamp has reached the vicinity of the board right lamp 075F009F, the board right lamp 075F009F starts to light up. In accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamps 9, sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion performance.

As shown in FIG. 13-28 (c12), an arrow image pointing to the right is further displayed on the image display device 5. As for the game effect lamps 9, the sixth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts to light up. In accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamps 9, sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion performance.

As shown in FIG. 13-28 (c13), an arrow image pointing to the right is further displayed on the image display device 5. As for the game effect lamps 9, the seventh lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts to light up. In accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamps 9, sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion performance.

As shown in FIG. 13-28 (c14), an arrow image pointing to the right continues to be displayed on the image display device 5. As for the game effect lamps 9, the eighth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts to light up. In accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamps 9, sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion performance.

As shown in FIG. 13-29 (c15), the image display device 5 displays the character image "Right" superimposed on an arrow image pointing to the right. As for the game effect lamps 9, the fourth lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L goes out. Furthermore, as the frame lamp has reached the vicinity of the attacca lamp 9c, the attacca lamp 9c starts to light up. From that point on, the attacca lamp 9c repeatedly lights up and goes out (i.e., it flashes). In accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9, sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion performance.

As shown in FIG. 13-29 (c16), the image display device 5 continues to display the character image "Right" superimposed on an arrow image pointing to the right. As for the game effect lamps 9, the third lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L goes out. In accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9, the speakers 8L and 8R output a sound in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion performance.

As shown in FIG. 13-29 (c17), on the image display device 5, the text image "Right Hit" is displayed superimposed on an arrow image pointing to the right. As for the game effect lamps 9, the second lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is turned off. Furthermore, the left X of the movable body lamp 9d is also turned off. In accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9, a sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion performance.

As shown in FIG. 13-30 (c18), on the image display device 5, the text image "Right Hit" is displayed superimposed on an arrow image pointing to the right. As for the game effect lamps 9, the first lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is turned off. Furthermore, the X in the middle of the movable body lamp 9d is also turned off. In accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9, a sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion performance.

As shown in FIG. 13-30 (c19), on the image display device 5, the text image "Right Hit" is displayed superimposed on an arrow image pointing to the right. As for the game effect lamps 9, the second lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. In addition, the right X of the movable body lamp 9d is also turned off. In accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9, a sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion performance.

As shown in FIG. 13-30 (c20), on the image display device 5, the text image "Right Hit" is displayed superimposed on an arrow image pointing to the right. As for the game effect lamps 9, the third lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. In accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9, a sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion performance.

As shown in FIG. 13-31 (c21), on the image display device 5, a text image of "Hit right" is displayed superimposed on an arrow image pointing to the right. As for the game effect lamps 9, the fourth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. In accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamps 9, sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion performance.

As shown in FIG. 13-31 (c22), on the image display device 5, a text image of "Hit right" is displayed superimposed on an arrow image pointing to the right. As for the game effect lamps 9, the fifth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. In accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamps 9, sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion performance.

As shown in FIG. 13-31 (c23), on the image display device 5, a text image of "Hit right!!" is displayed superimposed on an arrow image pointing to the right. As for the game effect lamps 9, the sixth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R goes out. In addition, the board right lamp 075F009F goes out. In accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamps 9, sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion performance.

As shown in FIG. 13-32 (c24), on the image display device 5, a text image of "Hit right!!" is displayed superimposed on an arrow image pointing to the right. As for the game effect lamps 9, the seventh lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. In accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamps 9, sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion performance.

As shown in FIG. 13-32 (c25), on the image display device 5, a text image of "Hit right!!" is displayed superimposed on an arrow image pointing to the right. As for the game effect lamps 9, the eighth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R goes out. Furthermore, the flashing attacca lamp 9c also goes out. Sound output from speakers 8L and 8R also stops. This ends the first series of big right-hit promotion effects.

As shown in FIG. 13-32 (c26), the second big right hit promotion effect starts. At this time, for the game effect lamps 9, only the fourth lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L starts to light up. Note that, during the second big right hit promotion effect, the speakers 8L and 8R are designed not to output sound in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion effect. This prevents the background music during the big hit round (sound corresponding to the background of the big hit round) from overlapping with the sound during the big right hit promotion effect when the transition occurs after the big right hit promotion effect has ended.

As shown in Figure 13-33 (c27) to (c29), in the second big right hit promotion performance, the game effect lamp 9 lights up/blinks/goes off in the same manner as in the first big right hit promotion performance, and during that time, no sound is output from the speakers 8L, 8R in the manner corresponding to the right hit promotion performance.

In this way, the big right hit promotion effect uses larger text and graphic image displays than the small right hit promotion effect, and is an effect that encourages the player to hit to the right in a more emphatic manner than the small right hit promotion effect. Therefore, by executing the big right hit promotion effect during the fanfare effect, it is possible to encourage the player to hit to the right in an easy-to-understand manner.

In addition, during the first big right hit promotion performance, a sound (for example, a whirring sound effect) is output from speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion performance, effectively encouraging the player to hit to the right, while during the second big right hit promotion performance, a sound is not output from speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion performance, so as not to interfere with the background music during the big win round that starts afterwards.

In addition, in the big right hit promotion effect, the arrow image and the letter image are displayed so that they gradually appear in stages, and the game effect lamp 9 lights up or blinks to effectively encourage the player to hit to the right, and this effect is more flashy than the effect that displays the name image of the big win game state shown in Figure 13-24 (c2). For example, the letter images in the big right hit promotion effect appear one by one, but all the letter images in the name image of the big win game state appear at once. Also, the size of the letter images in the big right hit promotion effect is larger than all the letter images in the name image of the big win game state. Furthermore, the execution time of the big right hit promotion effect is longer than the execution time of the effect that displays the name image. As a result, after the name image of the big win game state is displayed to notify the player that a big win has occurred, the big right hit promotion effect can more emphatically notify the player to hit to the right.

The attacca lamp 9c is the point that the player aims at when launching the game ball in order to actually carry the game ball, so it lights up in a flashy color that is easy for the player to recognize, such as seven colors, and flashes to draw the player's attention to the point that they are aiming at. Note that the attacca lamp 9c may also be constantly lit in a predetermined color, such as seven colors, without flashing.

The following example describes the presentation of the pachinko game machine 1 when a 5R special jackpot occurs. For a 10R special jackpot, the number of rounds is different, but other presentation aspects are the same as for a 5R special jackpot. Also, for a 5 regular jackpot, it is different in that the V preview presentation and V winning presentation are not executed, but other presentation aspects are the same as for a 5R special jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 13-38 (c26), when the game effect lamp 9 goes out and the second big right hit promotion effect ends, the switch to the big win round starts as shown in FIG. 13-38 (c27). Specifically, the arrow image and the text image "Hit right!!" fade out, gradually decreasing visibility. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the fade-out. After that, as shown in FIG. 13-38 (c28), the entire screen of the image display device 5 turns white. Note that the image of the small right hit promotion effect displayed in the upper right corner of the screen remains displayed without being affected by the fade-out. Note that, as mentioned above, a series of performance data up to the stage of FIG. 13-38 (c28) is set based on the big win start designation command (A0 series command).

When the fanfare effect ends, the CPU 103 sends a command (A101 command) to the effect control CPU 120 to specify that the large prize opening is in progress. In response to this, the effect control CPU 120 switches from the fanfare effect to the round-in-progress effect based on the command from the CPU 103, and executes the round-in-progress effect in the first round. The effect control CPU 120 sets the data for each effect in FIG. 13-39 (d3) to FIG. 13-40 (e4) based on the command (A101 command). In other words, each effect that takes place between FIG. 13-39 (d3) to FIG. 13-40 (e4) progresses over time, rather than being triggered by an effect control command.

As shown in FIG. 13-39 (d3), the entire screen of the image display device 5 goes completely white, and then the background image during the big win round fades in to appear. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner that corresponds to the fade-in. Note that the image of the small right hit promotion effect displayed in the upper right corner of the screen remains displayed without being affected by the fade-in.

Here, we will explain "fade in" and "fade out" in more detail. Fade in and fade out are a type of image display effect called a "transition." A "transition" is a switching effect that is inserted between a first cut (image) and a second cut (image) when editing video and the scene changes from the first cut to the second cut (image). In addition to fade in and fade out, transitions also include various techniques used in video editing, such as wipes and overlaps.

"Fade-in" is an effect in which an image showing some object (such as a background or character) gradually appears on the screen. As a specific technique, fade-in changes the transparency (also called transmittance) of the object (image) from a first degree (e.g., 100% or 99%) to a second degree (e.g., 0% or 1%) that is lower than the first degree over a predetermined period of time. For example, if the predetermined period is 2 seconds, the transparency (transmittance) is gradually changed from 100% (first degree) to 50% over the 1 second period between 0 and 1 second, and then the transparency (transmittance) is gradually changed from 50% to 0% (second degree) over the next 1 second period between 1 and 2 seconds. On the other hand, fade-in is not a technique that does not gradually decrease the transparency (transmittance) over a certain period of time, such as a technique that changes an object (image) to opaque by switching the transparency (transmittance) from 100% (first degree) to 0% (second degree) in one go. Note that if opacity (which can also be called opacity) is changed instead of transparency (transmittance), the above-mentioned percentage values are reversed. In other words, fade-in changes the opacity (opacity) of an object (image) from a second degree (e.g., 0% or 1%) to a first degree (e.g., 100% or 99%), which is higher than the second degree, over a certain period of time.

"Fade out" is an effect in which an image showing some object (background, character, etc.) gradually disappears from the screen. As a specific technique, in fade out, the transparency (transmittance) of the object (image) is changed over a predetermined time from a second degree (e.g., 0% or 1%) to a first degree (e.g., 100% or 99%) that is higher than the first degree. For example, if the predetermined time is 2 seconds, the transparency (transmittance) is gradually changed from 0% (second degree) to 50% over one second between 0 and 1 second, and then the transparency (transmittance) is gradually changed from 50% to 100% (first degree) over one second between 1 and 2 seconds. On the other hand, a technique that does not gradually change the transparency (transmittance) over a predetermined time, such as a technique that changes the transparency (transmittance) from 0% (second degree) to 100% (first degree) in one go to make the object (image) transparent, is not a fade out. In addition, when changing opacity (opacity) instead of transparency (transmittance), the fade-out changes the opacity (opacity) of the object (image) from a first degree (e.g., 100% or 99%) to a second degree (e.g., 0% or 1%) that is lower than the first degree over a predetermined period of time.

For example, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 13-38(c26) and (d1), when the transparency (transmittance) of the first layer of the screen showing the arrow image and the text image of "Hit right!!" is 0%, the transparency (transmittance) of the first layer of the screen is gradually increased to 100%, so that the arrow image and the text image of "Hit right!!" are gradually made transparent and difficult to see (fade out). As a result, as shown in FIG. 13-38(d2), only the white image in the second layer of the screen, which is located further back than the first layer of the screen, is shown to the player. After that, as shown in FIG. 13-38(d3), when the transparency (transmittance) of the first layer of the screen is 100%, the transparency (transmittance) of the first layer of the screen is gradually decreased to 0%, so that the background image during the big win round is gradually made opaque and easy to see (fade in). This allows the player to see the background image during the jackpot round on the first layer, which is located in front of the second layer of the screen.

Note that there is also a technique called "cross-fade" as a transition. Cross-fade is a technique in which, for example, a first layer of a screen showing some kind of object is faded out while a second layer of a screen showing some kind of object located behind the first layer is faded in, so that the first layer of the screen is shown first and then the second layer of the screen is shown. On the other hand, in the case of this embodiment, as described above, the first layer of the screen is faded out and then faded in, so that a white image that is always displayed on the second layer of the screen located behind is shown once during the switch from the image in the ED first period to the image in the ED second period, which is different from a technique like cross-fade.

In this embodiment, even if the background image is switched as in the transition described above, the image of the small right hit promotion effect displayed in the upper right corner of the screen remains displayed without being affected by the background image switching. Here, "affected by the background image switching" means that the player's visibility is affected in some way, such as by fading in or out of the background image switching, which may cause the player to be unable to completely see the image of the small right hit promotion effect, or the player to be able to see a little of the image of the small right hit promotion effect but not understand the meaning of the image (right hit promotion). On the other hand, if the above-mentioned phenomenon does not occur and the player's visibility of the image of the small right hit promotion effect is not hindered or reduced, it can be said that the image of the small right hit promotion effect is not affected by the background image switching.

As shown in FIG. 13-39(d4), after the background image during the jackpot round appears by fading in, as shown in FIG. 13-39(e1), when 1R starts, the normal jackpot opening opens and a background image corresponding to the round performance is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. In addition, a point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the jackpot round is displayed in the lower left of the screen of the image display device 5. Furthermore, an image (arrow and text) of the small right hit promotion performance is displayed in the upper right. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the round performance. In addition, the speakers 8L and 8R start to output BGM (sound corresponding to the background of the jackpot round) in a manner corresponding to the round performance. In addition, as mentioned above, at the time this BGM is output, the output of the sound corresponding to the large right hit promotion performance has already ended.

As shown in FIG. 13-40 (e2), during the first round, a background image corresponding to the in-round performance is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, followed by an image (arrow and text) promoting a small right hit in the upper right corner.

As shown in FIG. 13-40 (e3), when the first round ends, the regular large prize opening closes, and the CPU 103 sends a command (A201 command) to the performance control CPU 120 to specify what happens after the large prize opening is opened. Note that the performance control CPU 120 does not set any particular performance based on the command to specify what happens after the large prize opening is opened.

As shown in FIG. 13-40 (e4), between rounds, the regular big prize opening remains closed, and a background image corresponding to the in-round performance is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, followed by an image (arrow and text) of the small right hit promotion performance displayed in the upper right.

When the inter-round period ends, the CPU 103 sends a command (A102 command) to the performance control CPU 120 to specify whether the large prize opening is in progress. In response, the performance control CPU 120 executes the mid-round performance in the second round based on the command from the CPU 103. The performance control CPU 120 sets the data for each performance in FIG. 13-41 (e5) to FIG. 13-42 (e8) based on the command (A102 command). In other words, each performance performed between FIG. 13-41 (e5) to FIG. 13-42 (e8) progresses over time, rather than being triggered by a performance control command.

As shown in FIG. 13-41 (e5), when the second round starts, the regular big prize opening opens, a background image corresponding to the mid-round performance is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and then an image (arrow and text) for promoting a small right hit is displayed in the upper right corner. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the mid-round performance.

As shown in FIG. 13-41 (e6), during 2R, a V probability change suggestion effect is executed. Specifically, in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, an image encouraging the player to operate the push button 31B is displayed with the text image "PUSH!!" superimposed on a background image corresponding to the in-round effect. In addition, in the upper right corner of the screen, an image (arrow and text) promoting a small right hit is still displayed. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the in-round effect (such as a V probability change suggestion effect). Sound is also output from speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the in-round effect (such as a V probability change suggestion effect).

As shown in FIG. 13-41 (e7), when the player operates the push button 31B during the V-type probability variation indication effect, a text image of "Success!!" is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, superimposed on a background image corresponding to the in-round effect, to notify the player that a V-type probability variation jackpot has been obtained. In addition, in the upper right corner of the screen, an image (arrow and text) for the small right hit promotion effect continues to be displayed. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the in-round effect (such as the V-type probability variation indication effect). Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the in-round effect (such as the V-type probability variation indication effect).

As shown in FIG. 13-42 (e8), when the second round ends, the regular large prize opening closes, and the CPU 103 sends a command (A202 command) to the performance control CPU 120 to specify what happens after the large prize opening is opened. Note that the performance control CPU 120 does not set any particular performance based on the command to specify what happens after the large prize opening is opened.

As shown in FIG. 13-42 (e9), between rounds, the regular big prize opening remains closed, and a text image of "Success!!" is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, superimposed on a background image corresponding to the performance during the round, and furthermore, an image (arrow and text) of the small right hit promotion performance is displayed in the upper right corner.

When the inter-round period ends, the CPU 103 sends a special prize opening command (A103 command) to the performance control CPU 120. In response, the performance control CPU 120 executes the mid-round performance in the third round based on the command from the CPU 103. The performance control CPU 120 sets the data for each performance in FIG. 13-42 (e10) to FIG. 13-43 (e12) based on the special prize opening command (A103 command). In other words, each performance performed between FIG. 13-42 (e10) to FIG. 13-43 (e12) progresses over time, rather than being triggered by a performance control command.

As shown in FIG. 13-42 (e10), when the third round begins, the regular big prize opening opens and the V preview performance is executed. Specifically, a character image and a text image saying "Grab a V in the next round!!" are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, superimposed on a background image corresponding to the mid-round performance. In addition, an image (arrow and text) of the small right hit promotion performance continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the screen. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the mid-round performance (V preview performance, etc.). Sound is also output from speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the mid-round performance (V preview performance, etc.).

As shown in FIG. 13-43 (e11), during the third round, the V preview performance continues, and a text image of "Grab a V in the next round!!" is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 together with a character image, superimposed on a background image corresponding to the performance during the round, and furthermore, an image (arrow and text) of a small right hit promotion performance continues to be displayed in the upper right. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the performance during the round (such as the V preview performance). Sound is also output from speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the performance during the round (such as the V preview performance).

As shown in FIG. 13-43 (e12), when the third round ends, the regular large prize opening closes, and the CPU 103 sends a command (A203 command) to the performance control CPU 120 to specify what happens after the large prize opening opens. In response, the performance control CPU 120 executes the "Aim for V" performance in the rounds from after the third round to the fourth round, based on the command from the CPU 103.

As shown in FIG. 13-43 (e13), the Aim for V performance is executed while the large prize opening remains closed between rounds, i.e., the game ball cannot enter the large prize opening. Specifically, an arrow image pointing to the V variable prize ball device 075F007B (V large prize opening), which is the target (location) that the player is to aim at by hitting with the right, and a text image saying "Aim" are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 so as to overlap with a background image corresponding to the round performance. In this way, according to the Aim for V performance, the image display related to the V large prize opening can be used to encourage the player to hit with the right to make the game ball enter the V large prize opening. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the round performance (such as the Aim for V performance). Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the round performance (such as the Aim for V performance).

When the inter-round period ends, the CPU 103 sends a command (A104 command) to the presentation control CPU 120 to specify whether the large prize opening is in progress. In response, the presentation control CPU 120 executes the mid-round presentation for the 4th round based on the command from the CPU 104. The presentation control CPU 120 sets the data for each presentation in Figs. 13-44 (e14) and (e15) based on the command (A104 command). In other words, each presentation that takes place between Figs. 13-44 (e14) and 13-44 (e15) progresses over time, rather than being triggered by a presentation control command.

As shown in FIG. 13-44 (e14), when the 4th round starts, the V large prize opening opens and the Aim for V effect is then executed. This allows the player to aim for the V large prize opening by hitting to the right. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the mid-round effect (such as the Aim for V effect). Sound is also output from speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the mid-round effect (such as the Aim for V effect).

As shown in FIG. 13-44 (e15), during the 4R, the Aim for V effect is executed, and furthermore, an image (arrow and text) of a small right hit promotion effect is displayed in the upper right corner. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (such as the Aim for V effect). Sound is also output from speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (such as the Aim for V effect).

When a game ball enters the V large winning hole and a V win occurs, the CPU 103 sends a command to the performance control CPU 120 to specify the probability of winning (AD00 command). In response, the performance control CPU 120 executes the V winning performance. The performance control CPU 120 sets the data for each performance in FIG. 13-44 (e16) to FIG. 13-45 (e18) based on the command to specify the probability of winning (AD00 command). In other words, each performance performed between FIG. 13-44 (e16) to FIG. 13-45 (e18) progresses over time, rather than being triggered by a performance control command.

As shown in FIG. 13-44 (e16), when the V winning effect is executed, an image of a "V" indicating that a V winning has occurred is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, superimposed on a background image corresponding to the mid-round effect, and then an image (arrow and text) of a small right hit promotion effect is displayed in the upper right corner. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the mid-round effect (such as the V winning effect). Sound is also output from speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the mid-round effect (such as the V winning effect).

As shown in FIG. 13-45 (e17), when the 4th round ends, the V large prize opening closes, and the CPU 103 sends a command (A204 command) to the performance control CPU 120 to specify what happens after the large prize opening is opened. Note that the performance control CPU 120 does not set any particular performance based on the command to specify what happens after the large prize opening is opened.

As shown in FIG. 13-45 (e18), between rounds, the V large prize opening and the normal large prize opening remain closed, and an image of the letter "V" is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, superimposed on a background image corresponding to the performance during the round, and furthermore, an image (arrow and letters) of the small right hit promotion performance is displayed in the upper right corner.

When the inter-round period ends, the CPU 103 sends a command (A105 command) to the presentation control CPU 120 to specify whether the large prize opening is in progress. In response, the presentation control CPU 120 executes the mid-round presentation for the 5th round based on the command from the CPU 103. The presentation control CPU 120 sets the data for each presentation in FIG. 13-45 (e19) to FIG. 13-46 (e21) based on the command (A105 command). In other words, each presentation that takes place between FIG. 13-45 (e19) to FIG. 13-46 (e21) progresses over time, rather than being triggered by a presentation control command.

As shown in FIG. 13-45 (e19), when the 5th round starts, the regular big prize opening opens, a background image corresponding to the mid-round performance is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and then an image (arrow and text) of the small right hit promotion performance is displayed in the upper right corner. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the mid-round performance.

As shown in FIG. 13-46 (e20), during the 5th round, a mid-round performance is executed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and furthermore, an image (arrow and text) of a small right hit promotion performance continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the screen. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the mid-round performance. Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the mid-round performance.

As shown in FIG. 13-46 (e21), when the 5th round ends, the large prize opening normally closes, and the CPU 103 sends a command (A205 command) to the performance control CPU 120 to specify the time after the large prize opening is opened. The performance control CPU 120 does not set any particular performance based on the command. Furthermore, at a specified timing thereafter, the CPU 103 sends a command (A3 command) to specify the end of the jackpot to the performance control CPU 120. In response, the performance control CPU 120 executes an ending performance based on the command from the CPU 103. The performance control CPU 120 sets the data for each performance in FIG. 13-46 (f1) to FIG. 13-47 (f4) based on the command (A3 command). In other words, each of the effects that take place between FIG. 13-46 (f1) and FIG. 13-47 (f4) progresses over time, rather than being triggered by an effect control command.

As shown in FIG. 13-46 (f1), when the ending performance starts, an image that allows the player to select a stage in the probability variable state after the big win game state is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. Furthermore, an image (arrow and text) promoting a small right hit continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the screen. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the ending performance. Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the ending performance.

As shown in FIG. 13-47 (f2), during the ending performance, a name image indicating the name of the special state (in this example, a text image of "Yume Yume RUSH!!") is displayed in the center of the image display device 5 together with a character image. Furthermore, an image (arrow and text) promoting a small right hit continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the screen. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the ending performance. Sound is also output from speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the ending performance.

As shown in FIG. 13-47 (f3), during the ending performance, an addiction prevention notification performance is executed. Specifically, an image to prevent the player from becoming addicted to the game, such as "Be careful not to become addicted. Pachinko is a game that should be enjoyed in moderation," is displayed in the center of the image display device 5. Furthermore, in the upper right corner of the screen, an image (arrow and text) for encouraging a small right hit is displayed in the upper right corner. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the ending performance. Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the ending performance. In addition, when a consecutive win occurs, a game result image showing the game result (for example, the number of winning balls) in the jackpot game state is displayed, for example, at the bottom of the screen during the ending performance, but such a game result image may also be displayed during the ending performance even when a first win occurs.

As shown in FIG. 13-47 (f4), a forget-to-remove prevention image is displayed in the center of the image display device 5 to prevent the player from forgetting to remove cards related to the game that the player owns, such as prepaid cards or membership cards. Furthermore, an image (arrow and text) promoting a small right hit continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the screen. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the ending effect. Sound is also output from speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the ending effect.

After the ending performance is finished, if there is a second reserved memory number, the CPU 103 sends a reserved memory number designation command (C2 series command), a background designation command (95 series command), a pattern change designation command (8D series command), a display result designation command (8C series command), and a change pattern designation command (81 series command) to the performance control CPU 120. In response to this, the performance control CPU 120 changes and displays the decorative pattern in response to the change of the second special pattern based on the command from the CPU 103, and executes a change-in-progress performance (for example, a reach performance or a notice performance) in accordance with the change of the second special pattern. The performance control CPU 120 sets the data of each performance in Figure 13-48 (g1) and (g2) based on the reserved memory number designation command (C2 series command), background designation command (95 series command), pattern change designation command (8D series command), display result designation command (8C series command), and change pattern designation command (81 series command). In other words, the performances that take place between Figure 13-48 (g1) and (g2) progress over time, rather than being triggered by a performance control command.

As shown in FIG. 13-48 (g1), even while the second special symbol is changing, an image (arrow and text) promoting a small right hit continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the screen. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the start of the special symbol change. Sounds are also output from speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the start of the special symbol change.

As shown in FIG. 13-48 (g2), the variation of the second special symbol stops and the losing symbol is displayed. At this time, the image (arrow and text) promoting a small right hit continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the screen. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the stopping of the losing symbol. Sound is also output from speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the stopping of the losing symbol.

After the second special symbol stops changing, if there is a second reserved memory number, the CPU 103 sends a reserved memory number designation command (C2 series command), a background designation command (95 series command), a symbol change designation command (8D series command), a display result designation command (8C series command), and a change pattern designation command (81 series command) to the performance control CPU 120. In response to this, the performance control CPU 120 changes and displays the decorative symbol in response to the change of the second special symbol based on the command from the CPU 103, and executes a change-in-progress performance (for example, a reach performance or a notice performance) in accordance with the change of the second special symbol. The performance control CPU 120 sets the data for each performance in Figure 13-48 (g3) to Figure 13-49 (g5) based on the reserved memory number designation command (C2 series command), background designation command (95 series command), symbol change designation command (8D series command), display result designation command (8C series command), and change pattern designation command (81 series command). In other words, each of the effects that take place between FIG. 13-48 (g3) and FIG. 13-49 (g5) progresses over time, rather than being triggered by an effect control command.

As shown in FIG. 13-48 (g3), even while the second special symbol is changing, an image (arrow and text) promoting a small right hit continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the screen. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the start of the special symbol change. The speakers 8L and 8R also output sounds in a manner corresponding to the start of the special symbol change.

As shown in FIG. 13-49 (g4), in the case of a jackpot fluctuation, an image corresponding to the reach effect is displayed on the image display device 5, a sound corresponding to the reach effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the reach effect. In the upper right corner of the screen, an image (arrow and text) of the small right hit promotion effect continues to be displayed.

As shown in FIG. 13-49 (g5), a group preview performance is executed as a preview performance during a jackpot fluctuation. The group preview performance is a performance in which objects such as characters appear gradually or all at once on the screen of the image display device 5 to make the visibility of the reach pattern difficult, and then the objects disappear to make a specific pattern arrangement (for example, 777) appear. Even if a preview performance that makes the visibility of the pattern difficult is executed in such a reach mode, the image (arrow and text) of the small right hit promotion performance continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the screen without being affected by the display of the performance image. Here, "affected by the display of the performance image" means that the player's visibility of the image of the small right hit promotion performance is hindered or reduced due to the display of a performance image such as a group preview, such that the player cannot completely see the image of the small right hit promotion performance, or the player can see a little of the image of the small right hit promotion performance but cannot understand the meaning of the image (right hit promotion), and the player's visibility is affected in some way. On the other hand, if the above-mentioned phenomenon does not occur and the player's visibility of the image of the small right hit promotion effect is not hindered or reduced, it can be said that the image of the small right hit promotion effect is not affected by the display of the effect image.

When the variation of the special symbol stops, the CPU 103 sends a symbol determination command (8F00) to the performance control CPU 120. Note that the performance control CPU 120 does not set any particular performance based on the symbol determination command.

As shown in FIG. 13-49 (g6), when a jackpot (10R guaranteed jackpot) occurs as a result of the special symbol stopping, the CPU 103 sends a jackpot start command (A0 command) to the performance control CPU 120. Note that since the right-hit promotion performance has already been executed, the right-hit display lighting command (FD command) is not sent. In response to this, the performance control CPU 120 executes a fanfare performance based on a command from the CPU 103. Note that the performance control CPU 120 sets the data for each performance in FIG. 13-50 (h1) and (h2) based on the jackpot start command (A0 command). In other words, each performance performed between FIG. 13-50 (h1) and (h2) progresses over time, rather than being triggered by a performance control command.

As shown in FIG. 13-50 (h1), as a fanfare effect, an image celebrating the big win (in this example, a character image and a text image of "Yay!!") is displayed on the image display device 5, a sound celebrating the big win is output from speakers 8L and 8R, and the lighting state of the game effect lamp 9 changes to a lighting state celebrating the big win. In the upper right corner of the screen, an image (arrow and text) promoting a small right hit continues to be displayed in the upper right corner.

As shown in FIG. 13-50 (h2), after the fanfare effect starts, a name image (in this example, a text image of "SPECIAL BONUS!!") indicating the name of the jackpot game state that has occurred is displayed in the center of the image display device 5, a sound corresponding to the start of the jackpot is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the lighting state of the game effect lamp 9 changes to a lighting state corresponding to the start of the jackpot. In addition, in the case of a consecutive win on a special chart 2, since the big right hit promotion effect has already been executed when a special chart 1 was hit, the big right hit promotion effect is not executed again. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 13-25 (c4) to FIG. 13-32 (c24), the speakers 8L and 8R do not output a sound in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion effect, and furthermore, the frame lamp does not light up in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion effect.

When the fanfare effect ends, the CPU 103 sends a command (A101 command) to the effect control CPU 120 to specify that the large prize opening is open. In response to this, the effect control CPU 120 switches from the fanfare effect to the mid-round effect based on the command from the CPU 103, and executes the mid-round effect for the first round.

As shown in FIG. 13-50 (i1), when the first round of the big win begins, the normal big prize opening opens, and a background image corresponding to the in-round performance is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, followed by an image (arrow and text) of the small right hit promotion performance in the upper right corner. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the in-round performance.

After that, although not shown, various effects such as the V preview effect, the Aim for V effect, and the V prize are executed during the round as shown in Fig. 13-40 to Fig. 13-46, and when the big win round ends, an ending effect is executed as shown in Fig. 13-46 and Fig. 13-47. Then, as shown in Fig. 13-48, the game is again controlled to a probability variable state after the big win game state. During this series of games, an image (arrow and letters) of a small right hit promotion effect is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen of the image display device 5, and the right hit display section 075F030 of the special symbol LED board 075F020 and the right hit display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 each continue to light up. When the probability state after the jackpot game state ends without a jackpot occurring and the state is controlled to the normal state, the CPU 103 sends a right-hit display off command to the performance control CPU 120, and the performance control CPU 120 erases the image (arrow and text) of the small right-hit promotion performance in the upper right corner of the screen of the image display device 5, and turns off the right-hit display section 075F030 of the special symbol LED board 075F020 and the right-hit display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050. This allows the player to hit left again in the normal state.

[Presentation of the Pachinko Game Machine 1 When Power is Restored from an Outage]
Fig. 13-51 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the power is restored from a power outage during the fanfare presentation due to a special chart 1. The power outage shown in Fig. 13-51 assumes power outage 1 when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off during the fanfare presentation as shown in Fig. 13-20 and then the power supply is restored.

As shown in FIG. 13-51, if a power outage occurs in any of the following states: an image congratulating a player on a big win (in this example, a character image and a text image of "Congratulations!!") is displayed on the image display device 5 (FIG. 13-24(c1) state); a name image indicating the name of the big win game state (in this example, a text image of "CHANCE BONUS!!") is displayed on the image display device 5 (FIG. 13-24(c2) state); only an arrow image in the big right hit promotion effect is displayed on the image display device 5 (FIG. 13-28(c14) state); and a text image of "Hit right!!" is displayed on the image display device 5 together with an arrow image in the big right hit promotion effect (FIG. 13-31(c23) state), after the image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5, the text image of "Restoring..." is displayed on the image display device 5 when the power is turned on.

Even during recovery, the image (arrow and text) promoting a small right hit continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the image display device 5. Furthermore, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right hit display unit 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020 and the right hit display unit 075F055 of the fourth pattern unit 075F050 also light up their lighting means to promote right hits.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 waits until it receives a command (A101 command) to specify that the large prize opening is open from the CPU 103. When the command (A101 command) is received, the performance image during 1R, such as that shown in FIG. 13-39 (e1), is displayed on the image display device 5 based on the command (A101 command). In addition, all of the images, such as the image congratulating the player on the big win (in this example, the character image and the text image "Congratulations!!"), the name image indicating the name of the big win game state (in this example, the text image "CHANCE BONUS!!"), the arrow image in the big right hit promotion performance, and the text image "Hit right!!" added to the arrow image in the big right hit promotion performance, are canceled and not displayed after the power is turned on.

In this way, even if a power outage occurs before the big right hit promotion effect is executed or before the big right hit promotion effect is completed, the small right hit promotion effect will be executed from the moment the power is turned on again, so that the player can be encouraged to hit to the right at the very least immediately after the power is restored after the power outage, and it is possible to minimize the disadvantage to the player, such as forgetting to hit to the right and not being able to enter the game ball into the regular big prize opening.

Figure 13-52 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when power is restored from a power outage during the first round of a jackpot when special chart 1 is hit. The power outage shown in Figure 13-52 assumes power outage 2, which occurs when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off during 1R and then the power supply is restored, as shown in Figure 13-20.

As shown in Figure 13-52, if a power outage occurs while an image corresponding to the performance during round 1 is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state of Figure 13-40 (e2)), the image will no longer be displayed on the image display device 5, and then when the power is turned on, a text image saying "Restoring..." will be displayed on the image display device 5.

Even during recovery, the image (arrow and text) promoting a small right hit continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the image display device 5. Furthermore, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right hit display unit 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020 and the right hit display unit 075F055 of the fourth pattern unit 075F050 also light up their lighting means to promote right hits.

Then, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance waits until it receives a command (A102 command) to specify that the large prize opening is open from the CPU 103. When the CPU 120 receives the command, it displays a performance image during 2R, such as that shown in FIG. 13-41 (e5), on the image display device 5 based on the command (A102 command). Note that the point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the big win round is displayed as 0pt because the memory of the points in the RAM 122 is erased by the power outage. If prize balls are obtained during the subsequent rounds, the points can be added again starting from 0pt, for example, by adding 10pt for every 10 balls obtained. Note that the point image is not limited to being displayed as 0pt after the power is restored, and the points can be made unclear by a predetermined image such as "??".

In this way, even if a power outage occurs during a big win round, the small right hit promotion effect will be executed from the moment the power is turned back on, so the player can be encouraged to hit to the right at the very least immediately after the power is restored after the power outage, and it is possible to minimize the disadvantage to the player, such as forgetting to hit to the right and not being able to get the game ball into the regular big win opening in the next round.

Figure 13-53 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when power is restored after a power outage during the round after one round of a jackpot when special chart 1 is hit. The power outage shown in Figure 13-53 assumes power outage 3, which occurs when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off during the round after one round, as shown in Figure 13-20, and then the power supply is restored.

As shown in Figure 13-53, if a power outage occurs while an image corresponding to the performance between rounds is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state of Figure 13-40 (e4)), the image will no longer be displayed on the image display device 5, and then when the power is turned on, a text image saying "Restoring..." will be displayed on the image display device 5.

Even during recovery, the image (arrow and text) promoting a small right hit continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the image display device 5. Furthermore, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right hit display unit 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020 and the right hit display unit 075F055 of the fourth pattern unit 075F050 also light up their lighting means to promote right hits.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 waits until it receives a command (A102 command) to specify that the large prize opening is open from the CPU 103. When the command (A102 command) is received, the performance image during 2R, such as that shown in FIG. 13-41 (e5), is displayed on the image display device 5 based on the command (A102 command). Note that the point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the big win round is displayed as 0 points, since the memory of the points in the RAM 122 is erased by the power outage.

In this way, even if a power outage occurs between rounds, the small right-hit promotion effect will be executed from the moment the power is turned on again, so that the player can be encouraged to hit to the right at the very least immediately after the power is restored after the power outage, and it is possible to prevent as much as possible the player from suffering a disadvantage such as forgetting to hit to the right and not being able to get the game ball into the regular big prize opening in the next round.

Figure 13-54 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when power is restored after a power outage during the 2nd round of a jackpot when special chart 1 is hit. The power outage shown in Figure 13-54 assumes power outage 4, which occurs when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off during 2R and then the power supply is restored, as shown in Figure 13-20.

As shown in Figure 13-54, if a power outage occurs while an image corresponding to the V-variable indication effect during 2R is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state of Figure 13-41 (e7)), the image will no longer be displayed on the image display device 5, and then the text image "Restoring..." will be displayed on the image display device 5 when the power is turned on.

Even during recovery, the image (arrow and text) promoting a small right hit continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the image display device 5. Furthermore, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right hit display unit 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020 and the right hit display unit 075F055 of the fourth pattern unit 075F050 also light up their lighting means to promote right hits.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 waits until it receives a command (A103 command) to specify that the large prize opening is open from the CPU 103, and when it receives the command (A103 command), it causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image during 2R based on the command (A103 command). Note that the point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the jackpot round is displayed as 0pt, since the memory of the points in RAM 122 is erased by the power outage. Also, since the stored data regarding the type of jackpot has been erased, the image corresponding to the V preview performance such as that in Figure 13-42 (e10) is canceled and not displayed after the power is turned on. Furthermore, if the CPU 103 is configured to send a jackpot start command (A0 series command) to the performance control CPU 120 in addition to the large prize opening open command (A103 command) after power is restored, the performance control CPU 120 can be configured to execute a V preview performance like that shown in FIG. 13-42 (e10) based on the large prize opening open command (A103 command) and the jackpot start command (A0 series command) received from the CPU 103.

In this way, even if a power outage occurs during a big win round, the small right hit promotion effect will be executed from the moment the power is turned back on, so the player can be encouraged to hit to the right at the very least immediately after the power is restored after the power outage, and it is possible to minimize the disadvantage to the player, such as forgetting to hit to the right and not being able to get the game ball into the regular big win opening in the next round.

Figure 13-55 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when power is restored after a power outage between two rounds after a jackpot when special chart 1 is hit. The power outage shown in Figure 13-55 assumes power outage 5, which occurs when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off between two rounds after the jackpot, as shown in Figure 13-20, and then the power supply is restored.

As shown in Figure 13-55, if a power outage occurs while an image corresponding to the second round is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state of Figure 13-42 (e9)), the image will no longer be displayed on the image display device 5, and then when the power is turned on, a text image saying "Restoring..." will be displayed on the image display device 5.

Even during recovery, the image (arrow and text) promoting a small right hit continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the image display device 5. Furthermore, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right hit display unit 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020 and the right hit display unit 075F055 of the fourth pattern unit 075F050 also light up their lighting means to promote right hits.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 waits until it receives a command (A103 command) to specify that the large prize opening is open from the CPU 103, and when it receives the command (A103 command), it causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image during 2R based on the command (A103 command). Note that the point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the jackpot round is displayed as 0pt, since the memory of the points in RAM 122 is erased by the power outage. Also, since the stored data regarding the type of jackpot has been erased, the image corresponding to the V preview performance such as that in Figure 13-42 (e10) is canceled and not displayed after the power is turned on. Furthermore, if the CPU 103 is configured to send a jackpot start command (A0 series command) to the performance control CPU 120 in addition to the large prize opening open command (A103 command) after power is restored, the performance control CPU 120 can be configured to execute a V preview performance like that shown in FIG. 13-42 (e10) based on the large prize opening open command (A103 command) and the jackpot start command (A0 series command) received from the CPU 103.

In this way, even if a power outage occurs between rounds, the small right-hit promotion effect will be executed from the moment the power is turned on again, so that the player can be encouraged to hit to the right at the very least immediately after the power is restored after the power outage, and it is possible to prevent as much as possible the player from suffering a disadvantage such as forgetting to hit to the right and not being able to get the game ball into the regular big prize opening in the next round.

Figure 13-56 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation of a pachinko gaming machine when power is restored after a power outage between rounds three rounds after a jackpot when special chart 1 is hit. The power outage shown in Figure 13-56 assumes power outage 6, which occurs when the power supply to pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off between rounds three rounds after the jackpot, as shown in Figure 13-21, and then the power supply is restored.

As shown in Figure 13-56, if a power outage occurs while an image corresponding to the round after the third round is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state of Figure 13-43 (e13)), the image will no longer be displayed on the image display device 5, and then when the power is turned on, a text image saying "Restoring..." will be displayed on the image display device 5.

Even during recovery, the image (arrow and text) promoting a small right hit continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the image display device 5. Furthermore, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right hit display unit 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020 and the right hit display unit 075F055 of the fourth pattern unit 075F050 also light up their lighting means to promote right hits.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 waits until it receives a command (A104 command) to specify that the large prize opening is open from the CPU 103, and when it receives the command (A104 command), it causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image during the 4R based on the command (A104 command). Note that the point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the jackpot round is displayed as 0pt, because the memory of the points in RAM 122 is erased by the power outage. Also, because the stored data regarding the type of jackpot has been erased, the image corresponding to the Aim for V performance as shown in Figure 13-44 (e14) is canceled and not displayed after the power is turned on. Furthermore, if the CPU 103 is configured to send a jackpot start command (A0 series command) to the presentation control CPU 120 in addition to the large prize opening open command (A104 command) after power is restored, the presentation control CPU 120 can be configured to execute the Aim for V presentation as shown in FIG. 13-44 (e14) based on the large prize opening open command (A103 command) and the jackpot start command (A0 series command) received from the CPU 103.

In this way, even if a power outage occurs between rounds, the small right hit promotion effect will be executed from the moment the power is turned on again, so that the player can be encouraged to hit to the right at the very least immediately after the power is restored after the power outage, and it is possible to prevent as much as possible the player from suffering a disadvantage such as forgetting to hit to the right and not being able to get the game ball into the V large prize opening in the next round.

Figure 13-57 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when power is restored after a power outage during the 4th round of a jackpot when special chart 1 is hit. The power outage shown in Figure 13-57 assumes power outage 7, which occurs when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off during 4R and then the power supply is restored, as shown in Figure 13-21.

As shown in Figure 13-57, if a power outage occurs when an image corresponding to the Aim for V in 4R presentation is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state of Figure 13-44 (e15)), or when an image corresponding to the V winning presentation is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state of Figure 13-44 (e16)), after the image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5, a text image saying "Restoring..." will be displayed on the image display device 5 when the power is turned on.

Even during recovery, the image (arrow and text) promoting a small right hit continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the image display device 5. Furthermore, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right hit display unit 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020 and the right hit display unit 075F055 of the fourth pattern unit 075F050 also light up their lighting means to promote right hits.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 waits until it receives a command (A105 command) to specify that the large prize opening is open from the CPU 103. When the command (A105 command) is received, the performance image during the 5th round, such as that shown in FIG. 13-45 (e19), is displayed on the image display device 5 based on the command (A105 command). Note that the point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the jackpot round is displayed as 0 points, since the memory of the points in the RAM 122 is erased by the power outage.

In this way, even if a power outage occurs during a big win round, the small right hit promotion effect is executed from the point when the power is turned on after that, so the player can be encouraged to hit the right at the very least immediately after the power is restored from the power outage, and it is possible to prevent the player from suffering a disadvantage such as forgetting to hit the right and not being able to enter the normal big prize opening in the next round. Furthermore, in the case where a power outage occurs while the Aim for V effect and the small right hit promotion effect are being executed together, as in the 4th round, and in the case where a power outage occurs while the small right hit promotion effect and the large right hit promotion effect are being executed together, as shown in the above-mentioned Figure 13-51, both have in common that after the power is restored from the power outage, the Aim for V effect and the large right hit promotion effect are not executed, but the small right hit promotion effect is executed to the very least. Therefore, in both situations, the player can be encouraged to hit the right at the very least immediately after the power is restored in a common manner.

Figure 13-58 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when power is restored after a power outage between rounds four rounds after a jackpot when special chart 1 is hit. The power outage shown in Figure 13-58 assumes power outage 8, which occurs when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off between rounds four rounds after the jackpot, as shown in Figure 13-21, and then the power supply is restored.

As shown in Figure 13-58, if a power outage occurs while an image corresponding to the V winning effect is displayed on the image display device 5 during the rounds after the 4th round (the state of Figure 13-45 (e18)), the image will no longer be displayed on the image display device 5, and then when the power is turned on, the text image "Restoring..." will be displayed on the image display device 5.

Even during recovery, the image (arrow and text) promoting a small right hit continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the image display device 5. Furthermore, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right hit display unit 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020 and the right hit display unit 075F055 of the fourth pattern unit 075F050 also light up their lighting means to promote right hits.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 waits until it receives a command (A105 command) to specify that the large prize opening is open from the CPU 103. When the command (A105 command) is received, the performance image during the 5th round is displayed on the image display device 5 based on the command (A105 command). Note that the point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the jackpot round is displayed as 0 points because the memory of the points in the RAM 122 is erased by the power outage.

In this way, even if a power outage occurs between rounds, the small right-hit promotion effect will be executed from the moment the power is turned on again, so that the player can be encouraged to hit to the right at the very least immediately after the power is restored after the power outage, and it is possible to prevent as much as possible the player from suffering a disadvantage such as forgetting to hit to the right and not being able to get the game ball into the regular big prize opening in the next round.

Figure 13-59 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when power is restored from a power outage during the final round of a jackpot when special chart 1 is hit. The power outage shown in Figure 13-59 assumes power outage 9, which occurs when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off during 5R and then the power supply is restored, as shown in Figure 13-21.

As shown in Figure 13-59, if a power outage occurs while an image corresponding to the mid-round performance during the 5th round is displayed on the image display device 5 (as shown in Figure 13-46 (e20)), or while the 5th round has ended (as shown in Figure 13-46 (e21)), the image will no longer be displayed on the image display device 5, and the text image "Restoring..." will be displayed on the image display device 5 when the power is turned on.

Even during recovery, the image (arrow and text) promoting a small right hit continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the image display device 5. Furthermore, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right hit display unit 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020 and the right hit display unit 075F055 of the fourth pattern unit 075F050 also light up their lighting means to promote right hits.

Then, the presentation control CPU 120 waits until it receives a jackpot end command (A3 system command) from the CPU 103, and when it receives the jackpot end command (A3 system command), it displays a presentation image corresponding to an ending presentation such as that shown in FIG. 13-46 (f1) on the image display device 5 based on the jackpot end command (A3 system command).

In this way, even if a power outage occurs during the final round of a jackpot, the small right-hit promotion effect will be executed from the moment the power is turned back on, so that the player can be encouraged to make a right hit at the very least immediately after the power is restored after the power outage, and it is possible to prevent the player from forgetting to make a right hit as much as possible.

Figure 13-60 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when power is restored from a power outage during the ending presentation when special chart 1 is hit. The power outage shown in Figure 13-60 assumes a power outage 10 in which the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off during the ending presentation and then the power supply is restored, as shown in Figure 13-21.

As shown in FIG. 13-60, if a power outage occurs during any of the ending effects, when an image that allows the player to select a stage in the high probability state after a jackpot game state is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state of FIG. 13-46(f1)), when a name image showing the name of the high probability state is displayed on the image display device 5 together with a character image (the state of FIG. 13-47(f2)), when an image corresponding to the addiction prevention notification effect and a game result image showing the game result in the jackpot game state are displayed on the image display device 5 (the state of FIG. 13-47(f3)), or when a forget-to-remove prevention image for preventing the player from forgetting to remove a card owned by the player is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state of FIG. 13-47(f4)), the image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5, and then the text image "Restoring..." is displayed on the image display device 5 when the power is turned on.

Even during recovery, the image (arrow and text) promoting a small right hit continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the image display device 5. Furthermore, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right hit display unit 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020 and the right hit display unit 075F055 of the fourth pattern unit 075F050 also light up their lighting means to promote right hits.

After that, if there are reserved memories, the performance control CPU 120 waits until it receives a reserved memory number designation command (C1 series command, C2 series command), background designation command (95 series command), pattern change designation command (8D series command), display result designation command (8C series command), and change pattern designation command (81 series command) from the CPU 103, and when it receives these commands, it displays a performance image corresponding to the change in the special pattern as shown in Figure 13-48 (g1) on the image display device 5 based on the reserved memory number designation command (C1 series command, C2 series command), background designation command (95 series command), pattern change designation command (8D series command), display result designation command (8C series command), and change pattern designation command (81 series command).

On the other hand, if there are no reserved memories, the performance control CPU 120 waits until it receives a background designation command (95 series command) and a customer waiting demo designation command (9F00 command) from the CPU 103, and upon receiving these commands, it restores the display on the image display device 5 with the initial pattern (in this example, the decorative pattern and small pattern "123") stopped based on the background designation command (95 series command) and the customer waiting demo designation command (9F00 command).

In this way, even if a power outage occurs during the ending, the small right-hit promotion effect will be executed from the moment the power is turned on afterwards, so the player can be encouraged to make a right hit at the very least immediately after the power is restored after the power outage, and it is possible to prevent the player from suffering disadvantages such as forgetting to make a right hit and not being able to win in the second start winning slot in the special probability state after the jackpot game state.

[Major effects obtained by characteristic part 075F]
Below, the technical effects obtained by the various configurations of the above-mentioned feature portion 075F are listed individually.

(1-1) A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player based on the display result of a variable display becoming a specific display result,
A launching means (e.g., a ball-hitting operation handle 30) capable of launching a game medium (e.g., a game ball) into a game area in response to an operation by a player;
a guidance display means (for example, a process for executing a right hit suggestion effect or an "Aim for V" effect by the effect control CPU 120) for displaying a guidance display (for example, an image display encouraging a player to hit to the right) that uses an image display to encourage a player to launch the game medium toward a second flow path (for example, a path passing through a left area of the game area) along which the game medium can flow in the game area;
a specific area into which the game medium flowing down the second flow path can enter (for example, a detection area of the V winning switch 075F024 after passing through a V large winning port provided inside the special variable winning ball device 075F007B);
The guidance display includes a first guidance display using an image display of characters and figures (for example, an image display corresponding to the big right hit promotion effect located in the center of the screen shown in FIG. 13-32 (c25)), a second guidance display using an image display smaller than the first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to the small right hit promotion effect located in the upper right corner of the screen shown in FIG. 13-24 (c1)), and a third guidance display using an image display related to the specific area (for example, an image display corresponding to the Aim for V effect shown in FIG. 13-43 (e13)),
The guidance display means is
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, during the execution of a start effect (for example, a fanfare effect) that notifies the start of control of the advantageous state, the first guidance display and the second guidance display are performed (for example, an image display corresponding to a big right hit suggestion effect and an image display corresponding to a small right hit suggestion effect shown in FIG. 13-25 (c4) to FIG. 13-38 (c26)),
Thereafter, the first guidance display is ended while the second guidance display is continued (for example, as shown in FIG. 13-38 (d1) and (d2), a portion in which the image display corresponding to the big right hit suggestion effect is ended while the image display corresponding to the small right hit suggestion effect is continued),
Thereafter, while the game medium is in a state in which it is impossible for the game medium to enter the specific area, the third guidance display is performed and the second guidance display is continued (for example, as shown in FIG. 13-43 (e13), an image display corresponding to the "Aim for V" effect is performed and an image display corresponding to the "Small Right Hit Suggestion" effect is continued),
Thereafter, even after the gaming medium has changed from a state in which it is not possible for the gaming medium to enter the specific area to a state in which it is possible for the gaming medium to enter the specific area, the second guidance display and the third guidance display are continued (for example, as shown in FIG. 13-44 (e15), a portion in which an image display corresponding to the "Aim for V" effect and an image display corresponding to the "Small Right Hit" suggestion effect are continued),
Thereafter, when the game medium enters the specific area, the third guidance display is terminated while the second guidance display is continued (for example, as shown in FIG. 13-44 (e16), a portion in which an image display corresponding to the "Aim for V" effect is terminated while an image display corresponding to the "Small Right Hit Suggestion" effect is continued),
When a power outage occurs while the first and second guidance displays are being displayed (for example, while an image display corresponding to a big right hit suggestion effect and an image display corresponding to a small right hit suggestion effect are being displayed, as shown in FIG. 13-31 (c23)), and when a power outage occurs and the power is restored, and when a power outage occurs while the second and third guidance displays are being displayed (for example, while an image display corresponding to an Aim for V effect and an image display corresponding to a small right hit suggestion effect are being displayed, as shown in FIG. 13-44 (e15)), the image display is displayed again in a manner such that the first and third guidance displays are not displayed and the second guidance display is displayed (for example, the portion where the text image "Recovering..." and the image of the small right hit promotion effect are displayed after power is turned on, as shown in FIG. 13-51 and FIG. 13-57).

(1-2) A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player based on the display result of a variable display becoming a specific display result,
A launching means (e.g., a ball-hitting operation handle 30) capable of launching a game medium (e.g., a game ball) into a game area in response to an operation by a player;
a guidance display means (for example, a process for executing a right hit suggestion effect or an "Aim for V" effect by the effect control CPU 120) for displaying a guidance display (for example, an image display encouraging a player to hit to the right) that uses an image display to encourage a player to launch the game medium toward a second flow path (for example, a path passing through a left area of the game area) along which the game medium can flow in the game area;
a specific area into which the game medium flowing down the second flow path can enter (for example, a detection area of the V winning switch 075F024 after passing through a V large winning port provided inside the special variable winning ball device 075F007B);
The guidance display includes a first guidance display using an image display of characters and figures (for example, an image display corresponding to the big right hit promotion effect located in the center of the screen as shown in FIG. 13-32 (c25)), a second guidance display using an image display smaller than the first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to the small right hit promotion effect located in the upper right corner of the screen as shown in FIG. 13-24 (c1)), and a third guidance display using an image display relating to the specific area (for example, an image display corresponding to the Aim for V effect as shown in FIG. 13-43 (e13)).
The guidance display means is
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, during the execution of a start effect (for example, a fanfare effect) that notifies the start of control of the advantageous state, the first guidance display and the second guidance display are performed (for example, an image display corresponding to a big right hit suggestion effect and an image display corresponding to a small right hit suggestion effect shown in FIG. 13-25 (c4) to FIG. 13-38 (c26)),
Thereafter, in conjunction with the release of the attacker corresponding to the first round, the first guidance display is ended while the second guidance display is continued (for example, as shown in FIG. 13-38 (d1) and (d2), the image display corresponding to the big right hit suggestion effect is ended while the image display corresponding to the small right hit suggestion effect is continued),
Thereafter, in conjunction with the closing of the attacker corresponding to the round preceding the round in which the specific area can be entered, the third guidance display is performed and the second guidance display is continued (for example, as shown in FIG. 13-43 (e13), a portion in which an image corresponding to the "Aim for V" effect is displayed and an image corresponding to the "Small Right Hit" suggestion effect is continued),
Thereafter, in conjunction with the release of the attacker corresponding to the round preceding the round that allows entry into the specific area, the second guidance display and the third guidance display are continued (for example, as shown in FIG. 13-44 (e15), a portion in which an image display corresponding to the "Aim for V" effect and an image display corresponding to the "Small Right Hit" suggestion effect are continued),
Thereafter, in conjunction with the game medium entering the specific area, the third guidance display is terminated while the second guidance display is continued (for example, as shown in FIG. 13-44 (e16), a portion in which an image display corresponding to the "Aim for V" effect is terminated while an image display corresponding to the "Small Right Hit Suggestion" effect is continued),
When a power outage occurs while the first and second guidance displays are being displayed (for example, while an image display corresponding to a big right hit suggestion effect and an image display corresponding to a small right hit suggestion effect are being displayed, as shown in FIG. 13-31 (c23)), and when a power outage occurs and the power is restored, and when a power outage occurs while the second and third guidance displays are being displayed (for example, while an image display corresponding to an Aim for V effect and an image display corresponding to a small right hit suggestion effect are being displayed, as shown in FIG. 13-44 (e15)), the image display is displayed again in a manner such that the first and third guidance displays are not displayed and the second guidance display is displayed (for example, the portion where the text image "Recovering..." and the image of the small right hit promotion effect are displayed after power is turned on, as shown in FIG. 13-51 and FIG. 13-57).

(1-3) A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player based on the display result of a variable display becoming a specific display result,
A launching means (e.g., a ball-hitting operation handle 30) capable of launching a game medium (e.g., a game ball) into a game area in response to an operation by a player;
a guidance display means (for example, a process for executing a right hit suggestion effect or an "Aim for V" effect by the effect control CPU 120) for displaying a guidance display (for example, an image display encouraging a player to hit to the right) that uses an image display to encourage a player to launch the game medium toward a second flow path (for example, a path passing through a left area of the game area) along which the game medium can flow in the game area;
a specific area into which the game medium flowing down the second flow path can enter (for example, a detection area of the V winning switch 075F024 after passing through a V large winning port provided inside the special variable winning ball device 075F007B);
The guidance display includes a first guidance display using an image display of characters and figures (for example, an image display corresponding to the big right hit promotion effect located in the center of the screen as shown in FIG. 13-32 (c25)), a second guidance display using an image display smaller than the first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to the small right hit promotion effect located in the upper right corner of the screen as shown in FIG. 13-24 (c1)), and a third guidance display using an image display relating to the specific area (for example, an image display corresponding to the Aim for V effect as shown in FIG. 13-43 (e13)).
The guidance display means is
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, during the execution of a start effect (for example, a fanfare effect) that notifies the start of control of the advantageous state, the first guidance display and the second guidance display are performed (for example, an image display corresponding to the big right hit suggestion effect and an image display corresponding to the small right hit suggestion effect shown in FIG. 13-25 (c4) to FIG. 13-38 (c26)),
Then, by receiving a 1R open command (for example, a command to specify that the large prize opening is open (A101 command)), the first information display is terminated while the second information display is continued (for example, as shown in FIG. 13-38 (d1) and (d2), the image display corresponding to the large right hit suggestion effect is terminated while the image display corresponding to the small right hit suggestion effect is continued),
Then, by receiving a command after the end of the third round (for example, a command specifying after the opening of the large prize opening (A203 command)), the third guidance display is performed and the second guidance display is continued (for example, as shown in FIG. 13-43 (e13), an image corresponding to the "Aim for V" effect is displayed and an image corresponding to the "Small Right Hit" suggestion effect is continued),
Thereafter, by receiving a 4R opening command (for example, a command for designating that the large prize opening is in progress (A104 command)), the second guidance display and the third guidance display are continued (for example, as shown in FIG. 13-44 (e15), a portion for continuing the image display corresponding to the "Aim for V" effect and the image display corresponding to the "Small Right Hit Suggestion" effect),
Thereafter, by receiving a V-pass command (for example, a command for designating passage of a probability change determination device (AD00 command)), the third guidance display is terminated while the second guidance display is continued (for example, as shown in FIG. 13-44 (e16), a portion in which the image display corresponding to the "Aim for V" effect is terminated while the image display corresponding to the "Small Right Hit" suggestion effect is continued),
When a power outage occurs while the first and second guidance displays are being displayed (for example, while an image display corresponding to a big right hit suggestion effect and an image display corresponding to a small right hit suggestion effect are being displayed, as shown in FIG. 13-31 (c23)), and when a power outage occurs and the power is restored, and when a power outage occurs while the second and third guidance displays are being displayed (for example, while an image display corresponding to an Aim for V effect and an image display corresponding to a small right hit suggestion effect are being displayed, as shown in FIG. 13-44 (e15)), the image display is displayed again in a manner such that the first and third guidance displays are not displayed and the second guidance display is displayed (for example, the portion where the text image "Recovering..." and the image of the small right hit promotion effect are displayed after power is turned on, as shown in FIG. 13-51 and FIG. 13-57).

Specifically, during the execution of the fanfare effect, the large right hit promotion effect and the small right hit promotion effect are executed to emphasize the right hit promotion, so that the player is sure to recognize that he will hit the right in the subsequent games, and thereafter, the large right hit promotion effect is terminated while the small right hit promotion effect is continued as it is, so that the player is not appealed to hit the right excessively. In addition, the "Aim for V" effect for aiming at the V large prize winning hole is executed from the point when the V large prize winning hole is still closed, and is continued even after the V large prize winning hole is opened, so that the importance of aiming at the V large prize winning hole is appealed to the player, and it is possible to ensure that the game ball enters the V large prize winning hole. In addition, by terminating the "Aim for V" effect after the V large prize winning hole is closed due to the occurrence of the V prize winning, it is possible to prevent unnecessary promotional notification from being given to the player. Furthermore, in the above-mentioned flow, the small right hit promotion effect is continuously executed, so that the player can be always encouraged to hit the right even before the V large prize winning hole is opened and after the V prize winning occurs. This allows the instruction to the player to hit to the right to be executed in an optimal manner. Also, in both cases where a power outage occurs while an image corresponding to a big right hit suggestion effect and an image corresponding to a small right hit suggestion effect are being displayed and the power is restored, and in both cases where a power outage occurs while an image corresponding to an Aim for V effect and an image corresponding to a small right hit suggestion effect are being displayed and the power is restored, the text image "Recovering..." and the image of the small right hit promotion effect are displayed after the power is turned on, so that even if a power outage occurs, the player can be encouraged to continue hitting to the right in subsequent games at the very least.

(2) A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player based on the display result of a variable display becoming a specific display result,
A launching means (e.g., a ball-hitting operation handle 30) capable of launching a game medium (e.g., a game ball) into a game area in response to an operation by a player;
a guidance display means (for example, a process for executing a right-hit promotion presentation by a presentation control CPU 120) for displaying a guidance display (for example, an image display encouraging a player to hit to the right) using an image display to encourage a player to shoot the game medium toward a second flow-down path (for example, a path passing through a left area of the game area) along which the game medium can flow in the game area,
The guidance display includes a first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to a big right hit promotion effect located in the center of the screen shown in FIG. 13-32 (c25)) and a second guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to a small right hit promotion effect located in the upper right corner of the screen shown in FIG. 13-24 (c1)),
The guidance display means is
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, during a predetermined period in which a start effect (e.g., a fanfare effect) that notifies the start of control of the advantageous state is being executed, the first guidance display and the second guidance display are displayed (e.g., an image display corresponding to the big right hit promotion effect and an image display corresponding to the small right hit promotion effect shown in FIG. 13-25 (c4) to FIG. 13-38 (c26)),
In a period after the predetermined period, the first guidance display is ended while the second guidance display is continued (for example, as shown in FIG. 13-39 (e1) to FIG. 13-46 (e21), during a jackpot round, an image display corresponding to a big right hit promotion effect is not performed while an image display corresponding to a small right hit promotion effect is continued),
In a special state (e.g., a probability variable state, a time-saving state) after the control of the advantageous state ends, the second guidance display is continued (for example, a portion that continues the image display corresponding to the small right hit promotion performance in the probability variable state after a big win as shown in FIG. 13-48 and FIG. 13-49),
The second guidance display is not affected by the switching display of the background image (for example, switching display by fade-out and fade-in) performed in association with the control of the advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. 13-38 (d1) to FIG. 13-39 (d4), a portion that continues the image display corresponding to the small right hit promotion performance without being affected by the switching display of the background image by fade-in and fade-out),
The second guidance display is not affected by the display of a performance image in the special state (for example, an image display due to a group preview performance) (for example, a portion that continues to display an image corresponding to the small right hit promotion performance without being affected by the image display due to the group preview performance, as shown in Figure 13-49 (g5)).

Specifically, during the execution of the fanfare effect, the large right hit promotion effect and the small right hit promotion effect are executed to emphasize the right hit promotion, so that the player is sure to recognize that he will hit the right in the subsequent game, and during the subsequent big win round, the large right hit promotion effect is ended while the small right hit promotion effect is continued, so that the player is not appealed to hit the right excessively. In addition, by continuing the small right hit promotion effect even in the probability variable state or time-saving state after the big win game state ends, the player can be encouraged to always hit the right. Furthermore, after the big win occurs, the small right hit promotion effect is not affected by the switching display (fade out, fade in, etc.) that is performed when switching from the fanfare effect to the big win round, and the small right hit promotion effect is not affected by the image display of the group notice effect that is performed in the probability variable state or time-saving state after the big win game state ends, so that the player can be encouraged to always hit the right. This makes it possible to preferably execute the instruction to the player to hit the right.

(3-1) A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs a variable display and can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result,
A launching means (e.g., a ball-hitting operation handle 30) capable of launching a game medium (e.g., a game ball) into a game area in response to an operation by a player;
a guidance display means (for example, a process for executing a right-hit promotion presentation by the presentation control CPU 120) for displaying a guidance display (for example, a display of an image encouraging a player to shoot a right-hit) that encourages a player to shoot the game medium toward a second flow-down path (for example, a path passing through a left area of the game area) through which the game medium can flow down in the game area, out of a first flow-down path (for example, a path passing through a left area of the game area) and a second flow-down path (for example, a path passing through a right area of the game area);
A guidance means (for example, a process of executing a right hit suggestion effect by the frame lamp by the effect control CPU 120) that performs guidance light emission to encourage a player by moving the light emitting point of the light emitting means (for example, the frame right lamp 075F009R and the frame left lamp 075F009L) to launch the game medium toward the second flow-down path;
A sound output means (e.g., speakers 8L, 8R) for outputting sound,
The guidance display includes a first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to a big right hit promotion effect located in the center of the screen shown in FIG. 13-32 (c25)) and a second guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to a small right hit promotion effect located in the upper right corner of the screen shown in FIG. 13-24 (c1)),
As the first guidance display, an image display is performed in a manner more emphasized than the second guidance display, urging the player to launch the game medium toward the second flow-down path (for example, a large right hit promotion effect uses an image display of larger characters and figures than a small right hit promotion effect),
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the guidance display means performs the second guidance display before the completion of the name display of the advantageous state (for example, display of a name image indicating the name of the jackpot gaming state), which is part of a start effect (for example, a fanfare effect) that notifies the start of control of the advantageous state (for example, a portion that performs an image display corresponding to a small right hit promotion effect before the display of a name image indicating the name of the jackpot gaming state is completed, as shown in FIG. 13-24 (c1)), and performs the first guidance display after the completion of the name display of the advantageous state (a portion that performs an image display corresponding to a large right hit promotion effect after the display of a name image indicating the name of the jackpot gaming state is completed, as shown in FIG. 13-25 to FIG. 13-33).
The guidance means repeats the guidance light emission multiple times in conjunction with the first guidance display (for example, as shown in Figs. 13-25 to 13-33, a portion in which the frame lamp is lit in an arch shape from the left side to the right side twice in conjunction with an image display corresponding to a big right hit promotion performance),
The sound output means includes:
In conjunction with the first of the multiple guide lights, a corresponding sound corresponding to the guide light is output (for example, as shown in Fig. 13-25 (c4) to Fig. 13-32 (c24), when the frame lamp is lit in the first big right hit promotion performance, a sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion performance).
Among the multiple times of the guidance light emission, when the last guidance light emission is performed, the corresponding sound is not output (for example, as shown in FIG. 13-32 (c26) to FIG. 13-33 (c29), when the frame lamp is lit in the second big right hit promotion performance, the sound is not output from the speakers 8L, 8R in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion performance),
After the control of the advantageous state is started, a sound corresponding to the advantageous state is output (for example, as shown in FIG. 13-39 (e1), a portion that outputs a sound from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the performance during the round after the start of the jackpot round),
In a special state (e.g., a sure-win state, a time-saving state) which is different from the advantageous state and is advantageous to the player after the control of the advantageous state ends, when the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the corresponding sound is not output (for example, as shown in Figure 13-50 (h2), in the case of a consecutive jackpot on special chart 2, a part in which no sound is output from speakers 8L, 8R in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance).

Specifically, after a jackpot occurs, a small right-hit promotion effect is first executed to encourage the player to hit the right modestly, and then a name image showing the name of the jackpot gaming state is displayed to make the player aware that the jackpot gaming state will be controlled. Then, after making the player aware that a jackpot round has started, a large right-hit promotion effect is used to notify the player to hit the right in an emphasized manner, thereby ensuring that the player will hit the right in subsequent games. Also, while the large right-hit promotion effect is being executed, the lit area of the frame lamp moves to the right to promote right hits, so that the player can be more effectively encouraged to hit the right. Furthermore, when the first right hit promotion is performed by the frame lamp, a sound corresponding to the right hit promotion is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in conjunction with the right hit promotion, whereas when the last (second in this embodiment) right hit promotion is performed by the frame lamp, a sound corresponding to the right hit promotion is not output from the speakers 8L and 8R in conjunction with the right hit promotion. Therefore, the sound corresponding to the right hit promotion does not overlap with the BGM during the jackpot round output after the big right hit promotion performance is executed, and the BGM during the jackpot round can be smoothly heard by the player. Also, in the probability change state or time reduction state after the jackpot game state, if a consecutive hit occurs with a special chart 2 hit, since the right hit promotion has already been performed, the big right hit promotion performance is not executed as in the first hit with a special chart 1 hit, and the sound corresponding to the right hit promotion performance linked thereto is not output, so that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling annoyed by the right hit promotion being frequently emphasized. This allows the instruction to the player to hit right to be executed appropriately.

(3-2) A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs a variable display and can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result,
A launching means (e.g., a ball-hitting operation handle 30) capable of launching a game medium (e.g., a game ball) into a game area in response to an operation by a player;
a guidance display means (for example, a process for executing a right-hit promotion presentation by the presentation control CPU 120) for displaying a guidance display (for example, a display of an image encouraging a player to shoot a right-hit) that encourages a player to shoot the game medium toward a second flow-down path (for example, a path passing through a left area of the game area) through which the game medium can flow down in the game area, out of a first flow-down path (for example, a path passing through a left area of the game area) and a second flow-down path (for example, a path passing through a right area of the game area);
A guidance means (for example, a process of executing a right hit suggestion effect by the frame lamp by the effect control CPU 120) that performs guidance light emission to encourage a player by moving the light emitting point of the light emitting means (for example, the frame right lamp 075F009R and the frame left lamp 075F009L) to launch the game medium toward the second flow-down path;
A sound output means (e.g., speakers 8L, 8R) for outputting sound,
The guidance display includes a first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to a big right hit promotion effect located in the center of the screen shown in FIG. 13-32 (c25)) and a second guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to a small right hit promotion effect located in the upper right corner of the screen shown in FIG. 13-24 (c1)),
As the first guidance display, an image display is performed in a manner more emphasized than the second guidance display, urging the player to launch the game medium toward the second flow-down path (for example, a large right hit promotion effect uses an image display of larger characters and figures than a small right hit promotion effect),
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the guidance display means performs the second guidance display before the completion of the name display of the advantageous state (for example, display of a name image indicating the name of the jackpot gaming state), which is part of a start effect (for example, a fanfare effect) that notifies the start of control of the advantageous state (for example, a portion that performs an image display corresponding to a small right hit promotion effect before the display of a name image indicating the name of the jackpot gaming state is completed, as shown in FIG. 13-24 (c1)), and performs the first guidance display after the completion of the name display of the advantageous state (a portion that performs an image display corresponding to a large right hit promotion effect after the display of a name image indicating the name of the jackpot gaming state is completed, as shown in FIG. 13-25 to FIG. 13-33).
The guidance means repeats the guidance light emission multiple times in conjunction with the first guidance display (for example, as shown in Figs. 13-25 to 13-33, a portion in which the frame lamp is lit in an arch shape from the left side to the right side twice in conjunction with an image display corresponding to a big right hit promotion performance),
The sound output means includes:
In conjunction with the first of the multiple guide lights, a corresponding sound corresponding to the guide light is output (for example, as shown in Fig. 13-25 (c4) to Fig. 13-32 (c24), when the frame lamp is lit in the first big right hit promotion performance, a sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion performance).
Among the multiple times of the guidance light emission, when the last guidance light emission is performed, the corresponding sound is not output (for example, as shown in FIG. 13-32 (c26) to FIG. 13-33 (c29), when the frame lamp is lit in the second big right hit promotion performance, the sound is not output from the speakers 8L, 8R in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion performance),
After the control of the advantageous state is started, a sound corresponding to the advantageous state is output (for example, as shown in FIG. 13-39 (e1), a portion that outputs a sound from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the performance during the round after the start of the jackpot round),
The guidance means does not emit the guidance light when the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result in a special state (e.g., a sure-win state, a time-saving state) which is different from the advantageous state and is advantageous to the player after the control of the advantageous state ends (for example, as shown in Figure 13-50 (h2), in the case of a consecutive jackpot on special chart 2, the frame lamp does not light up in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance).

Specifically, after a jackpot occurs, a small right-hit promotion effect is first executed to encourage the player to hit the right modestly, and then a name image showing the name of the jackpot gaming state is displayed to make the player aware that the jackpot gaming state will be controlled. Then, after making the player aware that a jackpot round has started, a large right-hit promotion effect is used to notify the player to hit the right in an emphasized manner, thereby ensuring that the player will hit the right in subsequent games. Also, while the large right-hit promotion effect is being executed, the lit area of the frame lamp moves to the right to promote right hits, so that the player can be more effectively encouraged to hit the right. Furthermore, when the first right hit promotion is performed by the frame lamp, a sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion in conjunction with the right hit promotion, whereas when the last (second in this embodiment) right hit promotion is performed by the frame lamp, a sound is not output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion. Therefore, the sound corresponding to the right hit promotion does not overlap with the BGM during the jackpot round output after the big right hit promotion performance is executed, and the BGM during the jackpot round can be smoothly heard by the player. Also, in the probability change state or time reduction state after the jackpot game state, if a consecutive hit occurs with a special chart 2 hit, since the right hit promotion has already been performed, the big right hit promotion performance is not executed as in the first hit with a special chart 1 hit, and the frame lamp is not lit in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion performance in conjunction with the right hit promotion, so that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling annoyed by the right hit promotion being frequently emphasized. This allows the instruction to the player to hit right to be executed appropriately.

(4-1) A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs a variable display and can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result,
A launching means (e.g., a ball-hitting operation handle 30) capable of launching a game medium (e.g., a game ball) into a game area in response to an operation by a player;
a guidance display means (for example, a process for executing a right-hit promotion presentation by the presentation control CPU 120) for displaying a guidance display (for example, a display of an image encouraging a player to shoot a right-hit) that encourages a player to shoot the game medium toward a second flow-down path (for example, a path passing through a left area of the game area) through which the game medium can flow down in the game area, out of a first flow-down path (for example, a path passing through a left area of the game area) and a second flow-down path (for example, a path passing through a right area of the game area);
A guidance means (for example, a process of executing a right hit suggestion effect by the frame lamp by the effect control CPU 120) that performs guidance light emission to encourage a player by moving the light emitting point of the light emitting means (for example, the frame right lamp 075F009R and the frame left lamp 075F009L) to launch the game medium toward the second flow-down path;
A sound output means (e.g., speakers 8L, 8R) for outputting sound,
The guidance display includes a first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to a big right hit promotion effect located in the center of the screen shown in FIG. 13-32 (c25)) and a second guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to a small right hit promotion effect located in the upper right corner of the screen shown in FIG. 13-24 (c1)),
As the first guidance display, an image display is performed in a manner more emphasized than the second guidance display, urging the player to launch the game medium toward the second flow-down path (for example, a large right hit promotion effect uses an image display of larger characters and figures than a small right hit promotion effect),
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the guidance display means performs the second guidance display before the completion of the name display of the advantageous state (for example, display of a name image indicating the name of the jackpot gaming state), which is part of a start effect (for example, a fanfare effect) that notifies the start of control of the advantageous state (for example, a portion that performs an image display corresponding to a small right hit promotion effect before the display of a name image indicating the name of the jackpot gaming state is completed, as shown in FIG. 13-24 (c1)), and performs the first guidance display after the completion of the name display of the advantageous state (a portion that performs an image display corresponding to a large right hit promotion effect after the display of a name image indicating the name of the jackpot gaming state is completed, as shown in FIG. 13-25 to FIG. 13-33).
The guidance means performs the guidance light emission in conjunction with the first guidance display after turning off the light-emitting means (for example, as shown in Figs. 13-25 to 13-33, a part that turns off the frame lamp once and then lights it in an arch shape from the left side to the right side in conjunction with an image display corresponding to a big right hit promotion performance),
The sound output means includes:
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, a corresponding sound corresponding to the guide light is output in conjunction with the guidance light being emitted (for example, as shown in Fig. 13-25 (c4) to Fig. 13-32 (c24), when the frame lamp is lit in the first big right hit promotion performance, a sound is output from speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion performance).
Thereafter, in a special state (e.g., a sure-win state, a time-saving state) which is different from the advantageous state and is advantageous to the player after the control of the advantageous state ends, when the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the corresponding sound is not output (for example, as shown in Figure 13-50 (h2), in the case of a consecutive jackpot on special chart 2, a part in which no sound is output from speakers 8L, 8R in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance).

Specifically, after a jackpot occurs, a small right-hit promotion effect is first executed to encourage the player to hit the right side modestly, and then a name image showing the name of the jackpot game state is displayed to make the player aware that the game state is controlled to the jackpot game state. Then, after making the player aware that the jackpot round has started, the big right-hit promotion effect is used to notify the player that he or she will hit the right side in an emphasized manner, so that the player can be sure to recognize that he or she will hit the right side in subsequent games. In addition, while the big right-hit promotion effect is being executed, the frame lamp is turned off once, and then the lit portion of the lamp moves to the right to promote right hitting, so that the player can be encouraged to hit the right side more clearly and effectively. Furthermore, when the frame lamp is used to promote right hitting, a sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right hitting promotion, so that the player can be encouraged to hit the right side by the sound as well. In addition, in the event of a consecutive win on special chart 2 in a probability variation state or time-saving state after a big win game state, the right-hit promotion has already been performed, so the big right-hit promotion effect is not executed as in the case of the first win on special chart 1, and no sound corresponding to the right-hit promotion effect linked to it is output, so it is possible to prevent the player from feeling annoyed by the right-hit promotion being frequently emphasized. This allows the instruction to the player to hit right to be executed appropriately.

(4-2) A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs a variable display and can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result,
A launching means (e.g., a ball-hitting operation handle 30) capable of launching a game medium (e.g., a game ball) into a game area in response to an operation by a player;
a guidance display means (for example, a process for executing a right-hit promotion presentation by the presentation control CPU 120) for displaying a guidance display (for example, a display of an image encouraging a player to shoot a right-hit) that encourages a player to shoot the game medium toward a second flow-down path (for example, a path passing through a left area of the game area) through which the game medium can flow down in the game area, out of a first flow-down path (for example, a path passing through a left area of the game area) and a second flow-down path (for example, a path passing through a right area of the game area);
A guidance means (for example, a process of executing a right hit suggestion effect by the frame lamp by the effect control CPU 120) that performs guidance light emission to encourage a player by moving the light emitting point of the light emitting means (for example, the frame right lamp 075F009R and the frame left lamp 075F009L) to launch the game medium toward the second flow-down path;
A sound output means (e.g., speakers 8L, 8R) for outputting sound,
The guidance display includes a first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to a big right hit promotion effect located in the center of the screen shown in FIG. 13-32 (c25)) and a second guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to a small right hit promotion effect located in the upper right corner of the screen shown in FIG. 13-24 (c1)),
As the first guidance display, an image display is performed in a manner more emphasized than the second guidance display, urging the player to launch the game medium toward the second flow-down path (for example, a large right hit promotion effect uses an image display of larger characters and figures than a small right hit promotion effect),
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the guidance display means performs the second guidance display before the completion of the name display of the advantageous state (for example, display of a name image indicating the name of the jackpot gaming state), which is part of a start effect (for example, a fanfare effect) that notifies the start of control of the advantageous state (for example, a portion that performs an image display corresponding to a small right hit promotion effect before the display of a name image indicating the name of the jackpot gaming state is completed, as shown in FIG. 13-24 (c1)), and performs the first guidance display after the completion of the name display of the advantageous state (a portion that performs an image display corresponding to a large right hit promotion effect after the display of a name image indicating the name of the jackpot gaming state is completed, as shown in FIG. 13-25 to FIG. 13-33).
The guiding means is
After turning off the light-emitting means, the guidance light is emitted in conjunction with the first guidance display (for example, as shown in Figs. 13-25 to 13-33, after turning off the light once, the frame lamp is lit in an arch shape from the left side to the right side in conjunction with an image display corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance),
Thereafter, in a special state (e.g., a sure-win state, a time-saving state) which is different from the advantageous state and is advantageous to the player after the control of the advantageous state ends, when the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the guidance light is not emitted (for example, as shown in Figure 13-50 (h2), in the case of a consecutive jackpot on special chart 2, the frame lamp does not light up in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance).

Specifically, after a jackpot occurs, a small right-hit promotion effect is first executed to encourage the player to hit the right side modestly, and then a name image showing the name of the jackpot game state is displayed to make the player aware that the game state is controlled to the jackpot game state. Then, after making the player aware that the jackpot round has started, the big right-hit promotion effect is used to notify the player that he or she will hit the right side in an emphasized manner, so that the player can be sure to recognize that he or she will hit the right side in subsequent games. In addition, while the big right-hit promotion effect is being executed, the frame lamp is turned off once, and then the lit portion of the lamp moves to the right to promote right hitting, so that the player can be encouraged to hit the right side more clearly and effectively. Furthermore, when the frame lamp is used to promote right hitting, a sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right hitting promotion, so that the player can be encouraged to hit the right side by the sound as well. In addition, in the event of a consecutive win on special chart 2 in a probability variation state or time-saving state after a big win game state, the right-hit promotion has already been performed, so the big right-hit promotion effect is not executed as in the case of the first win on special chart 1, and the frame lamp is not lit in a manner corresponding to the right-hit promotion effect linked to it, so it is possible to prevent the player from feeling annoyed by the right-hit promotion being frequently emphasized. This allows the instruction to the player to hit right to be executed appropriately.

(5) The second guidance display is displayed in a more emphasized manner than the name display of the advantageous state, which is part of the start performance.

Specifically, the image display in the big right-hit promotion effect shown in Figures 13-25 to 13-33 is larger than the name image display in the fanfare effect shown in Figure 13-24 (c2), and the text images appear one by one in stages, and the execution time is longer and more emphasized. This makes it possible to emphasize to the player that he or she should hit to the right.

(6) The guidance means repeats the guidance light emission a plurality of times in conjunction with the first guidance display,
The sound output means includes:
outputting a corresponding sound corresponding to the guidance light emitted in conjunction with the first guidance light emitted among the plurality of guidance light emissions;
Among the multiple times of the guidance light emission, in conjunction with the intermediate guidance light emission, a corresponding sound corresponding to the guidance light emission is not output,
When the final guidance light emission is performed among the multiple guidance light emission, the corresponding sound is not output.

Specifically, among the right-hit promotion effects by the frame lamps that are performed multiple times, the speakers 8L and 8R output a sound corresponding to the right-hit promotion effect in conjunction with the first right-hit promotion, but the speakers 8L and 8R do not output a sound corresponding to the right-hit promotion effect for the second or subsequent right-hit promotions. For example, if the right-hit promotion effect by the frame lamps is performed three times, the speakers 8L and 8R output a sound in conjunction with the first right-hit promotion based on the sound data for the right-hit promotion effect, but do not output a sound in conjunction with the second or subsequent right-hit promotions. In other words, the sound data for the right-hit promotion effect includes only sound data that is linked to the first right-hit promotion. This prevents the sound corresponding to the right-hit promotion from overlapping with the BGM during the jackpot round that is output after the big right-hit promotion effect is performed, and allows the player to smoothly hear the BGM during the jackpot round.

(7) The guidance means repeats the guidance light emission a plurality of times in conjunction with the first guidance display,
The sound output means includes:
outputting a corresponding sound corresponding to the guidance light emitted in conjunction with the first guidance light emitted among the plurality of guidance light emissions;
outputting a corresponding sound corresponding to the guidance light emitted in conjunction with the intermediate guidance light emitted among the multiple guidance light emissions;
When the final guidance light emission is performed among the multiple guidance light emission, the corresponding sound is not output.

Specifically, among the right-hit promotion effects by the frame lamps over multiple times, the speakers 8L and 8R output a sound corresponding to the right-hit promotion effect in conjunction with the first right-hit promotion, and the speakers 8L and 8R also output a sound corresponding to the right-hit promotion effect in conjunction with the subsequent right-hit promotions, but the speakers 8L and 8R do not output a sound corresponding to the right-hit promotion effect for the last right-hit promotion. For example, when the right-hit promotion effect by the frame lamps is executed three times, the speakers 8L and 8R output a sound in conjunction with each of the first and second right-hit promotions based on the sound data for the right-hit promotion effect, and do not output a sound in conjunction with the third right-hit promotion. In other words, the sound data for the right-hit promotion effect only includes sound data in conjunction with each of the first and second right-hit promotions. Note that the sound data only includes sound data in conjunction with one right-hit promotion, and the performance control CPU 120 may execute two loops of sound data in conjunction with one right-hit promotion. Alternatively, the sound data may include sound data linked to two right hit promotions, and the performance control CPU 120 may execute the sound data linked to two right hit promotions once. This allows the player to smoothly hear the background music during the jackpot round without the sound corresponding to the right hit promotion overlapping with the background music during the jackpot round that is output after the big right hit promotion performance is executed.

(8) The light emitting means is composed of a plurality of lamps, and emits the guidance light in conjunction with the first guidance display after all of the plurality of lamps are turned off (for example, as shown in FIG. 13-25(c3), a portion that turns off all of the lamps of the frame lamps once and then lights up the frame lamps in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance).

Specifically, all of the frame lamps are turned off once, and then the frame lamps are lit in a manner that corresponds to the big right hit promotion performance, so that the player can be encouraged to hit to the right in a clearer and more effective manner.

(9) The light emitting means emits the guidance light in association with the first guidance display based on data defined by a lighting data table,
The lighting data table includes a parent table (for example, the parent table shown in Figure 13-34) that specifies the execution time of the guidance light emission, a child table (for example, the child table shown in Figure 13-35) that indicates a grandchild table in which data to be referenced by the light emission means is specified, and the grandchild table (for example, the child table shown in Figures 13-36 and 13-37).

Specifically, the game effect lamps 9, including the frame lamps, refer to the parent table to determine the execution time of the big right hit promotion effect, refer to the child table to determine the grandchild table in which the lighting data is specified, and refer to the grandchild table to turn on/blink/turn off. This allows the game effect lamps 9 to be lit efficiently in an appropriate lighting mode.

(10) The grandchild table corresponding to the light-emitting means that does not emit the guidance light is not specified in the child table.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 13-35, the bottom left lamp 075F009D, the upper attacker lamp 075F009U, and the left board lamp 075F009E are not used in the big right hit promotion performance and are therefore turned off, so no grandchild table is provided. This allows the capacity of the lighting data used in the ROM 121 to be reduced as much as possible.

(11) The guidance means performs the guidance light emission by sequentially moving the light emitting portion of the light emitting means in the direction in which the player shoots the game medium (for example, a portion that sequentially lights up each lamp included in the frame lamp from the left side to the right side of the game area as shown in Figures 13-25 to 13-33).

Specifically, as shown in Figures 13-25 to 13-33, by lighting up each lamp included in the frame lamp in sequence from the left side to the right side of the play area, a big right hit promotion effect is executed, which clearly encourages the player to hit to the right.

(12) The guidance means emits the guidance light while changing the light color of the light emitting means (for example, a part that lights up a frame lamp in seven colors).

Specifically, the frame lamp lights up in seven colors while performing a big right-hit promotion effect, more effectively encouraging players to hit to the right.

(13) The second guidance display is not affected by fade-in and fade-out switching of background images performed in association with the control of the advantageous state (for example, as shown in Figures 13-38 (d1) to 13-39 (d4), a portion that continues to display an image corresponding to the small right hit promotion effect without being affected by fade-in and fade-out switching of background images).

Specifically, as shown in Fig. 13-38 (d1) to Fig. 13-39 (d4), the small right-hit promotion effect continues without being affected by the background image switching display caused by the fade-in and fade-out when switching from the fanfare effect to the jackpot round. This makes it possible to encourage the player to continue hitting to the right even if the background image switching display causes the fanfare effect to switch to the jackpot round.

(14) The second guidance display, as a display of a performance image in the special state, is not affected by a display in a preview performance that suggests that the display result of the variable display will be the specific display result (for example, as shown in FIG. 13-49 (g5), a portion that continues to display an image corresponding to a small right hit promotion performance without being affected by the image display in the group preview performance).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 13-49 (g5), in the probability variable state after the favorable state for a jackpot ends, the small right-hit promotion effect continues without being affected by the display in the advance notice effect that suggests that a jackpot will occur. As a result, even if the decorative pattern becomes difficult to see due to the advance notice effect being executed, the arrow image and text image in the small right-hit promotion effect continue to be displayed without being hindered in visibility, so the player can be encouraged to continue hitting to the right.

(15) In the special state, when the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the corresponding sound is not output and the guide light is not emitted either (for example, as shown in FIG. 13-50 (h2), in the case of consecutive wins on special chart 2, no sound is output from speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion effect, and the frame lamp does not light up in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion effect).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 13-50 (h2), in the case of consecutive wins on special chart 2, the sound is not output from speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion effect, as in the case of the first win, and the frame lamp is not lit in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion effect. This makes it possible to prevent the player from feeling annoyed by the right hit promotion being frequently emphasized.

[Modification of characteristic portion 075F]
A modified example of the pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the above-mentioned characteristic part 075F will be described.

(About turning off the lights before the big right hit promotion performance is performed)
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 13-25 (c3), all the lamps of the frame lamps are turned off once, and then the frame lamps are turned on in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance. However, it is not limited to turning off all the lamps, and some of the lamps may be turned on. For example, the lamp that is turned on first in the big right hit promotion performance (in this example, the fourth lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L) may be turned on. In this way, the connection when the frame lamps are turned on in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance afterwards can be clearly seen.

(About the display change during the big win round)
In this embodiment, as shown in Fig. 13-38 (d1) to Fig. 13-39 (d4), when switching from the fanfare effect to the jackpot round, the background image is switched by fading in and out, but this is not limited to this. For example, as the switching display during the jackpot round, a whiteout effect in which a pure white screen is inserted between the fanfare effect and the jackpot round, or a blackout effect in which a pure black screen is inserted, may be used.

In addition, the display change during the jackpot round may be to display a BGM selection screen for selecting BGM (music), and switch to a background image corresponding to the BGM selected on the BGM selection screen.

In addition, the switching display during the jackpot round may be a mode selection screen that allows the player to select a presentation mode, and the background image may be changed to one that corresponds to the mode selected on the mode selection screen.

In either case, even if a special switching display is performed during a big win round, it is important that the image display corresponding to the small right hit promotion effect is not affected.

(Display of the performance image during the probability change state after the big hit game ball state)
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 13-49 (g5), the image display by the group notice effect is exemplified as the display of the effect image in the probability variable state after the big hit game ball state, but it is not limited to this. For example, as the display of the effect image in the probability variable state after the big hit game ball state, a whiteout effect in which a pure white screen is inserted during the reach effect, a blackout effect in which a pure black screen is inserted, a pseudo consecutive notice effect in which the decorative pattern changes and the temporary stop are repeated multiple times, or a light guide plate provided on the front side of the play area is turned on or blinked to make the visibility of the decorative pattern difficult may be used. In either case, even if a special effect display is performed in the probability variable state after the big hit game ball state, it is sufficient that the image display corresponding to the small right hit promotion effect is not affected.

(About the "Aim for the V" production)
In this embodiment, the detection area of the V winning switch 075F024 after passing through the V large winning hole provided inside the special variable winning ball device 075F007B is exemplified as the specific area, and an image pointing to the V large winning hole is displayed as the "Aim for V" performance as shown in Fig. 13-43 (e13). However, this is not limited to this, and the image display in the "Aim for V" performance, which is the third guidance display using an image display related to the specific area, is not limited to pointing to the V large winning hole itself, but may also point to the vicinity of the V large winning hole, or may point to the path leading to the V large winning hole, for example, a lid portion that opens and closes the V large winning hole located upstream of the V large winning hole.

(Regarding the promotion of big right hits)
In this embodiment, as shown in Fig. 13-25 (c4) to Fig. 13-31 (c23), an arrow graphic image appears first, and then the text image "Hit right!!" appears, but this is not limited to this. For example, the text image "Hit right!!" may appear first, and then the arrow graphic image may appear. In addition, the image display of the large right hit promotion effect, which is an example of the first guidance display, is composed of an arrow image and a text image, whereas the image display of the small right hit promotion effect, which is an example of the second guidance display, may be composed of only an arrow image or only a text image.

(About advantageous situations)
In this embodiment, the period of the "advantageous state" is exemplified as the period shown in FIG. 13-24 (c1) to FIG. 13-47 (f4) (the period from t3 in FIG. 13-20 to t16 in FIG. 13-21), but is not limited thereto. For example, the period of the "advantageous state" may be the period excluding the fanfare effect period, that is, the period shown in FIG. 13-39 (d3) to FIG. 13-47 (f4) (the period from t4 in FIG. 13-20 to t16 in FIG. 13-21). In addition, the fanfare effect and the big right hit promotion effect may be executed during the period in which the pattern that will cause a jackpot is determined (pattern determination period).

(About the right-hand hit promotion effect in the case of the first hit)
In this embodiment, in the case of a jackpot on a special chart 1, the speakers 8L and 8R output a sound in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance, and the frame lamp lights up in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance, but this is not limited to this. For example, the manner of the big right hit promotion performance of the speakers 8L and 8R and the frame lamp may be made different depending on the type of jackpot on a special chart 1. For example, when a jackpot on a special chart 1 is a normal jackpot, the frame lamp lights up in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance, while the speakers 8L and 8R do not output a sound in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance, and when a jackpot on a special chart 1 is a guaranteed jackpot, the frame lamp lights up in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance, and the speakers 8L and 8R may output a sound in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance. In addition, if the jackpot on special chart 1 is a normal jackpot, the frame lamp may not light up in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance, and the speakers 8L, 8R may not output sound in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance.

(About the right-hit promotion effect in the case of consecutive wins on special chart 2)
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 13-50 (h2), in the case of consecutive wins on special chart 2, the speakers 8L and 8R do not output sounds in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance, and the frame lamp does not light up in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance, but this is not limited to this. For example, the frame lamp may light up in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance, while the speakers 8L and 8R may not output sounds in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance.

Also, depending on the type of consecutive wins on the special chart 2, the manner of the big right hit promotion performance of the speakers 8L, 8R and the frame lamp may be made different. For example, if the jackpot on the special chart 1 is a normal jackpot, the frame lamp may be lit in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance, while the speakers 8L, 8R may not output a sound in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance, and if the consecutive win on the special chart 2 is a sure-win jackpot, the frame lamp may be lit in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance, and the speakers 8L, 8R may output a sound in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance. Also, if the consecutive win on the special chart 2 is a normal jackpot, the frame lamp may not be lit in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance, and the speakers 8L, 8R may not output a sound in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance. If the consecutive hits on special chart 2 are a guaranteed jackpot, unlike the first hit on special chart 1, the frame lamp may light up in a special manner (for example, gold or seven colors) according to the big right hit promotion performance, and the speakers 8L and 8R may output a sound in a special manner according to the big right hit promotion performance. Also, on the screen of the image display device 5, the big right hit promotion performance may be executed in a special manner (for example, a special character appears) different from the first hit on special chart 1.

(Regarding the third guide sign)
In this embodiment, as the third guidance display using the image display related to the specific area, an image pointing to the V-large winning hole during the jackpot round in the probability jackpot has been exemplified, but this is not limited thereto. For example, as the third guidance display, in the probability jackpot state after the jackpot game state ends, an image urging the player to aim at the second start winning hole and launch the game ball, or an image urging the player to aim at the variable winning ball device 6B (normal electric device) and launch the game ball may be displayed. For example, after the ending performance ends, the performance control CPU 120 may display a text image of "Aim!" on the image display device 5 together with an arrow image pointing to the second start winning hole or the variable winning ball device 6B (normal electric device) based on receiving a reserved memory number designation command (C2 system command), a background designation command (95 system command), a pattern change designation command (8D system command), a display result designation command (8C system command), and a change pattern designation command (81 system command) from the CPU 103. Even if such an image display is performed, the graphic and text images in the small right hit promotion performance may be continuously displayed.

(Regarding control of time-saving state by displaying losing symbols)
In each of the above-mentioned features and variations, the transition to the time-saving state (high base state) is exemplified as always passing through a big win state or a small win state in which the special variable winning ball device 7 or the special variable winning ball device 075F007A is activated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, when a time-saving pattern is derived and displayed as a special pattern, the transition to the time-saving state (high base state) may be made without activating the special variable winning ball device 7 or the special variable winning ball device 075F007A.

The time-saving symbols mentioned above may be part of the losing symbols or part of the small winning symbols.

In addition, when performing lottery processing for the derivation and display of time-saving symbols, the lottery may be performed using a random number dedicated to the lottery of time-saving symbols, or the lottery may be performed using a random number for other lotteries such as a lottery random number for a losing symbol, a lottery random number for a big win symbol, a lottery random number for a small win symbol, a random number for determining a big win lottery, or a lottery random number for a fall lottery.

These time-saving symbols may be of multiple types, and may be used in combination with other symbols such as small win symbols and loss symbols. In this case, the small win symbol used in combination may determine whether or not to switch to the time-saving state. However, if a time-saving symbol is selected, no further lottery will be held to determine whether or not to switch to the time-saving state, and no lottery will be held to determine the number of times the time-saving state will be used.

In addition, when a lottery is held for the time-saving symbols and the setting value can be changed, the probability of drawing the time-saving symbols does not change according to the setting value; in other words, the probability of drawing the time-saving symbols is the same for all setting values, but the probability of drawing these time-saving symbols may be different for the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

In addition, the timing of obtaining the random number when drawing the time-saving pattern can be when the ball enters the start hole (first start hole, second start hole), regardless of whether a dedicated random number is used or another random number is used.

In addition, when a lottery for a time-saving pattern is held, if a dedicated random number (time-saving lottery random number) is used, the result of the lottery using the dedicated random number (time-saving lottery random number) is the winning value, if a small win pattern random number is used to draw the time-saving pattern, a specific small win pattern random number value is the winning value, and if a random number for a fall lottery judgment value is used to draw the time-saving pattern, the random number for the fall lottery judgment value is the winning value. In addition, a lottery using a structure may be held, for example, a time-saving area may be set inside the special variable winning ball device 7, and the passing of the game ball through the time-saving area is considered to be the winning of the time-saving pattern.

When the time-saving symbol is selected using a structure and the small winning symbol is used in conjunction with the time-saving symbol, the variable number of times the time-saving state is displayed (the number of times the time-saving symbol is displayed) will not change depending on whether or not the time-saving area is passed through.

In addition, when drawing the time-saving pattern, if a losing pattern random number is used to draw the time-saving pattern, a specific losing pattern random number value can be the winning value, and if a winning pattern random number is used to draw the time-saving pattern, a specific winning pattern random number value can be the winning value. However, when using these random numbers as the winning value, this is only possible for machines whose settings cannot be changed, since performance other than the probability of winning varies depending on the settings.

The timing of the lottery results for the time-saving symbol may be determined after the jackpot has been determined. The lottery for the time-saving symbol is not performed in the time-saving state (high base) or when there is a high probability, regardless of the random number value used in the lottery, but is only performed in the low probability, low base state. However, if the time-saving symbol is derived and displayed when the time-saving state is already in, the number of time-saving times may be reset or the lottery may not be performed, as long as it is determined for each gaming machine.

In addition, the number of times the time-saving symbol is displayed can be set to a number of predetermined times depending on the winning value (symbol) and the game state. In addition, the conditions for granting the time-saving symbol can be different for each symbol.

In addition, when the number of time-saving patterns differs depending on the time-saving pattern, the lottery for allocating the time-saving patterns can be changed between Special Pattern 1 and Special Pattern 2.

In addition, even when the same time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the number of time-saving times awarded may differ depending on the game state at that time. However, this must be determined in advance for the game state.

In addition, the lottery result for the time-saving pattern in a low-probability, low-base state can include the lottery result of "0 time-saving times."

In addition, a lottery for deriving the time-saving end pattern (time-saving end lottery) may be executed, and the number of times the time-saving function is played may be set to the number of times after the start of the time-saving function until the time-saving end pattern is derived and displayed, or until the jackpot pattern is derived and displayed. In other words, the number of times the time-saving function is played may not be set, and may be unlimited in principle.

The number of time-saving times and the conditions for granting the time-saving state may be different between the time-saving state controlled by the time-saving symbol and the time-saving state controlled by the occurrence of a jackpot.

In addition, when a time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the timing at which the time-saving state is controlled is the point at which the symbol determination time for the time-saving symbol has elapsed. However, when a small win symbol random number is used to select the time-saving symbol, if a small win is won and the time-saving state is entered, the timing at which the time-saving state is controlled is the end of the small win operation.

In addition, in the case of a lottery using a structure, the timing at which the time-saving state is controlled is the timing at which the operation of the structure ends in a game state in which the structure is operated (for example, a small win state).

In addition, in the case of a gaming machine that is controlled to a high-probability, low-base state for a specified number of variable displays after a jackpot (a so-called specified-number-of-times-variable-game machine (ST machine)), the machine may be in the high-probability, low-base state when the gaming center opens, and after the high-probability, low-base state has ended after the specified number of variable displays have been executed, it may be controlled to a time-saving state.

In addition, if a time-saving limiter function is installed, when a time-saving pattern is derived and displayed, the number of times for the time-saving limiter is updated. Also, the pattern confirmation time for the time-saving pattern may be different from the pattern confirmation time for other patterns.

In the pachinko game machine 1 relating to the characteristic part 075F, the game state must always go through the jackpot game state in order to be controlled to the time-saving state, so the big right hit promotion effect and the small right hit promotion effect for encouraging the player to hit the right in the time-saving state can be performed during the fanfare effect that is performed when a jackpot occurs. However, if the above-mentioned losing symbol is used as the time-saving symbol, the game state is controlled to the time-saving state without going through the jackpot game state, so when the time-saving state is controlled in response to the display of the losing symbol, time must be secured to execute the big right hit promotion effect and the small right hit promotion effect between the display of the losing symbol and the control to the time-saving state. Therefore, the big right hit promotion effect and the small right hit promotion effect can be executed using the method shown below.

For example, if the pattern determination time until the fluctuation of a losing pattern that is not a time-saving pattern stops is set to 0.5 seconds, the pattern determination time until the losing pattern that is a time-saving pattern stops may be set to 30 seconds, which is longer than the time-saving pattern, and a time-saving fanfare effect may be executed during that time to notify the start of control of the time-saving state. In addition to a display result designation command indicating a normal losing fluctuation that does not grant time saving as a command for specifying a loss, the CPU 103 may prepare a display result designation command indicating a losing fluctuation for time saving that grants time saving in addition to a display result designation command indicating a normal losing fluctuation that does not grant time saving, and transmit a performance control command to the performance control CPU 120 using both commands depending on whether or not the time-saving pattern is a losing fluctuation. Then, when the performance control CPU 120 receives a display result designation command indicating a normal losing fluctuation, the pattern determination time may be set to 0.5 seconds, and when the performance control CPU 120 receives a display result designation command indicating a losing fluctuation for time saving, the pattern determination time may be set to 30 seconds.

The CPU 120 for controlling the effects displays a name image (for example, "Time-saving RUSH") indicating the name of the time-saving state on the image display device 5 during the 30-second pattern determination time, outputs a sound from the speakers 8L, 8R in a manner corresponding to the control of the time-saving state, and lights up the game effect lamp 9 in a manner corresponding to the control of the time-saving state. A portion of such time-saving fanfare effects can be made to correspond to a portion of the fanfare effects as shown in FIG. 13-24 (c2).

13-24(c1), an image (for example, a text image of "Congratulations!") celebrating the time-saving state may be displayed on the image display device 5 before the name image ("Time-saving RUSH") due to this time-saving fanfare effect is displayed, a sound celebrating the time-saving state may be output from the speakers 8L, 8R, or the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 may be changed to a lighting mode celebrating the time-saving state. Also, as a small right-hit promotion effect, a small right-hit promotion effect may be executed in which an image consisting of a figure (an arrow pointing to the right) and text (the text "Right hit") is displayed small on the upper right corner of the image display device 5, a sound encouraging right hitting may be output from the speakers 8L, 8R, or the lighting mode of the right-hit display unit 075F030 and the right-hit display unit 075F055 may be changed to a mode encouraging right hitting (lit). In addition, the image in the small right hit promotion effect displayed in the upper right corner of the image display device 5 and the lighting by the right hit display unit 075F030 and the right hit display unit 075F055 start and end at the same timing. In other words, both are designed to encourage the player to make a right hit for the same period of time.

After that, similar to the example shown in FIG. 13-24(c2), the small right hit promotion effect may continue to be executed while the name image ("Time-saving RUSH") due to the time-saving fanfare effect is displayed, and then, similar to the example shown in FIG. 13-25(c3), the game effect lamp 9 may be temporarily turned off, and then, similar to the examples shown in FIG. 13-25(c4) to FIG. 13-38(c26), the large right hit promotion effect may be executed during the time-saving fanfare effect. During this time, the small right hit promotion effect continues to be executed. Then, after the large right hit promotion effect is executed, the game state may be controlled to the time-saving state, and the small right hit promotion effect may be continued, similar to the examples shown in FIG. 13-48 to FIG. 13-50.

In this way, even if the time-saving state is controlled due to a losing pattern, by ensuring a pattern determination time that is longer than the pattern determination time for a losing pattern that is not a time-saving pattern, it is possible to execute a large right hit promotion effect or a small right hit promotion effect during that pattern determination time.

In the case where the time-saving state is controlled by the losing symbol as a trigger, it is not limited to using the symbol determination time to execute the big right hit promotion effect or the small right hit promotion effect as described above. If there is a reserved memory corresponding to a miss for the next game (change) of the game in which the losing symbol that grants the time-saving is determined, the time-saving fanfare effect may be executed and the big right hit promotion effect or the small right hit promotion effect may be executed in the next game (change). Specifically, if the next game (change) of the game in which the losing symbol is determined is a miss change, the time-saving fanfare effect may be executed and the big right hit promotion effect or the small right hit promotion effect may be executed instead without executing an effect that makes you expect a hit such as a reach effect or a notice effect. However, if the next game (change) of the game in which the losing symbol is determined is a big hit, the fanfare effect as shown in FIG. 13-24 (c1) is executed afterwards, so the time-saving fanfare effect is not executed.

On the other hand, if there is no reserved memory for the next play (change) of a play in which a losing symbol that grants a time-saving bonus has been confirmed, a time-saving fanfare effect may be executed while the symbol is not changing, and a large right hit promotion effect or a small right hit promotion effect may be executed. However, in this case, in order to prevent a customer waiting demonstration effect from being executed and disrupting the time-saving fanfare effect, a customer waiting demo designation command (9F series command) is not sent from CPU 103 to the performance control CPU 120. Alternatively, even if a customer waiting demo designation command (9F series command) is received from CPU 103, the performance control CPU 120 may execute the time-saving fanfare effect without executing a customer waiting demonstration effect.

(Explanation regarding association of characteristic parts)
Each feature may be combined with some or all of the features of other features as appropriate. The combined features or individual features that are not combined may be combined with some or all of the features of other features as appropriate.

The embodiments disclosed herein should be considered to be illustrative and not restrictive in all respects. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims, not by the above description, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope of the claims.

1 Pachinko game machine 2 Game board 3 Game machine frame 4A First special symbol display device 4B Second special symbol display device 5 Image display device 5C, 5L, 5R Decorative symbol display area 6A Winning ball device 6B Variable winning ball device 7 Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R Speaker 9 Game effect lamp 10 General winning port 11 Main board 12 Performance control board 13 Voice control board 14 Lamp control board 15 Relay board 21 Gate switch 22A First start port switch 22B Second start port switch 23 Count switch 25A First hold indicator 25B Second hold indicator 25C General hold indicator 30 Ball hitting operation handle 31A Stick controller 31B Push button 32 Movable body 35A Controller sensor unit 35B Push sensor 41 Passing gate 81, 82 Solenoid 100 Game control microcomputer 101, 121 ROM
102,122 RAM
104, 124 Random number circuit 106 RTC
110 Switch circuit 111 Output circuit 123 Display control unit

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A launching means capable of launching game media in response to an operation by a player,
The display means is
A guidance display can be displayed to prompt the player to launch the game medium toward the second area out of the first area and the second area;
When power supply to the gaming machine is started, a recovery display can be displayed.
The game device further includes a guide light emitting means for illuminating a guide light to prompt a player to launch the game medium toward the second area by moving a light emitting portion of the light emitting means,
the guidance display includes a first guidance display and a second guidance display,
The display means is
The second guidance display is displayed during a first period during a predetermined period in which a start performance related to the start of control of the advantageous state is being executed,
performing the first guidance display and the second guidance display in a second period that is within the predetermined period and that is subsequent to the first period;
In a period after the predetermined period, the first guidance display is terminated while the second guidance display is performed;
In a special state after the control of the advantageous state is ended, the second guidance display is performed;
The guide light emitting means is
During the first period, the light-emitting means can emit light in a manner different from a light-emitting manner of the light-emitting means during the guidance light emission,
turning off the light emitting means before the second period begins;
When the second period starts, the guidance light is emitted in conjunction with the first guidance display;
In either case where a power interruption occurs while the first guidance display and the second guidance display are being displayed during the second period, or where a power interruption occurs while the second guidance display is being displayed during a period after the specified period, when power supply to the gaming machine is subsequently started, the recovery display is displayed and the second guidance display is displayed in common during the display of the recovery display;
The display means is
A background display corresponding to the advantageous state can be displayed;
A display of an amount of the game value to be awarded can be displayed on the front side of the background display,
a first notification display that is displayed when the amount of the game value awarded reaches a first predetermined amount, and a second notification display that is displayed when the amount of the game value awarded reaches a second predetermined amount, on the front side of the background display;
The notification display is a display that ends after a specific period of time has elapsed since the display was started,
The character display included in the notification display is larger in display size than the character display included in the provided amount display,
The character display included in the provision amount display and the notification display includes a specific character display in which a specific area is formed by being surrounded by a line forming the character display.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images